2010 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

In Brief ...... 1-1 Storage ...... 4-1 Climate Controls ...... 8-1 Instrument Panel ...... 1-2 Storage Compartments ...... 4-1 Climate Control Systems ...... 8-1 Initial Drive Information ...... 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Air Vents ...... 8-12 Vehicle Features ...... 1-15 Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 Performance and Driving and Operating ...... 9-1 Maintenance ...... 1-20 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving Information ...... 9-2 Controls ...... 5-2 Starting and Operating ...... 9-15 Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Warning Lights, Gages, and Engine Exhaust ...... 9-21 Keys and Locks ...... 2-2 Indicators ...... 5-10 Automatic Transmission ...... 9-22 Doors ...... 2-9 Information Displays ...... 5-22 Drive Systems ...... 9-25 Vehicle Security...... 2-13 Vehicle Messages ...... 5-31 Brakes ...... 9-25 Exterior Mirrors ...... 2-16 Vehicle Personalization ...... 5-40 Ride Control Systems ...... 9-27 Interior Mirrors ...... 2-19 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-47 Cruise Control ...... 9-30 Windows ...... 2-20 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-32 Roof ...... 2-23 Lighting ...... 6-1 Fuel ...... 9-38 Exterior Lighting ...... 6-1 Towing...... 9-43 Seats and Restraints ...... 3-1 Interior Lighting ...... 6-4 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-53 Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Lighting Features ...... 6-5 Front Seats ...... 3-3 Vehicle Care ...... 10-1 Rear Seats ...... 3-10 Infotainment System ...... 7-1 General Information ...... 10-2 Safety Belts ...... 3-15 Introduction ...... 7-1 Vehicle Checks ...... 10-4 Airbag System ...... 3-32 Radio ...... 7-7 Headlamp Aiming ...... 10-27 Child Restraints ...... 3-47 Audio Players ...... 7-13 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-27 Rear Seat Infotainment ...... 7-37 Electrical System ...... 10-29 Phone ...... 7-48 2010 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

Wheels and Tires ...... 10-36 Jump Starting ...... 10-78 Towing...... 10-82 Appearance Care ...... 10-86 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 General Information ...... 11-1 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-2 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts ...... 11-7 Maintenance Records ...... 11-10 Technical Data ...... 12-1 Vehicle Identification ...... 12-1 Vehicle Data ...... 12-2 Customer Information ...... 13-1 Customer Information ...... 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-14 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy...... 13-15 Index ...... i-1 Introduction iii

Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of Propriétaires Canadiens the features found on your vehicle. A French language copy of this For vehicles first sold in Canada, manual can be obtained from your substitute the name “General dealer/retailer or from: GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Motors of Canada Limited” for On peut obtenir un exemplaire de Emblem, CHEVROLET, the Chevrolet Motor Division wherever ce guide en français auprès du CHEVROLET Emblem, are it appears in this manual. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse registered trademarks, and the Keep this manual in the vehicle for suivante: name Traverse is a trademark of quick reference. General Motors Corporation. Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 This manual describes features that Detroit, MI 48207 may or may not be on your specific vehicle either because they are 1-800-551-4123 options that you did not purchase or Numéro de poste 6438 de langue due to changes subsequent to the française printing of this owner manual. www.helminc.com

Using this Manual Symbols { WARNING To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or manual and the page number where information relating to a specific it can be found. Notice: This means there is component, control, message, gage, something that could result in or indicator. property or vehicle damage. Danger, Warnings, and M : This symbol is shown when This would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual Cautions vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or Warning messages found on vehicle information. labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when reduce them. you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or Danger indicates a hazard with a information. high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death. Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is a hazard that could result in injury or safety symbol which means “Do death. Not,”“Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen.” Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart . : Fuel Gage Here are some additional symbols + : Fuses that may be found on the vehicle i and what they mean. For more : Headlamp High/Low-Beam information on the symbol, refer to Changer the index. j : LATCH System Child 9 : Airbag Readiness Light Restraints * # : Air Conditioning : Malfunction Indicator Lamp ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) : : Oil Pressure } g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls : Power or OnStar® / : Remote Vehicle Start $ : Brake System Warning Light > : Safety Belt Reminders " : Charging System 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor I : Cruise Control F : Traction Control B : Engine Coolant Temperature M : Windshield Washer Fluid O : Exterior Lamps # : Fog Lamps vi Introduction

2 NOTES In Brief 1-1

Sensing System for Passenger Performance and Maintenance In Brief Airbag ...... 1-9 StabiliTrak® ...... 1-20 Mirror Adjustment ...... 1-9 Tire Pressure Monitor ...... 1-21 Instrument Panel Steering Wheel Tire Sealant and Adjustment ...... 1-10 Compressor Kit ...... 1-21 Instrument Panel ...... 1-2 Interior Lighting ...... 1-11 Engine Oil Life System ...... 1-21 Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting ...... 1-12 Driving for Better Fuel Initial Drive Information ...... 1-4 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12 Economy ...... 1-22 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Climate Controls ...... 1-13 Roadside Assistance System ...... 1-4 Program ...... 1-23 Vehicle Features OnStar® ...... 1-23 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 1-5 Radio(s) ...... 1-15 Door Locks ...... 1-5 Satellite Radio ...... 1-16 Liftgate ...... 1-5 Portable Audio Devices ...... 1-16 Windows ...... 1-6 Bluetooth® ...... 1-16 Seat Adjustment ...... 1-6 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17 Second Row Seats ...... 1-7 Navigation System ...... 1-17 Third Row Seats ...... 1-7 Driver Information Center Heated Seats ...... 1-8 (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 1-18 Heated and Ventilated Cruise Control ...... 1-18 Seats ...... 1-8 Storage Compartments ...... 1-19 Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8 Power Outlets ...... 1-19 Safety Belt ...... 1-8 Sunroof ...... 1-20 1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel In Brief 1-3

A. Windshield Wiper/Washer on L. Driver Information Center (DIC) Q. Heated Front Seats on page 5‑5. Buttons. See Driver Information page 3‑9. B. Instrument Cluster on Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) R. Hazard Warning Flashers on on page 5 22 or Driver page 5‑11. ‑ page 6‑3. Information Center (DIC) C. Steering Wheel Controls on (Without DIC Buttons) on S. Passenger Airbag Status page 5‑3. page 5‑28. Indicator on page 5‑15 (If Equipped). D. Instrument Panel Storage on M. Climate Control Systems on page 4‑1. page 8‑1 or Dual Automatic T. Glove Box on page 4‑1. E. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7. Climate Control System on page 8‑4. F. Air Vents on page 8‑12. N. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into G. Exterior Lamp Controls on Park on page 9‑19. page 6‑1. O. Power Outlets on page 5‑9. H. Instrument Panel Illumination Control on page 6‑4. P. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5‑6. Traction Control I. Cruise Control on page 9‑30. System (TCS) Disable Button. J. Steering Wheel Adjustment on See StabiliTrak System on page 5‑2. page 9‑27. Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑24 (If Equipped) . K. Horn on page 5‑5. Power Liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2‑9 (If Equipped). 1-4 In Brief

Initial Drive To open or close the liftgate, press and hold & until the liftgate Information begins to move. This section provides a brief Press and release to locate overview about some of the L important features that may or may the vehicle. not be on your specific vehicle. Press L and hold for more than For more detailed information, refer two seconds to sound the to each of the features which can be panic alarm. found later in this owner manual. Press L again to cancel the panic alarm. Remote Keyless Entry Press K to unlock the driver door. (RKE) System See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Press K again within five seconds System Operation on page 2‑3. The RKE transmitter is used to to unlock all remaining doors. remotely lock and unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 feet) away Press Q to lock all doors. from the vehicle. Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized. In Brief 1-5

Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start Power Door Locks Starting the Vehicle To cancel a remote start: On vehicles with power door locks, the controls are located on the front . Aim the RKE transmitter at the 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the / doors. vehicle. vehicle and press and hold " until the parking lamps turn off. (Unlock): Press to unlock the 2. Press Q . doors. . Turn on the hazard warning 3. Immediately after completing flashers. Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. / Step 2, press and hold until . Turn the ignition switch on and See Power Door Locks on the parking lamps flash. then off. page 2‑7 When the vehicle starts, the parking See Remote Vehicle Start on Liftgate lamps will turn on and remain on page 2‑5. as long as the engine is running. To open the liftgate the vehicle must The doors will be locked and the Door Locks be in P (Park). Press the touchpad climate control system may under the liftgate handle. To close come on. To lock or unlock a door manually: the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull The engine will continue to run for . From the inside use the door strap as an aid. 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a lock knob on the window sill. 10-minute time extension. Remote . From the outside turn the key start can be extended only once. toward the front or rear of the vehicle, or press the Q or " button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. 1-6 In Brief

Power Liftgate Windows Seat Adjustment On vehicles with a power liftgate, Manual Seats the vehicle must be in P (Park) to operate it. 1. Pull the handle under the seat to unlock the seat. . Press and hold the liftgate button & on the Remote 2. Slide the seat to the desired Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. position and release the handle. Try to move the seat to be sure it is locked in place. Power Seats

On vehicles with power windows, the switches are on the driver door armrest. Each passenger door has a switch that controls only that window. Press the switch to lower the window. Pull the switch up to . Press the liftgate button on the raise it. center console. For more information, see Power . Press the touchpad switch on Windows on page 2 20. the outside liftgate handle. ‑ A. Power Seat Adjustment Control For more information see Liftgate B. Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑9. C. Lumbar Adjustment In Brief 1-7

Move the seat forward or rearward Second Row Seats Third Row Seats by moving the control (A) forward or rearward. The third row seats can be folded forward or removed. Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the control (A) up or down. See Power Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4. To raise or recline the seatback tilt the top of the control (B) forward or rearward. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑7. Press the front or rear of the To access the third row, pull the control (C) to increase or decrease sliding seat lever forward so that the lumbar support. seat cushion folds and the entire Pull up on the release lever located See Lumbar Adjustment on seat slides forward. on the back of the seat and push page 3‑6. See Rear Seats on page 3‑10. the seatback forward. For detailed procedures see Third Row Seats on page 3‑12. 1-8 In Brief

Heated Seats Heated and Ventilated Safety Belt Heated Front Seats Seats The heated seat controls are On vehicles with this feature, the located on the center console. The controls are on the front doors near engine must be running to the handle. operate them. H : Press to ventilate the seat. I: Press to turn on the heated z : Press to heat the seat. seatback. For more information see Heated J: Press to turn on or off the and Ventilated Front Seats on heated seat and seatback. page 3‑10. For more information see Heated Front Seats on page 3‑9. Head Restraint Adjustment Refer to the following sections for important information on how to use Do not drive until the head restraints safety belts properly. for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly. . Safety Belts on page 3‑15. For more information see Head . How to Wear Safety Belts Restraints on page 3‑2. Properly on page 3‑19. . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑24. . Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3‑55. In Brief 1-9

Sensing System for conditions. The driver airbag, Mirror Adjustment seat-mounted side impact airbags, Passenger Airbag and roof-rail airbags are not affected Exterior Mirrors by the passenger sensing system. The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started. See Passenger Sensing System on page 3‑40 for more United States information.

Controls for the outside power Canada mirrors are located on the driver The passenger sensing system will door armrest. turn off the right front passenger 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the frontal airbag under certain driver or passenger side mirror. 2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to adjust the mirror. 3. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror. 1-10 In Brief

Manually fold the mirrors inward to Move the lever located at the base Steering Wheel prevent damage when going of the mirror, to the right for through an automatic car wash. nighttime use and to the left for Adjustment To fold, push the mirror toward the daytime use. vehicle. Push the mirror outward to For vehicles with an automatic return it to the original position. dimming rearview mirror, the mirror Interior Mirror will move automatically to reduce the glare from the headlamps of the If equipped, a manual inside vehicle behind you. The dimming rearview mirror can be adjusted so feature comes on and the indicator that the driver can see behind the light illuminates each time the vehicle more clearly. Hold the mirror ignition is turned to start. in the center to move it up or down and side to side. Use the day/night See Automatic Dimming Rearview adjustment to help prevent glare Mirror on page 2‑19. from the headlamps behind you. The adjustment lever is located on the left side of the steering column. 1. Pull the lever down to adjust the steering wheel. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down or backward or forward into a comfortable position. 3. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. In Brief 1-11

Power Tilt Wheel Interior Lighting Reading Lamps Dome Lamps Press the button near each lamp to turn them on or off. The dome lamps are located in the overhead console and above the For more information, see: rear seat passengers. . Dome Lamps on page 6‑5. The dome lamps automatically . Instrument Panel Illumination come on when a door is opened, Control on page 6‑4. unless the dome lamp override button is pressed in. To manually turn them on, turn the instrument panel brightness control clockwise to the farthest position. For vehicles with the power tilt and Dome Lamp Override telescope wheel, the control is on the left side of the steering column. The dome lamp override button is next to the exterior lamps control. . Push the control up or down to tilt the steering wheel up E: Press the button in and the or down. dome lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the button again to . Push the control forward or return it to the extended position so rearward to move the steering that the dome lamps come on when wheel toward the front or rear of a door is opened. the vehicle. See Steering Wheel Adjustment on page 5‑2. 1-12 In Brief

Exterior Lighting 9 : Turns the automatic light Windshield Wiper/Washer control on or off. The windshield wiper/washer lever AUTO : Automatic operation of the is located on the left side of the headlamps at normal brightness and steering column. other exterior lamps. ;: Manual operation of the parking lamps and other exterior lamps. 2: Manual operation of the headlamps and other exterior lamps. For more information, see: . Exterior Lamp Controls on The exterior lamps control is located page 6‑1. on the instrument panel, to the left . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/ of the steering wheel. Automatic Headlamp System on page 6‑3. Turn the band with the wiper symbol . Delayed Headlamps on to control the windshield wipers. page 6‑3. 8 : Use for a single wiping cycle. 9 : Turns the wipers off. In Brief 1-13

6 : Delays wiping cycle. Turn the Climate Controls band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes. 1 : Slow wipes. 2 : Fast wipes. Windshield Washer J : Press the button at the end of the turn signal/lane change lever to spray washer fluid on the windshield. See Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 5‑5. A. Fan Control E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) B. Temperature Control F. Air Recirculation C. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window Defogger D. Air Conditioning 1-14 In Brief

See Climate Control Systems on page 8‑1 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 8‑4 (If Equipped). For more information about the rear climate control, see Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Control Only) on page 8‑10 or Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑11.

A. Fan Control I. Power (On/Off) B. AUTO J. Rear Window Defogger C. Defrost K. Air Conditioning D. Air Recirculation L. PASS (Passenger) E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) M. Passenger Side Temperature F. Air Delivery Mode Control Control G. Driver Side Temperature Control H. Display In Brief 1-15

Vehicle Features © ¨ : Seek or scan stations. 4 : Change the display between the Radio(s) radio station frequency and the time, if equipped. While the ignition is off, press 4 to display the time. For more information about these and other radio features, see Operation on page 7‑2. Storing a Favorite Station A maximum of 36 stations can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio FAV button. Press FAV to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port stations. O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7. and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped. decrease the volume. f : Select radio stations. 1-16 In Brief

Setting the Clock Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices To set the time and date for the Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite This vehicle may have an auxiliary radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port: Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite input located on the radio faceplate 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ Radio subscription can receive and a USB port located in the center ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then XM programming. console. External devices such as ® press O , to turn the radio on. iPod , laptop computers, MP3 XM Satellite Radio Service players, CD changers, USB storage 2. Press G to display HR, MIN, XM is a satellite radio service that is device, etc. can be connected to the MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, based in the 48 contiguous United auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) month, day, and year). States and 10 Canadian provinces. input jack or the USB port XM Satellite Radio has a wide depending on the audio system. 3. Press the pushbutton located variety of programming and under any one of the labels to be See Auxiliary Devices on commercial-free music, page 7‑36. changed. coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality 4. To increase or decrease the time sound. A fee is required to receive Bluetooth® or date, turn f clockwise or the XM service. For more counter-clockwise. information, contact XM at in the The in-vehicle Bluetooth system U.S. and Canada. allows users with a For detailed instructions on setting For more information refer to: Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to the clock for the vehicles specific make and receive hands-free calls audio system, see Clock on . www.xmradio.com or call using the vehicle’s audio system, page 5‑9. 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). microphone and controls. . www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada). See Satellite Radio on page 7‑8. In Brief 1-17

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone b g : Press to silence the vehicle Navigation System must be paired with the in-vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn The vehicle's navigation system Bluetooth system before it can be the sound on. Press and hold longer provides detailed maps of most used in the vehicle. Not all phones than two seconds to interact with major freeways and roads will support all functions. OnStar® or Bluetooth systems. throughout the United States and See Bluetooth on page 7‑48. + e − e : Increases or decreases Canada. After a destination has volume. been set, the system provides Steering Wheel Controls turn-by-turn instructions for reaching c : Press to reject an incoming the destination. In addition, the call, or to end a call. system can help locate a variety of SRCE : Press to switch between points of interest (POI), such as the radio, CD, and for vehicles with, banks, airports, restaurants, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear and more. auxiliary. See the vehicle's Navigation System ¨ : Press to seek the next radio manual for more information. station, the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot, or to select tracks and folders on an iPod® or USB device. For more information, see Steering w / x : Press to change favorite Wheel Controls on page 5‑3. radio stations, select tracks on a CD/DVD, or to navigate tracks or folders on an iPod® or USB device. 1-18 In Brief

Driver Information T : Press to display the oil life, Cruise Control Center (DIC) (With DIC park assist on vehicles with this feature, units, tire pressure readings Buttons) on vehicles with this feature, RKE If available, the DIC displays transmitter programming, and information about the vehicle. It also compass calibration and zone displays warning messages if a setting on vehicles with this feature. problem is detected. 3 : Press this button to display To access the DIC, some vehicles the odometer, trip odometers, fuel have buttons located on the range, average economy, timer, fuel instrument panel. used, and average speed. Some vehicles do not have the buttons shown, however some of the menus can be viewed by using T : On/Off. the trip odometer reset stem. + RES: Press to accelerate or See Driver Information Center (DIC) resume speed. (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑22 or Driver Information Center (DIC) SET– : Press to set speed or decrease speed. V : Press to set or reset certain (Without DIC Buttons) on functions and to turn off or page 5‑28. [ : Press to cancel cruise control. acknowledge messages on the DIC. See Cruise Control on page 9‑30. U : Press to customize the feature settings on your vehicle. See Vehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑40 for more information. In Brief 1-19

Storage Compartments Power Outlets The vehicle may have four accessory power outlets which can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone. The power outlets are located: . On the instrument panel below the climate controls. . Under the center floor console Press the buttons (B, C) on the front cupholder. of the consoles to access the upper . At the rear of the center floor For vehicles with a second row and lower storage areas. console. center console, open each area to Increase the storage area by folding . In the rear cargo area. access the storage compartment the top of the console forward. Lift inside. up on rear console handle (A) and To use the outlets, remove the pull forward. cover. See Floor Console Storage on See Power Outlets on page 5‑9. page 4‑2. 1-20 In Brief

Sunroof Vent: Press the front or rear of the Performance and switch to vent or close the sunroof. The ignition must be in ON/RUN or Maintenance ACC/ACCESSORY to operate the Express-open/Express-close: From the closed position, press and sunroof and power sunshade. See StabiliTrak® Retained Accessory Power (RAP) release the rear or front of the on page 9‑16 switch to express-open or The traction control system limits express-close the sunroof. wheel spin and the StabiliTrak For more information see Sunroof system assists with directional on page 2‑23. control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. Both systems turn on automatically every time the vehicle is started. . To turn off the traction control part of StabiliTrak, press and release 5 located on the instrument panel below the climate controls. F illuminates and the appropriate DIC The switch to operate the front message is displayed. See sunroof is on the headliner above Vehicle Messages on page 5‑31. the rearview mirror. . The StabiliTrak system remains on. For more information, see StabiliTrak System on page 9‑27 In Brief 1-21

Tire Pressure Monitor You may notice during cooler Tire Sealant and conditions that the low tire pressure This vehicle may have a Tire warning light will appear when the Compressor Kit Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). vehicle is first started and then turn This vehicle may come with a jack off as you drive. This may be an and spare tire or a tire sealant and early indicator that your tire compressor kit. The kit can be used pressures are getting low and the to seal small punctures in the tread tires need to be inflated to the area of the tire. proper pressure. See Tire Sealant and Compressor Note: The Tire Pressure Monitor Kit on page 10‑58 for complete The Tire Pressure Monitor System System can alert you about low tire operating information. alerts you when a significant pressure, but it does not replace reduction in pressure occurs in one normal monthly tire maintenance. Engine Oil Life System It is the driver s responsibility to or more of your vehicle’s tires by ’ maintain correct tire pressures. The engine oil life system calculates illuminating the low tire pressure engine oil life based on vehicle use warning light on the instrument See Tire Pressure Monitor System and displays the CHANGE ENGINE cluster. The warning light will on page 10‑43 and Tire Pressure OIL SOON message when it is time remain on until the tire pressure is Monitor Operation on page 10‑44. to change the engine oil and filter. corrected. The proper tire pressures The oil life system should be reset for your vehicle are listed on the to 100% only following an oil Tire and Loading Information label change. located on the driver side center pillar (B pillar). See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10. 1-22 In Brief

Resetting the Oil Life System If the vehicle does not have . Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time. 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, Driver Information Center (DIC) with the engine off. buttons: Press and hold the trip . When road and weather odometer reset stem until OIL conditions are appropriate, use 2. If the vehicle has Driver LIFE REMAINING shows 100%. cruise control, if equipped. Information Center (DIC) Three chimes sound and the . buttons: Press the vehicle CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Always follow posted speed information button until OIL LIFE message goes off. limits or drive more slowly when REMAINING displays. conditions require. 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. If the vehicle does not have . Keep vehicle tires properly Driver Information Center (DIC) See Engine Oil Life System on inflated. page 10‑10. buttons: The vehicle must be in . Combine several trips into a P (Park) to access this display. single trip. Press the trip odometer reset Driving for Better Fuel . stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING Economy Replace the vehicle's tires with displays. the same TPC Spec number Driving habits can affect fuel molded into the tire's sidewall 3. If the vehicle has Driver mileage. Here are some driving tips near the size. Information Center (DIC) to get the best fuel economy . Follow recommended scheduled buttons: Press and hold the set/ possible. reset button until 100% is maintenance. . Avoid fast starts and accelerate displayed. Three chimes sound smoothly. and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message goes off. . Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops. In Brief 1-23

Roadside Assistance Chevrolet Owner Center Automatic Crash Response Program The Chevrolet Owner Center is In a crash, built in sensors can a complimentary service that automatically alert an OnStar Roadside Assistance includes online service reminders, advisor who is immediately U.S.: 1-800-CHEV-USA vehicle maintenance tips, online connected to the vehicle to see (1-800-243-8872) TTY Users: owner manual, special privileges if you need help. and more. 1-888-889-2438 Canada: How OnStar Service Works 1-800-268-6800 Sign up today at: Q : This blue button connects you As the owner of a new Chevrolet, www.gmownercenter.com/ chevrolet. to a specially trained OnStar advisor you are automatically enrolled in the to verify your account information Chevrolet Roadside Assistance ® and to answer questions. program. This program provides OnStar technically trained advisors who are ] : Push this red emergency available 24 hours a day, 365 days button to get priority help from a year, minor repair information or specially trained OnStar emergency towing arrangements. advisors. X Roadside Assistance and OnStar : Push this button for hands-free, voice-activated calling and to give If you have a current OnStar voice commands for turn-by-turn subscription, press the OnStar OnStar® uses several innovative navigation. button and the current GPS location technologies and live advisors to Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle will be sent to an OnStar Advisor provide a wide range of safety, who will assess your problem, Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics, security, navigation, diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside contact Roadside Assistance, and and calling services. relay exact location to get you the Assistance, Turn-by-Turn Navigation help you need. and Hands-Free Calling are available on most vehicles. 1-24 In Brief

Not all OnStar services are area has coverage, network Location information about the available on all vehicles. For more capacity and reception when the vehicle is only available if the GPS information see the OnStar Owner's service is needed, and technology satellite signals are unobstructed Guide or visit www.onstar.com that is compatible with the OnStar and available. (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada), service. Not all services are The vehicle must have a working contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR available everywhere, particularly electrical system, including (1-888-466-7827) or TTY in remote or enclosed areas, or at adequate battery power, for the 1-877-248-2080, or press Q to all times. OnStar equipment to operate. There speak with an OnStar advisor The OnStar system can record and are other problems OnStar cannot 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. transmit vehicle information. This control that may prevent OnStar For a full description of OnStar information is automatically sent to from providing OnStar service at services and system limitations, see an OnStar call center when Q is any particular time or place. Some examples are damage to important the OnStar Owner's Guide in the pressed, ] is pressed, or if the glove box. parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills, airbags or ACR system deploy. tall buildings, tunnels, weather or OnStar service is subject to the This information usually includes wireless phone network congestion. OnStar terms and conditions the vehicle's GPS location and, in included in the OnStar Subscriber the event of a crash, additional OnStar Steering Wheel Information. information regarding the crash that Controls the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the OnStar service cannot work unless direction from which the vehicle was This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute the vehicle is in a place where hit). When the virtual advisor feature button that can be used to interact OnStar has an agreement with a of OnStar hands-free calling is with OnStar hands-free calling. wireless service provider for service used, the vehicle also sends OnStar See Steering Wheel Controls on in that area. OnStar service also the vehicle's GPS location so they page 5‑3 for more information. cannot work unless the vehicle is in can provide services where it is a place where the wireless service located. provider OnStar has hired for that In Brief 1-25

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone extensions. See the OnStar Owner's Guide for more information. Your Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active. 1-26 In Brief

2 NOTES Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Exterior Mirrors Keys, Doors and Convex Mirrors ...... 2-16 Windows Power Mirrors ...... 2-17 Folding Mirrors ...... 2-17 Heated Mirrors ...... 2-17 Keys and Locks Blind Spot Mirrors ...... 2-17 Keys ...... 2-2 Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 2-19 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Interior Mirrors System ...... 2-2 Manual Rearview Mirror ...... 2-19 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Automatic Dimming System Operation ...... 2-3 Rearview Mirror ...... 2-19 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-5 Door Locks ...... 2-7 Windows Power Door Locks ...... 2-7 Windows ...... 2-20 Delayed Locking ...... 2-7 Power Windows ...... 2-20 Automatic Door Locks ...... 2-8 Sun Visors ...... 2-22 Lockout Protection ...... 2-8 Safety Locks ...... 2-8 Roof Sunroof ...... 2-23 Doors Liftgate ...... 2-9 Vehicle Security Vehicle Security ...... 2-13 Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-13 Immobilizer ...... 2-14 Immobilizer Operation ...... 2-14 2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Keys Be sure you have spare keys. If you are locked out of the vehicle, { WARNING call the Roadside Assistance Leaving children in a vehicle with Center. See Roadside Assistance the ignition key is dangerous for Program on page 13‑6. many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even Remote Keyless Entry killed. They could operate the (RKE) System power windows or other controls The key is used for the ignition and See Radio Frequency Statement on or even make the vehicle move. all door locks. page 13‑17 for information The windows will function with the The key has a bar-coded key tag regarding Part 15 of the Federal keys in the ignition and children that the dealer/retailer or qualified Communications Commission (FCC) could be seriously injured or killed locksmith can use to make new Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry if caught in the path of a closing keys. Store this information in a safe and Science Canada. window. Do not leave the keys in place, not in the vehicle. Changes or modifications to this a vehicle with children. See your dealer/retailer if a system by other than an authorized replacement key or additional key service facility could void is needed. authorization to use this equipment. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

If there is a decrease in the RKE There are other conditions which If enabled through the Driver operating range: can affect the performance of the Information Center (DIC), the transmitter. See Remote Keyless parking lamps flash once to indicate . Check the distance. The transmitter may be Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2. locking has occurred. If enabled too far from the vehicle. through the DIC, the horn sounds when is pressed again within . Q Check the location. Other five seconds. See Vehicle vehicles or objects may be Personalization (With DIC Buttons) blocking the signal. on page 5‑40 for additional . Check the transmitter's battery. information. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section. Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system. See . If the transmitter is still not Anti-Theft Alarm System on working correctly, see your page 2‑13. dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for service. K (Unlock): Press once to unlock With Remote Start and Power only the driver door. If K is pressed Remote Keyless Entry Liftgate Shown, Without Similar again within five seconds, all (RKE) System Operation remaining doors unlock. The interior / (Remote Vehicle Start): For lamps come on and stay on for The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) vehicles with this feature, see 20 seconds or until the ignition is transmitter functions work up to Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑5 turned on. 60 m (195 feet) away from the for additional information. If enabled through the DIC, the vehicle. Q (Lock): Press to lock all the parking lamps flash twice to indicate doors. unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑40. 2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

Pressing K on the RKE transmitter Programming Transmitters to Battery Replacement disarms the content theft-deterrent the Vehicle Replace the battery if the REPLACE system. See Anti-Theft Alarm Only RKE transmitters programmed BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY System on page 2‑13. to this vehicle will work. If a message displays in the DIC. & (Power Liftgate): Press and transmitter is lost or stolen, a Notice: When replacing the hold until the liftgate begins to replacement can be purchased battery, do not touch any of the move to open or close the liftgate. and programmed through your circuitry on the transmitter. Static The taillamps flash and a chime dealer/retailer. When the from your body could damage the sounds to indicate when the liftgate replacement transmitter is transmitter. is opening or closing. programmed to this vehicle using the DIC, all remaining transmitters (Vehicle Locator/Panic L must also be reprogrammed. Any Alarm): Press and release to lost or stolen transmitters will no locate the vehicle. The parking longer work once the new lamps flash and the horn sounds transmitter is programmed. Each three times. vehicle can have up to eight Press and hold L for more than transmitters programmed to it. See two seconds to activate the panic “Relearn Remote Key” under Driver alarm. The parking lamps flash and Information Center (DIC) (With DIC the horn sounds repeatedly for Buttons) on page 5‑22 or Driver 30 seconds. The alarm turns off Information Center (DIC) (Without when the ignition is moved to DIC Buttons) on page 5‑28 for instructions on how to program ON/RUN or is pressed again. 1. Separate the transmitter with a L transmitters to this vehicle. The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF flat, thin object inserted into the for the panic alarm to work. notch on the side. 2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

3. Insert the new battery, positive If the vehicle has the remote start When the vehicle starts the parking side facing down. Replace with a feature, the RKE transmitter lamps will turn on and remain on as CR2032 or equivalent battery. functions have an increased range long as the engine is running. 4. Snap the transmitter back of operation. However, the range The doors will be locked and the together. may be less while the vehicle is climate control system will operate running. automatically if the vehicle has the Remote Vehicle Start There are other conditions which automatic system, or at the same can affect the performance of the setting as when the vehicle was last This vehicle may have a remote transmitter, see Remote Keyless turned off. starting feature that starts the Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 If the vehicle has an automatic engine from outside of the vehicle. for additional information. climate control system and heated / (Remote Start): This button is seats, the heated seats turn on located on the RKE transmitter if the Starting the Engine Using during colder outside temperatures vehicle has remote start. Remote Start and shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN. See Heated Front Laws in some communities may To start the vehicle: Seats on page 3 9 or Heated and restrict the use of remote starters. ‑ 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the Ventilated Front Seats on For example, some laws may vehicle. page 3 10 for more information. require a person using the remote ‑ start to have the vehicle in view 2. Press Q on the RKE transmitter. The rear window defogger and when doing so. Check local 3. Immediately after completing heated mirrors, if the vehicle has regulations for any requirements on them, turn on during colder outside Step 2, press and hold / until remote starting of vehicles. temperatures and turn off when the the parking lamps flash. If the key is turned to ON/RUN. Do not use the remote start feature vehicle's lights can not be seen, if the vehicle is low on fuel. The press and hold / for at least vehicle could run out of fuel. four seconds. 2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

After entering the vehicle during a been running for five minutes, Conditions in Which the remote start, insert and turn the key 10 minutes are added, allowing Remote Start Will Not Work to the ON/RUN position to drive the the engine to run for a total of vehicle. 15 minutes. The vehicle cannot be started using the remote start feature if the key is If the vehicle is left running it A maximum of two remote starts or in the ignition, the hood is open, or if automatically shuts off after remote start attempts are allowed there is an emission control system 10 minutes unless a time extension between ignition cycles. malfunction. has been done. After the vehicle's engine has been The engine turns off during a remote Extending Engine Run Time started two times using the remote start if the coolant temperature gets start button, the ignition must be too high or if the oil pressure To extend the engine run time by turned on and then back off before gets low. 10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 though 3 the remote start procedure can be while the engine is still running. used again. Vehicles that have the remote The engine run time can only be vehicle start feature are shipped extended if it is the first remote start Shutting the Engine Off After a from the factory with the remote since the vehicle has been driven. Remote Start vehicle start system enabled. Remote start can be extended The system may be enabled or To manually shut off a remote start: one time. disabled through the DIC if the . Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle has DIC buttons. See If the remote start procedure is used REMOTE START under Vehicle again before the first 10 minute time vehicle and press / until the “ ” Personalization (With DIC Buttons) frame has ended, the first parking lamps turn off. on page 5 40 for additional 10 minutes will immediately expire ‑ . Turn on the hazard warning information. If the vehicle does not and the second 10 minute time flashers. have DIC buttons, see your dealer/ frame will start. . Turn the ignition switch on and retailer to enable or disable the For example, if the lock button and then off. remote start system. then the remote start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle has Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

Door Locks Power Door Locks WARNING (Continued) The power door lock switches are { WARNING . Young children who get into located on the front doors. unlocked vehicles may be Unlocked doors can be " (Unlock): Press to unlock the unable to get out. A child can doors. dangerous. be overcome by extreme heat . Passengers, especially and can suffer permanent Q (Lock): Remove the key from children, can easily open the injuries or even death from the ignition and press to lock the doors and fall out of a moving heat stroke. Always lock the doors. vehicle. When a door is vehicle whenever leaving it. locked, the handle will not Delayed Locking . Outsiders can easily enter open it. The chance of being through an unlocked door When locking the doors with the thrown out of the vehicle in a when you slow down or stop power lock switch and a door or the crash is increased if the your vehicle. Locking your liftgate is open, the doors will lock doors are not locked. So, all doors can help prevent this five seconds after the last door is passengers should wear from happening. closed. You will hear three chimes safety belts properly and the to signal that the delayed locking doors should be locked To lock or unlock a door, use the feature is in use. whenever the vehicle is key from the outside or the door driven. lock from the inside. (Continued) 2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Pressing the power lock switch Lockout Protection twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice will override This feature protects you from the delayed locking feature and locking the key in the vehicle when immediately lock all the doors. the key is in the ignition and a front door is open. This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition. If the driver side power door lock switch is pressed when the driver's This feature can be programmed by door is open and the key is in the using the Driver Information Center ignition, all of the doors will lock and (DIC). See “DELAY DOOR LOCK” then the driver door will unlock. under Vehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑40. If the passenger side power door lock switch is pressed when the Open the rear doors to access the Automatic Door Locks front passenger door is open and security locks on the inside edge of the key is in the ignition, all of the each door. Vehicles with an automatic lock/ doors will lock and then the front To set the locks, insert a key into unlock feature enable you to passenger door will unlock. the slot and turn it to the horizontal program the vehicle's power door position. The door can only be locks. This feature can be Safety Locks opened from the outside with the programmed through the Driver door unlocked. To return the door to The vehicle has rear door security Information Center (DIC). See normal operation, turn the slot to the locks to prevent passengers from Vehicle Personalization (With DIC vertical position. Buttons) on page 5‑40 for more opening the rear doors from the information. inside. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

Doors To unlock the liftgate, use the power WARNING (Continued) door lock switch or press the door unlock button on the Remote Liftgate If the vehicle must be driven with Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: Manual Liftgate Operation twice. See Remote Keyless Entry . Close all of the windows. (RKE) System Operation on page 2‑3. { WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument To open the liftgate, press the Exhaust gases can enter the panel. touchpad on the underside of the liftgate handle. The vehicle must be vehicle if it is driven with the . Adjust the Climate Control in P (Park) to open the liftgate. liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with system to a setting that any objects that pass through the To close the liftgate, use the pull brings in only outside air and cup or strap. seal between the body and the set the fan speed to the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine highest setting. See Climate The liftgate has an electric latch. exhaust contains Carbon Control System in the Index. If the battery is disconnected or has Monoxide (CO) which cannot be low voltage, the liftgate will not . If the vehicle is equipped with seen or smelled. It can cause open. The liftgate will resume a power liftgate, disable the unconsciousness and even death. operation when the battery is power liftgate function. (Continued) reconnected and charged. For more information about If the battery is properly connected carbon monoxide, see Engine and has adequate voltage, and the Exhaust on page 9‑21. liftgate still will not function, the vehicle should be taken to a dealer/retailer for service. 2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

Power Liftgate Operation WARNING (Continued) { WARNING

{ WARNING . Adjust the Climate Control You or others could be injured if system to a setting that caught in the path of the power Exhaust gases can enter the brings in only outside air and liftgate. Make sure there is no one vehicle if it is driven with the set the fan speed to the in the way of the liftgate as it is liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with highest setting. See Climate opening and closing. any objects that pass through the Control System in the Index. seal between the body and the Notice: If you open the liftgate . trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine If the vehicle is equipped with without checking for overhead exhaust contains Carbon a power liftgate, disable the obstructions such as a garage Monoxide (CO) which cannot be power liftgate function. door, you could damage the seen or smelled. It can cause For more information about liftgate or the liftgate glass. unconsciousness and even death. carbon monoxide, see Engine Always check to make sure the If the vehicle must be driven with Exhaust on page 9‑21. area above and behind the liftgate the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: is clear before opening it. The vehicle may have a power . Close all of the windows. liftgate. The vehicle must be in . Fully open the air outlets on P (Park) to use this feature. or under the instrument The taillamps will flash and a chime panel. will sound when the power liftgate (Continued) is used. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

The power liftgate can be power Pressing the buttons or touchpad The power liftgate may be opened and closed in the switch a second time while the temporarily disabled under extreme following ways: liftgate is moving reverses the temperatures or under low battery direction. conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate . Press and hold the power liftgate button on the RKE transmitter can still be operated manually. until the liftgate starts moving. If the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) while the power function is in progress, the liftgate power function will continue to completion. If the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and the vehicle accelerates before the power liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the open position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. The power liftgate must be closed and latched before Power Liftgate Button near driving. Liftgate Latch If the liftgate is power opened and Power Liftgate Button on The liftgate can also be closed by the support struts have lost Center Console pressing the power liftgate button pressure, the lights will flash and a next to the liftgate latch. Press the chime will sound. The liftgate will . Press the liftgate button on the button a second time during liftgate stay open temporarily, then slowly center console. operation to reverse the operation. close. See your dealer/retailer for service before using the liftgate if . Press the touchpad switch on this occurs. the outside liftgate handle. 2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

Obstacle Detection Features more information. After removing Manual Operation of Power A warning chime will sound and the the obstructions, manually open the Liftgate liftgate will automatically reverse liftgate to the full open position or direction to the full closed or open close the liftgate to the fully closed position if the liftgate encounters an and latched position. The liftgate obstacle during a power open or resumes normal power operation. close cycle. After removing the Pinch sensors are located on the obstruction, the power liftgate side edges of the liftgate. If an operation can be used again. object is caught between the liftgate If the liftgate comes across more and the vehicle and presses against obstacles on the same power cycle, this sensor, the liftgate will reverse the power function deactivates, and direction and open fully. The liftgate you must manually open or close will remain open until it is activated the liftgate. A message displays, again or closed manually. Do not LIFTGATE OPEN, to indicate that force the liftgate open or closed the liftgate is open. See Driver during a power cycle. To change the liftgate to manual Information Center (DIC) (With DIC operation, press the switch on the Buttons) on page 5‑22 or Driver center console to OFF. Information Center (DIC) (Without With the power liftgate disabled DIC Buttons) on page 5‑28 for and all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate can be manually opened and closed. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

To open the liftgate, press the Vehicle Security When the door is closed, the touchpad on the handle on the security light stops flashing and outside of the liftgate and lift the Vehicle theft is big business, stays on solid for approximately gate open. To close the liftgate, use especially in some cities. This 30 seconds. The content theft the pull cup to lower the liftgate and vehicle has theft-deterrent features, deterrent alarm is not armed close. The liftgate latch will power however, they do not make it until the security light goes off. impossible to steal. close. Always close the liftgate If the delayed locking feature is before driving. active, the alarm is not activated If the RKE button or the power close Anti-Theft Alarm System until all doors are closed and the button on the liftgate is pressed On vehicles with an anti-theft alarm security light goes off. while power operation is disabled, system, to activate the system: the lights will flash three times, but . Press Q when the driver door is the liftgate will not move. . Press Q on the Remote Keyless closed. The security light comes Entry (RKE) transmitter or the on solid for approximately It is not recommended that you power door lock switch when 30 seconds and then goes off. drive with the liftgate open. any door is open. The content theft deterrent alarm However, if you must drive with the is not armed until the security liftgate open, the liftgate should be light goes off. set to manual operation by pressing the OFF switch on the center The theft-deterrent system will not console. activate if the doors are locked with the vehicle's key or the manual door lock.

The security light flashes. If a locked door is opened without using the RKE transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm occurs. The horn chirps and the lights flash. 2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

If the key is not placed in the Testing the Alarm Immobilizer ignition and turned to START or the To test the alarm: See Radio Frequency Statement on door is not unlocked by pressing Q 1. From inside the vehicle, lower page 13‑17 for information during the ten second pre-alarm, regarding Part 15 of the Federal the alarm goes off. The headlamps the driver side window and open the driver door. Communications Commission (FCC) flash and the horn sounds for about Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry 30 seconds, then turns off to save 2. Press Q . and Science Canada. the battery power. 3. Get out of the vehicle, close the The vehicle can be started with the door and wait for the security Immobilizer Operation correct ignition key if the alarm has light to go out. ® been set off. This vehicle has PASS-Key III+ 4. Then reach in through the (Personalized Automotive Security To avoid setting off the alarm by window, unlock the door with the System) theft-deterrent system. ® accident: manual door lock and open the PASS-Key III+ is a passive . Lock the vehicle with the door door. This should set off the theft-deterrent system. key after the doors are closed. alarm. The system is automatically armed . Unlock the door with the RKE If the alarm does not sound when it when the key is removed from the transmitter. Unlocking a door any should, but the vehicle's headlamps ignition. other way sets off the alarm if flash, check to see if the horn The system is automatically the system has been armed. works. The horn fuse may be blown. disarmed when the key is turned to To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Press K or place the key in the ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or Circuit Breakers on page 10‑30. START from the LOCK/OFF ignition and turn it to START to turn position. off the alarm. If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle's headlamps do not flash, see your dealer/retailer for service. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15

You do not have to manually arm or If the engine still does not start, and or do not operate, you must see disarm the system. the key appears to be undamaged, your dealer/retailer or a locksmith ® The security light comes on if there try another ignition key and check who can service PASS-Key III+ to is a problem with arming or the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit have keys made and programmed disarming the theft-deterrent Breakers on page 10‑30 for to the system. system. additional information. If the engine See your dealer/retailer or a still does not start with the other ® locksmith who can service When the PASS-Key III+ system key, the vehicle needs service. If the ® senses an incorrect key, the vehicle PASS-Key III+ to get a new key vehicle does start, the first key may blank that is cut exactly as the does not start. Anyone using a be faulty. See your dealer/retailer trial-and-error method to start the ® ignition key that operates the who can service the PASS-Key III+ system. vehicle will be discouraged because to have a new key made. In an of the high number of electrical key emergency, contact Roadside To program the new additional key: codes. Assistance. See Roadside 1. Verify that the new key has Assistance Program on page 13 6. If the engine does not start and the ‑ a 1 stamped on it. security light on the instrument It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ panel comes on when trying to start decoder to learn the transponder 2. Insert the already programmed the vehicle, there may be a problem value of a new or replacement key. key in the ignition and start the with your theft-deterrent system. Up to 10 keys may be programmed engine. If the engine does not Turn the ignition off and try again. to the vehicle. The following start, see your dealer/retailer for procedure is for programming service. additional keys only. If all the 3. After the engine has started, currently programmed keys are lost turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and remove the key. 2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

4. Insert the key to be programmed The SERVICE THEFT Exterior Mirrors and turn it to the ON/RUN DETERRENT SYSTEM message position within five seconds of displays on the Driver Information the original key being turned to Center (DIC) when there is a Convex Mirrors the LOCK/OFF position. problem with the theft-deterrent The security light turns off once system. See Anti-Theft Alarm { WARNING the key has been programmed. System Messages on page 5‑36 for additional information. A convex mirror can make things, 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if like other vehicles, look farther Do not leave the key or device that additional keys are to be away than they really are. If you disarms or deactivates the theft programmed. cut too sharply into the right lane, deterrent system in the vehicle. If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or you could hit a vehicle on the damaged, see your dealer/retailer or right. Check the inside mirror or a locksmith to have a new glance over your shoulder before key made. changing lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17

Power Mirrors To adjust each mirror: Heated Mirrors 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the For vehicles with heated mirrors: driver or passenger side mirror. < (Rear Window Defogger): 2. Press one of the four arrows Press to heat the mirrors. located on the control pad to adjust the mirror. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate Control 3. Adjust each outside mirror so System on page 8‑4 for more that a little of the vehicle and the information. area behind it can be seen. 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to Blind Spot Mirrors deselect the mirror. The blind spot mirror is a small Folding Mirrors convex mirror built into the upper Controls for the outside power and outer corner of both outside mirrors are located on the driver Manual mirrors. It can show objects that may be in the vehicle's blind zone. door armrest. Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return it to the original position. 2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Driving with the Blind Spot 1. When the approaching vehicle is Using the Outside Mirror with Mirror a long distance away, the image the Blind Spot Mirror in the main mirror is small and near the inboard edge of the 1. Set the main mirror so that the mirror. side of the vehicle can just be seen and the blind spot mirror 2. As the vehicle gets closer, the has an unobstructed view. image in the main mirror gets larger and moves outboard. 2. When checking for traffic or before changing a lane, look at 3. As the vehicle enters the blind the main driver/passenger side zone, the image transitions from mirror to observe traffic in the the main mirror to the blind spot adjacent lane, behind your mirror. vehicle. Check the blind spot 4. When the vehicle is in the blind mirror for a vehicle in the blind zone, the image only appears in zone. Then, glance over your the blind spot mirror. shoulder to double check before moving slowly into the adjacent lane.

Actual Mirror View Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19

Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming If the vehicle has the memory Rearview Mirror package, the outside mirrors have a Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic park tilt feature. This feature tilts the Adjust the inside rearview mirror to dimming inside rearview mirror. outside mirrors to a preselected see clearly behind your vehicle. position when the vehicle is in Automatic dimming reduces the Hold the mirror in the center to glare from the headlamps of the R (Reverse). This allows the driver move it up or down and side to side. to view the curb for parallel parking. vehicle behind you. The dimming Use the day/night adjustment to feature comes on and the indicator The passenger and/or driver mirror help prevent glare from the light illuminates each time the returns to its original position headlamps behind you. Move the ignition is turned to start. when the vehicle is shifted out of lever to the right for nighttime use ® R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned and to the left for daytime use. Vehicles with OnStar have three off or to OFF/LOCK. ® additional control buttons for the Vehicles with OnStar have three OnStar® system. See your dealer/ This feature can be turned on or off additional control buttons located at retailer for more information about through the Driver Information the bottom of the mirror. See your OnStar® and how to subscribe to it. Center (DIC). See Vehicle dealer/retailer for more information See the OnStar® owner guide for Personalization (With DIC Buttons) about OnStar and how to subscribe ® more information about the services on page 5‑40 for more information. to it. See the OnStar owner guide OnStar® provides. for more information on the services OnStar provides. 2-20 Keys, Doors and Windows

O (On/Off): Press to turn the Windows dimming feature on or off. The vehicle may also have a Rear { WARNING Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑34 Leaving children, helpless adults, for more information. or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. If the vehicle has RVC, the O They can be overcome by the button for turning the dimming extreme heat and suffer feature on or off will not be permanent injuries or even death available. from heat stroke. Never leave a Cleaning the Mirror child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with Do not spray glass cleaner directly Power Windows on the mirror. Use a soft towel the windows closed in warm or hot weather. dampened with water. { WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. (Continued) Keys, Doors and Windows 2-21

Press the switch to lower the WARNING (Continued) window. Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the window. They could operate the power windows or other controls or Express-Up/Express-Down even make the vehicle move. Windows The windows will function and A window with the express-up/down they could be seriously injured or feature allows it to be raised or killed if caught in the path of a lowered without holding the switch. closing window. Do not leave Press or pull the window switch fully keys in a vehicle with children. and release it to activate the When there are children in the express feature. The express mode rear seat use the window lockout Uplevel shown, base similar can be canceled by pressing or pulling the switch. button to prevent unintentional The power window controls are operation of the windows. located on each of the side doors. The driver door also has switches that control the passenger and rear windows. The power windows work with the ignition in ACC/ ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 9‑16. 2-22 Keys, Doors and Windows

Programming the Power Anti-Pinch Feature Sun Visors Windows The anti-pinch feature is on Pull the sun visor down to block If the battery on the vehicle has windows with the express-up glare. Detach the sun visor from the been recharged, disconnected, feature. If an object is in the way of center mount and slide it along the or replaced, windows with the the window as it is express-closing, rod from side-to-side to cover the express-up feature need to be or in certain weather conditions like driver or passenger side of the front reprogrammed for this feature to severe icing, the window will stop window. Swing the sun visor to the work. To program the window: and open to a factory preset side to cover the side window. It can position. The window functions 1. Close all doors with the ignition be moved along the rod from normally once the obstruction is in the ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/ side-to-side in this position also. removed. RUN position, or when Retained Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror Accessory Power (RAP) is Window Lockout active. See Retained Accessory The vehicle has lighted visor vanity o (Window Lockout): The window Power (RAP) on page 9‑16. mirrors on both the driver and lockout switch is located with the passenger sun visors. Pull the sun 2. Press and continue to hold the power window switches on the visor down and lift the mirror cover window switch until the window driver door armrest. This feature to turn the lamps on. is fully open. prevents the rear windows from 3. Pull up and hold the window being operated, except from the switch to close the window. driver position. Press the switch to Continue to hold it briefly after turn the lockout feature on or off. the window is fully closed. An indicator light will come on to show the lockout feature is on. 4. Repeat for each window that has the express-up feature. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-23

Roof The front sunshade must be opened and closed manually. Push up on the sunshade handle to open the Sunroof sunshade. The ignition must be in ON/RUN or Manual Sunshades ACC/ACCESSORY to operate the sunroof and power sunshade. See On a vehicle with only manual Retained Accessory Power (RAP) sunshades, press the button on the on page 9‑16 sunshade handle to release it and guide it back. Pull the sunshade The vehicle may have a sunroof forward until it latches to close it. over the front seats and a rear sunroof over the second row seats. The rear sunroof does not open. Vent: From the closed position, The switch to operate the front press and hold the front of the sunroof is on the headliner above switch to vent the sunroof. Press the rearview mirror. and hold the rear of the switch to close the sunroof. Express-open/Express-close: From the closed position, press and release the rear of the switch to express-open the sunroof. Press and release the front of the switch to express-close the sunroof. 2-24 Keys, Doors and Windows

Rear Power Sunshade To open the rear sunshade, located over the second row seats, press On vehicles with a rear power and release the rear of the switch. sunshade, the switch is on the Press and release the front of the headliner above the rearview mirror. switch to close the sunshade. Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time while the vehicle is not in use. Debris can collect in the tracks, damage the sunroof operation and plug the water draining system.

Notice: The rear sunshade could be damaged if you attempt to open or close it manually. Do not manually open or close the rear sunshade. Seats and Restraints 3-1

Safety Belt Extender ...... 3-30 Child Restraints Seats and Safety System Check ...... 3-30 Older Children ...... 3-47 Restraints Safety Belt Care ...... 3-31 Infants and Young Replacing Safety Belt System Children ...... 3-49 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-31 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-52 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-54 Head Restraints Airbag System Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers Airbag System ...... 3-32 for Children (LATCH Front Seats Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-34 System) ...... 3-55 Seat Adjustment ...... 3-3 When Should an Airbag Replacing LATCH System Power Seat Adjustment ...... 3-4 Inflate? ...... 3-36 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-61 Lumbar Adjustment ...... 3-6 What Makes an Airbag Securing Child Restraints Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-7 Inflate? ...... 3-37 (Rear Seat ) ...... 3-62 Heated Front Seats ...... 3-9 How Does an Airbag Securing Child Restraints Heated and Ventilated Restrain? ...... 3-37 (Right Front Front Seats ...... 3-10 What Will You See After an Passenger Seat) ...... 3-64 Airbag Inflates? ...... 3-38 Rear Seats Passenger Sensing Rear Seats ...... 3-10 System ...... 3-40 Third Row Seats ...... 3-12 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 3-44 Safety Belts Adding Equipment to the Safety Belts ...... 3-15 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-45 How to Wear Safety Belts Airbag System Check ...... 3-46 Properly ...... 3-19 Replacing Airbag System Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-24 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-46 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ...... 3-30 3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/ spinal injury in a crash. Do not 1. Pull the head restraint up to drive until the head restraints for Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same raise it. To lower the head all occupants are installed and restraint, press the release adjusted properly. height as the top of the occupant's head. This position reduces the button, located on the head chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint post on the top of the seatback, while you push the head restraint down. 2. Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. Seats and Restraints 3-3

Front Seats To adjust a manual seat: 1. Lift the handle (A) under the seat Seat Adjustment to unlock it. 2. Slide the seat and release the { WARNING handle. Try to move the seat to be sure it is You can lose control of the locked in place. vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver's seat while the To manually raise or lower the seat, vehicle is moving. The sudden move the lever (B) repeatedly movement could startle and upward or downward. confuse you, or make you push a A. Manual Seat Adjustment Handle pedal when you do not want to. B. Driver Seat Height Adjuster. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is not moving. C. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑7. 3-4 Seats and Restraints

Power Seat Adjustment On vehicles with power seats, the Memory Seat and Mirrors controls are located on the outboard side of the seats. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the power seat adjustment control (A) forward or rearward. The vehicle may have additional features to adjust the power seat: . Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the power seat adjustment control (A) up or down. Driver Seat with Power Seat . On vehicles with the memory Control, Power Recline, Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the package, the controls for this and Power Lumbar shown front of the control up or down. feature are located on the driver A. Power Seat Adjustment Control door panel. The controls are used to . Raise or lower the rear part of program and recall memory settings B. Reclining Seatbacks on the seat cushion by moving the for the driver seat and outside page 3‑7. rear of the control up or down. mirrors. C. Lumbar Adjustment on page 3‑6. Seats and Restraints 3-5

To save positions in memory: To recall the memory positions, To stop recall movement of the 1. Adjust the driver seat, including the vehicle must be in P (Park). memory feature at any time, press the seatback recliner and both Press and release either button 1 or one of the power seat controls, outside mirrors to a comfortable button 2 corresponding to the memory buttons, or power mirror position. desired driving position. The seat buttons. and outside mirrors will move to the See Power Mirrors on If something has blocked the driver position previously stored. You will seat while recalling a memory page 2‑17 for more information. hear a single beep. position, the driver seat recall may Not all mirrors will have the Using the Remote Keyless stop working. If this happens, press ability to save and recall the Entry (RKE) transmitter to enter the the appropriate control for the area mirror positions. vehicle, with the remote recall that is not recalling for two seconds, 2. Press and hold button 1 until memory feature on, causes after the obstruction is removed. two beeps let you know that the automatic seat and mirror Then try recalling the memory position has been stored. adjustment. There is no adjustment position again by pressing the when the position has not been appropriate memory button. If the A second seating and mirror changed by another seating position memory position is still not being position can be programmed by or the easy exit feature. See recalled, see your dealer/retailer for repeating the above steps and “MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under service. pressing button 2. Vehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑40 for more information. 3-6 Seats and Restraints

Easy Exit Seat Further programming for the Lumbar Adjustment memory seat feature can be done The control for this feature is using the DIC. You can select or Manual Lumbar located on the driver door panel cancel the following: between buttons 1 and 2. . The automatic easy exit seat With the vehicle in P (Park), the exit feature. position can be recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear a . The remote memory seat recall single beep. The driver seat will feature. move back. For programming information, see If the easy exit seat feature is on in Vehicle Personalization (With DIC the Driver Information Center (DIC), Buttons) on page 5‑40. automatic seat movement will occur when the key is removed from the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under Vehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑40 for On vehicles with this feature, the more information. handle is located on the inboard side of the seatback. Move the handle forward or rearward to increase or decrease lumbar support. Seats and Restraints 3-7

Power Lumbar Reclining Seatbacks In vehicles with seats that have manual reclining seatbacks, the On vehicles with power lumbar, the Manual Reclining Seatbacks lever used to operate them is control is located on the outboard located on the outboard side of the side of the seat. See Power “ seat. See Seat Adjustment on Lumbar under Power Seat { WARNING ” page 3 3. Adjustment on page 3 4 for more ‑ ‑ You can lose control of the information. To recline the seatback: vehicle if you try to adjust a To increase or decrease lumbar manual driver's seat while the 1. Lift the recline lever (C). support, press and hold the front or vehicle is moving. The sudden 2. Move the seatback to the rear of the control (C). movement could startle and desired position, then release Release the control when the confuse you, or make you push a the lever to lock the seatback seatback reaches the desired level pedal when you do not want to. in place. of lumbar support. Adjust the driver's seat only when 3. Push and pull on the seatback to the vehicle is not moving. make sure it is locked. To return the seatback to an upright position, do the following: { WARNING 1. Lift the lever fully without If either seatback is not locked, it applying pressure to the could move forward in a sudden seatback and the seatback will stop or crash. That could cause return to the upright position. injury to the person sitting there. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to Always push and pull on the make sure it is locked. seatbacks to be sure they are locked. 3-8 Seats and Restraints

Power Reclining Seatbacks WARNING (Continued) In vehicles with seats that have power reclining seatbacks, the The shoulder belt cannot do its control used to recline them is job because it will not be against located on the outboard side of the your body. Instead, it will be in seat. See Power Seat Adjustment front of you. In a crash, you could on page 3‑4 for more information. go into it, receiving neck or other To recline the seatback: injuries. . Tilt the top of the control (B) The lap belt cannot do its job rearward. either. In a crash, the belt could . To bring the seatback forward, go up over your abdomen. The Do not have a seatback reclined if tilt the top of the control forward. belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could your vehicle is moving. { WARNING cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the Sitting in a reclined position when vehicle is in motion, have the the vehicle is in motion can be seatback upright. Then sit well dangerous. Even when buckled back in the seat and wear the up, the safety belts cannot do safety belt properly. their job when reclined like this. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 3-9

Heated Front Seats On vehicles with heated front seats, If the vehicle has remote vehicle the controls are located on the start and is started using the RKE center console. To operate the transmitter, the front heated seats { WARNING heated seats the engine must be will be turned on to the high setting If you cannot feel temperature running. if it is cold outside. See “Remote Vehicle Start under Remote change or pain to the skin, the I (Heated Seatback): Press to ” Keyless Entry (RKE) System seat heater may cause burns turn on the heated seatback. Operation on page 2‑3. When the even at low temperatures. To J (Heated Seat and Seatback): ignition is turned on, the heated seat reduce the risk of burns, people Press to turn on or off the heated feature will turn off. To turn the with such a condition should use seat and seatback. heated seat feature back on, press care when using the seat heater, The light on the button will come on the desired button. especially for long periods of to indicate that the feature is on. time. Do not place anything on Each time the button is pressed, the the seat that insulates against temperature settings change from heat, such as a blanket, cushion, high, to medium, to low, to off. cover or similar item. This may Indicator lights above the button will cause the seat heater to show the level of heat selected: overheat. An overheated seat three for high, two for medium, and heater may cause a burn or may one for low. damage the seat. The passenger seat may take longer to heat up. 3-10 Seats and Restraints

Heated and Ventilated H (Ventilated Seat): Press to Rear Seats Front Seats ventilate the entire seat. This symbol appears on the climate { WARNING control display to indicate that the feature is on. If you cannot feel temperature z (Heated Seat and Seatback): change or pain to the skin, the Press to heat the entire seat. seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures. To This symbol appears on the climate reduce the risk of burns, people control display to indicate that the feature is on. with such a condition should use care when using the seat heater, For either feature press the button especially for long periods of once for the highest setting. With each press of the switch, the seat time. Do not place anything on A. Seat Adjustment Handle the seat that insulates against changes to the next lower setting, heat, such as a blanket, cushion, and then the off setting. The lights B. Reclining Seatback Strap indicate three for the highest setting cover or similar item. This may C. Sliding Seat Lever cause the seat heater to and one for the lowest. overheat. An overheated seat The heated and ventilated seats are heater may cause a burn or may canceled after the ignition is turned damage the seat. off. To use the heated and ventilated seat feature after the vehicle is On vehicles with the heated and started, you will need to press the ventilated seat feature, the controls appropriate seat button again. are located on the front doors near the door handle. Seats and Restraints 3-11

Entering and Exiting the 5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C) Third Row forward and move the seatback forward. The seat cushion will { WARNING fold, and the entire seat will slide forward. Using the third row seating Returning the Seat to the position while the second row is Seating Position folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden To return the second row seat to its stop or crash. Be sure to return normal seating position: the seat to the passenger seating 1. Remove objects on the floor position. Push and pull on the behind the second row seat or in seat to make sure it is locked into To access the third row: the seat tracks on the floor. place. 1. Remove objects on the floor in 2. Pull the seatback rearward until front of or on the second row it is locked in place. Notice: Folding a rear seat with seat, or in the seat tracks on the the safety belts still fastened may floor. 3. Slide the seat rearward by cause damage to the seat or the pushing on the seatback until it 2. Move the front center console safety belts. Always unbuckle the is locked into place. armrest completely forward. safety belts and return them to See Center Console Storage 4. Push down on the rear of the their normal stowed position on page 4‑1. seat cushion until it is locked in before folding a rear seat. place. 3. Place folding armrests in the upright position. 5. Push and pull on the seatback and seat cushion to make sure 4. Ensure that the safety belt is they are locked in place. unfastened and in the stowed position. 6. Check that the safety belt is not under the seat cushion. 3-12 Seats and Restraints

Reclining the Seatbacks 3. Pull forward on the reclining Third Row Seats seatback strap (B) and push To recline the seatback: down on the seatback. 1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull { WARNING If the headrest touches the front the reclining seatback strap (B). seat, slide the second row seat Using the third row seating 2. Move the seatback to the rearward. position while the second row is desired position, then release To return the seatback to the folded, or pushed forward in the the strap to lock the seatback in seating position, lift the upper corner entry position, could cause place. of the seatback and push it injury in a sudden stop or crash. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to rearward until it locks into place. Be sure to return the seat to the make sure it is locked. Push and pull on the seatback to passenger seating position. Push make sure it is locked. and pull on the seat to make sure Folding the Rear Seat it is locked into place. To fold the second row seats: Adjusting the Seats To adjust the second row seats, pull The third row seats can be folded 1. Remove anything on or under forward or removed. the seat. outward on the seat adjustment handle (A). Slide the seat forward or Notice: Folding a rear seat with 2. Place the armrest in the upright rearward to the desired position. the safety belts still fastened may position, and unfasten the Release the handle and push and cause damage to the seat or the safety belt. pull on the seat to make sure it is safety belts. Always unbuckle the locked. safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. Seats and Restraints 3-13

To fold the seatback: To return the seatback to the 1. Remove anything on or under seating position: the seat. 1. Raise the seatback into place by using the pullstrap from the rear of the vehicle, or by pushing it into place from inside the vehicle. 2. The headrest must be locked into place before sitting in the seat.

3. Pull up on the release lever { WARNING located on the back of the seat. The headrest moves forward If either seatback is not locked, it automatically. could move forward in a sudden 2. Disconnect the rear safety belt stop or crash. That could cause 4. Push the seatback forward to injury to the person sitting there. mini-latch, using a key in the slot lay flat. on the mini-buckle, let the belt Always push and pull on the retract into the headliner. Stow seatbacks to be sure they are the mini-latch in the holder locked. located in the headliner. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place. 3-14 Seats and Restraints

Removing the Third Row Seats 5. Remove the seat by tilting it { WARNING slightly upward, and then pulling 1. Remove the cargo management it out of the rear of the vehicle in system, if it is in the vehicle. See A safety belt that is improperly one motion. routed, not properly attached, Cargo Management System on or twisted will not provide the page 4‑3. 6. Replace the bolts in the floor holes for storage. protection needed in a crash. 2. Remove anything on or under The person wearing the belt could the seat. Installing the Third Row Seats be seriously injured. After raising Notice: Folding a rear seat with the rear seatback, always check 1. Before installing the seat the the safety belts still fastened may to be sure that the safety belts seatback must be folded cause damage to the seat or the forward. See Folding the are properly routed and attached, “ safety belts. Always unbuckle the Seatback” earlier in this section. and are not twisted. safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position The seats must be placed in the 4. Reconnect the center safety belt before folding a rear seat. proper locations to attach mini-latch to the mini-buckle. correctly. The wider seat must Do not let it twist. 3. Fold the seatback down. See be installed on the driver side “Folding the Seatback” earlier in and the narrower seat on the 5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure this section. passenger side. Remove the the mini-latch is secure. 4. Remove the rear bolts located bolts from the holes in the floor on the floor on each side of before installing the seats. the seat. 2. Place the seat on the vehicle floor so that the front seat hooks are on the vehicle bars. Seats and Restraints 3-15

3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to Safety Belts 55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the { WARNING seat to make sure it is locked in This section of the manual place. describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside 4. Raise the seatback to its upright things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision, people position. Push and pull on the riding in these areas are more seatback to make sure it is { WARNING likely to be seriously injured or locked into place. killed. Do not allow people to ride 5. Push the headrest up into Do not let anyone ride where a in any area of your vehicle that is position. Push and pull on the safety belt cannot be worn not equipped with seats and headrest to make sure it is properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in locked into place. passenger(s) are not wearing your vehicle is in a seat and using 6. Reconnect the center safety belt safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly. mini-latch to the mini-buckle. much worse. You can hit things Do not let it twist. inside the vehicle harder or be This vehicle has indicators as a ejected from the vehicle. You and reminder to buckle the safety belts. your passenger(s) can be See Safety Belt Reminders on seriously injured or killed. In the page 5‑13 for additional information. same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too. 3-16 Seats and Restraints

In most states and in all Canadian Why Safety Belts Work provinces, the law requires wearing When you ride in or on anything, safety belts. Here is why: you go as fast as it goes. You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people Put someone on it. who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 40 years of safety Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. it is just a seat on wheels. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! Seats and Restraints 3-17

Get it up to speed. Then stop the The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... vehicle. The rider does not stop. stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... 3-18 Seats and Restraints

Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I Safety Belts never drive far from home, why should I wear safety Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle belts? after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a crash — even A: You could be whether you are — one that is not your fault — you wearing a safety belt or not. But and your passenger(s) can be your chance of being conscious hurt. Being a good driver does during and after an accident, so not protect you from things you can unbuckle and get out, is beyond your control, such as much greater if you are belted. bad drivers. or the safety belts! And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are Most accidents occur within With safety belts, you slow down as upside down. 40 km (25 miles) of home. the vehicle does. You get more time And the greatest number of to stop. You stop over more Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why serious injuries and deaths distance, and your strongest bones should I have to wear safety occur at speeds of less than take the forces. That is why safety belts? 65 km/h (40 mph). belts make such good sense. A: Airbags are supplemental Safety belts are for everyone. systems only; so they work with safety belts — not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. Seats and Restraints 3-19

How to Wear Safety Belts First, before you or your touching the thighs. In a crash, this passenger(s) wear a safety belt, applies force to the strong pelvic Properly there is important information you bones and you would be less likely This section is only for people of should know. to slide under the lap belt. If you slid adult size. under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause Be aware that there are special serious or even fatal injuries. The things to know about safety belts shoulder belt should go over the and children. And there are different shoulder and across the chest. rules for smaller children and These parts of the body are best infants. If a child will be riding in the able to take belt restraining forces. vehicle, see Older Children on page 3‑47 or Infants and Young The shoulder belt locks if there is a Children on page 3‑49. Follow sudden stop or crash. those rules for everyone's protection. It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that Sit up straight and always keep unbelted people are hurt more often your feet on the floor in front of you. in crashes than those who are The lap part of the belt should be wearing safety belts. worn low and snug on the hips, just Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. 3-20 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. A: The lap belt is too loose. It will It will not give as much not give nearly as much protection this way. protection this way. Seats and Restraints 3-21

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if your You can be seriously injured if lap belt is too loose. In a crash, your belt is buckled in the wrong you could slide under the lap belt place like this. In a crash, the belt and apply force on your would go up over your abdomen. abdomen. This could cause The belt forces would be there, serious or even fatal injuries. not on the pelvic bones. This The lap belt should be worn low could cause serious internal and snug on the hips, just injuries. Always buckle your belt touching the thighs. into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle. 3-22 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest. A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. Seats and Restraints 3-23

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if You can be seriously injured by you wear the shoulder belt under not wearing the lap-shoulder belt your arm. In a crash, your body properly. In a crash, you would would move too far forward, not be restrained by the shoulder which would increase the chance belt. Your body could move of head and neck injury. Also, the too far forward increasing the belt would apply too much force chance of head and neck injury. to the ribs, which are not as You might also slide under the strong as shoulder bones. You lap belt. The belt force would then could also severely injure internal be applied right on the abdomen. organs like your liver or spleen. That could cause serious or fatal The shoulder belt should go over A: The belt is behind the body. injuries. The shoulder belt should the shoulder and across the go over the shoulder and across chest. the chest. 3-24 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Lap-Shoulder Belt { WARNING All seating positions in the vehicle You can be seriously injured by a have a lap-shoulder belt. twisted belt. In a crash, you would If you are using a rear seating not have the full width of the belt position with a detachable safety to spread impact forces. If a belt belt and the safety belt is not is twisted, make it straight so it attached, see Third Row Seats on can work properly, or ask your page 3‑12 for instruction on dealer/retailer to fix it. reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly. A: The belt is twisted across the body. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index. Seats and Restraints 3-25

If the shoulder portion of a 4. Pull up on the latch plate to passenger belt is pulled out all make sure it is secure. If the belt the way, the child restraint is not long enough, see Safety locking feature may be engaged. Belt Extender on page 3‑30. If this happens, let the belt go Position the release button on back all the way and start again. the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. 5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull “ Adjustment later in this section the belt across you. Do not let it ” for instructions on use and get twisted. important safety information. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you 3. Push the latch plate into the more slowly. buckle until it clicks. 3-26 Seats and Restraints

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger seating positions. Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away from the face and neck, but not falling off of the shoulder. Improper shoulder belt 6. To make the lap part tight, pull To unlatch the belt, push the button height adjustment could reduce the up on the shoulder belt. on the buckle. The belt should effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. It may be necessary to pull the return to its stowed position. Slide stitching on the safety belt the latch plate up the safety belt through the latch plate to fully webbing when the safety belt is not tighten the lap belt on smaller in use. The latch plate should rest occupants. on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall. Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle. Seats and Restraints 3-27

Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort This vehicle has safety belt Guides pretensioners for the front outboard This vehicle may have rear shoulder occupants. Although the safety belt belt comfort guides. If not, they are pretensioners cannot be seen, they available through your dealer/ are part of the safety belt assembly. retailer. The guides may provide They can help tighten the safety added safety belt comfort for older belts during the early stages of a children who have outgrown booster moderate to severe frontal, near seats and for some adults. When frontal, or rear crash if the threshold installed and properly adjusted, the conditions for pretensioner comfort guide positions the shoulder activation are met. And, for vehicles belt away from the neck and head. To move it down, push down on the with side impact airbags, safety belt button (A) and move the height pretensioners can help tighten the adjuster to the desired position. safety belts in a side crash or a You can move the height adjuster rollover event. up by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, After the adjuster is set to the they will need to be replaced, and desired position, try to move it down probably other new parts for the without pushing the button to make vehicle's safety belt system. See sure it has locked into position. Replacing Safety Belt System Parts After a Crash on page 3‑31. 3-28 Seats and Restraints

Here is how to install a comfort For the third row center position, Pull the comfort guide out of its guide to the safety belt: locate the comfort guide which is storage location and then return located in a storage pocket, at the headrest to its upright the top of the seat, under the position. headrest on the driver's side of the vehicle. To access the comfort guide, you will first need to move the headrest forward by pulling on the handle behind the seatback. The comfort guide will now be accessible.

Outboard Positions 1. For the outboard positions, remove the guide from its 2. Place the guide over the belt storage clip on the interior body. and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

Third Row Center Position Seats and Restraints 3-29

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release twisted and it lies flat. The the safety belt as described elastic cord must be under the previously in this section. belt and the guide on top. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage location or on its storage clip. 3-30 Seats and Restraints

Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is The extender has been designed for to protect the mother. When a safety adults. Never use it for securing Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely child seats. To wear it, attach it to Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a the regular safety belt. For more including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for information, see the instruction occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety sheet that comes with the extender. be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them wear safety belts. properly. Safety System Check Now and then, check that the safety Safety Belt Extender belt reminder light, safety belts, If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten buckles, latch plates, retractors and around you, you should use it. anchorages are working properly. But if a safety belt is not long Look for any other loose or enough, your dealer/retailer will damaged safety belt system parts order you an extender. When you that might keep a safety belt system go in to order it, take the heaviest from doing its job. See your dealer/ coat you will wear, so the extender retailer to have it repaired. Torn or will be long enough for you. To help frayed safety belts may not protect avoid personal injury, do not let you in a crash. They can rip apart someone else use it, and use it under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. A pregnant woman should wear a only for the seat it is made to fit. lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. Seats and Restraints 3-31

Make sure the safety belt reminder Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of light is working. See Safety Belt System Parts After a safety belts may not be necessary. Reminders on page 5‑13 for more But the safety belt assemblies that information. Crash were used during any crash may Keep safety belts clean and dry. have been stressed or damaged. See Safety Belt Care on { WARNING See your dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or page 3‑31. A crash can damage the safety replaced. Safety Belt Care belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt Keep belts clean and dry. may not properly protect the system was not being used at the person using it, resulting in time of the crash. { WARNING serious injury or even death in a Have the safety belt pretensioners crash. To help make sure the checked if the vehicle has been in a Do not bleach or dye safety belts. safety belt systems are working crash, or if the airbag readiness light It may severely weaken them. In properly after a crash, have them a crash, they might not be able to stays on after you start the vehicle inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag provide adequate protection. replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑14. Clean safety belts only with mild possible. soap and lukewarm water. 3-32 Seats and Restraints

Airbag System All of the airbags in the vehicle will Here are the most important things have the word AIRBAG embossed to know about the airbag system: The vehicle has the following in the trim or on an attached label airbags: near the deployment opening. { WARNING . A frontal airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle You can be severely injured or . A frontal airbag for the right front killed in a crash if you are not passenger. part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel wearing your safety belt — even if . A seat-mounted side impact for the right front passenger. you have airbags. Airbags are airbag for the driver. designed to work with safety With seat-mounted side impact belts, but do not replace them. . A seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG will Also, airbags are not designed to airbag for the right front appear on the side of the seatback passenger. closest to the door. deploy in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are your only . A roof-rail airbag for the driver, With roof-rail airbags, the word restraint. See When Should an passenger seated directly AIRBAG will appear along the Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑36. behind the driver, and the third headliner or trim. row outboard passenger Wearing your safety belt during a position. Airbags are designed to supplement crash helps reduce your chance the protection provided by safety of hitting things inside the vehicle . A roof-rail airbag for the right belts. Even though today's airbags or being ejected from it. Airbags front passenger, passenger are also designed to help reduce seated directly behind the right the risk of injury from the force of an are “supplemental restraints” to front passenger, and the third inflating bag, all airbags must inflate the safety belts. Everyone in your row outboard passenger very quickly to do their job. vehicle should wear a safety belt position. properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. Seats and Restraints 3-33

{ WARNING { WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against, faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag Anyone who is up against, or very when it inflates can be seriously close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus There is an airbag readiness light inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection on the instrument panel cluster, or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but which shows the airbag symbol. close to the airbag, as you would not for young children and infants. The system checks the airbag be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle's safety belt electrical system for malfunctions. of your seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is The light tells you if there is an Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young electrical problem. See Airbag position before and during a children and infants need the Readiness Light on page 5‑14 for crash. Always wear your safety protection that a child restraint more information. belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in your while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older the vehicle. Children on page 3‑47 or Occupants should not lean on or Infants and Young Children on sleep against the door or side page 3‑49. windows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags. 3-34 Seats and Restraints

Where Are the Airbags?

The right front passenger frontal Driver Side shown, Passenger airbag is in the instrument panel on Side similar the passenger side. The driver frontal airbag is in the The seat-mounted side impact middle of the steering wheel. airbags for the driver and right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door. Seats and Restraints 3-35

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

If something is between an Do not use seat accessories that occupant and an airbag, the block the inflation path of a airbag might not inflate properly seat-mounted side impact airbag. or it might force the object into Never secure anything to the roof that person causing severe injury of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags or even death. The path of an by routing a rope or tie down inflating airbag must be kept through any door or window clear. Do not put anything opening. If you do, the path of an between an occupant and an inflating roof-rail airbag will be airbag, and do not attach or put Driver Side shown, Passenger blocked. Side similar anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other The roof-rail airbags for the driver, airbag covering. right front passenger, passengers behind the driver and right front (Continued) passenger, and the third row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows. 3-36 Seats and Restraints

When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at Frontal airbags are not intended to different crash speeds. For inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear Inflate? example: impacts, or in many side impacts. Frontal airbags are designed to . If the vehicle hits a stationary In addition, the vehicle has inflate in moderate to severe frontal object, the airbags could inflate dual-stage frontal airbags. or near-frontal crashes to help at a different crash speed than if Dual-stage airbags adjust the reduce the potential for severe the vehicle hits a moving object. restraint according to crash severity. injuries mainly to the driver's or right The vehicle has electronic frontal . If the vehicle hits an object that front passenger's head and chest. sensors, which help the sensing However, they are only designed to deforms, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed system distinguish between a inflate if the impact exceeds a moderate frontal impact and a more predetermined deployment than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform. severe frontal impact. For moderate threshold. Deployment thresholds frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object inflate at a level less than full crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could deployment. For more severe frontal airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed impacts, full deployment occurs. the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall). The vehicle has seat-mounted side Whether the frontal airbags will or impact and roof-rail airbags. See should deploy is not based on how . If the vehicle goes into an object Airbag System on page 3‑32. fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could Seat-mounted side impact and It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed roof-rail airbags are intended to the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight inflate in moderate to severe side quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object. crashes. In addition, these roof-rail Thresholds can also vary with airbags are intended to inflate specific vehicle design. during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags will Seats and Restraints 3-37 inflate if the crash severity is above For seat-mounted side impact and the ceiling of the vehicle, near the the system's designed threshold roof-rail airbags, deployment is side windows that have occupant level. The threshold level can vary determined by the location and seating positions. with specific vehicle design. severity of the side impact. In a Seat-mounted side impact airbags rollover event, roof-rail airbag How Does an Airbag are not intended to inflate in frontal deployment is determined by the Restrain? impacts, near-frontal impacts, direction of the roll. In moderate to severe frontal or rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail near frontal collisions, even belted airbags are not intended to inflate in What Makes an Airbag occupants can contact the steering rear impacts. A seat-mounted side Inflate? wheel or the instrument panel. In impact airbag is intended to deploy In a deployment event, the sensing moderate to severe side collisions, on the side of the vehicle that is system sends an electrical signal even belted occupants can contact struck. Both roof-rail airbags will triggering a release of gas from the the inside of the vehicle. deploy when either side of the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the vehicle is struck, or if the sensing Airbags supplement the protection airbag causing the bag to break out system predicts that the vehicle is provided by safety belts. Frontal of the cover and deploy. The inflator, about to roll over, or in a severe airbags distribute the force of the the airbag, and related hardware are frontal impact. impact more evenly over the all part of the airbag module. occupant's upper body, stopping the In any particular crash, no one can Frontal airbag modules are located occupant more gradually. say whether an airbag should have inside the steering wheel and Seat-mounted side impact and inflated simply because of the instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags distribute the force damage to a vehicle or because seat-mounted side impact airbags, of the impact more evenly over the of what the repair costs were. there are airbag modules in the side occupant's upper body. For frontal airbags, inflation is of the front seatbacks closest to the determined by what the vehicle hits, door. For vehicles with roof-rail the angle of the impact, and how airbags, there are airbag modules in quickly the vehicle slows down. 3-38 Seats and Restraints

Rollover capable roof-rail airbags What Will You See After are designed to help contain the { WARNING head and chest of occupants in the an Airbag Inflates? outboard seating positions in the After the frontal airbags and When an airbag inflates, there first and second rows. The rollover seat-mounted side impact airbags may be dust in the air. This dust capable roof-rail airbags are inflate, they quickly deflate, so could cause breathing problems designed to help reduce the risk of quickly that some people may not for people with a history of full or partial ejection in rollover even realize an airbag inflated. asthma or other breathing trouble. events, although no system can Roof-rail airbags may still be at least To avoid this, everyone in the prevent all such ejections. partially inflated for some time after vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have But airbags would not help in many they deploy. Some components of types of collisions, primarily the airbag module may be hot for breathing problems but cannot because the occupant's motion is several minutes. For location of the get out of the vehicle after an not toward those airbags. See When airbag modules, see What Makes airbag inflates, then get fresh air Should an Airbag Inflate? on an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑37. by opening a window or a door. page 3‑36 for more information. The parts of the airbag that come If you experience breathing into contact with you may be warm, problems following an airbag Airbags should never be regarded deployment, you should seek as anything more than a supplement but not too hot to touch. There may medical attention. to safety belts. be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not The vehicle has a feature that may prevent the driver from seeing out of automatically unlock the doors, turn the windshield or being able to steer on the interior lamps and hazard the vehicle, nor does it prevent warning flashers, and shut off the people from leaving the vehicle. fuel system after the airbags inflate. Seats and Restraints 3-39

You can lock the doors, turn off the In many crashes severe enough to . The vehicle has a crash sensing interior lamps and hazard warning inflate the airbag, windshields are and diagnostic module which flashers by using the controls for broken by vehicle deformation. records information after a those features. Additional windshield breakage may crash. See Vehicle Data also occur from the right front Recording and Privacy on { WARNING passenger airbag. page 13‑15 and Event Data Recorders on page 13‑16. . Airbags are designed to inflate A crash severe enough to inflate only once. After an airbag . Let only qualified technicians the airbags may have also inflates, you will need some new work on the airbag systems. damaged important functions in parts for the airbag system. Improper service can mean that the vehicle, such as the fuel If you do not get them, the an airbag system will not work system, brake and steering airbag system will not be there properly. See your dealer/retailer systems, etc. Even if the vehicle to help protect you in another for service. appears to be drivable after a crash. A new system will include moderate crash, there may be airbag modules and possibly concealed damage that could other parts. The service manual make it difficult to safely operate for your vehicle covers the need the vehicle. to replace other parts. Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has occurred. 3-40 Seats and Restraints

Passenger Sensing using remote start, if equipped, to According to accident statistics, start the vehicle from a distance, children are safer when properly System you may not see the system check. secured in a rear seat in the correct The vehicle has a passenger When the system check is child restraint for their weight sensing system for the right front complete, either the word ON or and size. passenger position. The passenger OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will We recommend that children be airbag status indicator will be visible be visible. See Passenger Airbag secured in a rear seat, including: an on the instrument panel when the Status Indicator on page 5‑15. infant or a child riding in a vehicle is started. The passenger sensing system rear-facing child restraint; a child turns off the right front passenger riding in a forward-facing child seat; frontal airbag under certain an older child riding in a booster conditions. The driver airbag, seat; and children, who are large seat-mounted side impact airbags enough, using safety belts. and the roof-rail airbags are not A label on the sun visor says, affected by the passenger sensing “Never put a rear-facing child seat in system. United States the front.” This is because the risk to The passenger sensing system the rear-facing child is so great, works with sensors that are part of if the airbag deploys. the right front passenger seat. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag Canada should be enabled (may inflate) The words ON and OFF, or the or not. symbol for on and off, are visible during the system check. If you are Seats and Restraints 3-41

When the passenger sensing { WARNING WARNING (Continued) system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints indicator will light and stay lit to restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the remind you that the airbag is off. or killed if the right front airbag is off. If you secure a See Passenger Airbag Status passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in Indicator on page 5‑15. This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on (may inflate) the be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to right front passenger frontal airbag airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a anytime the system senses that a child restraint can be seriously rear seat. person of adult size is sitting injured or killed if the right front properly in the right front The passenger sensing system is passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat. passenger seat is in a forward designed to turn off the right front position. passenger frontal airbag if: When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be . The right front passenger seat is Even if the passenger sensing enabled, the on indicator will light unoccupied. system has turned off the right and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag, no . The system determines that an airbag is active. system is fail-safe. No one can infant is present in a child guarantee that an airbag will not restraint. deploy under some unusual . A right front passenger takes circumstance, even though the his/her weight off of the seat for airbag is turned off. a period of time. (Continued) . Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system. 3-42 Seats and Restraints

For some children, including If the On Indicator is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child children in child restraints, and for Child Restraint restraint and restarting the very small adults, the passenger vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, sensing system may or may not If a child restraint has been installed turn the vehicle off. Then slightly turn off the right front passenger and the on indicator is lit: recline the vehicle seatback frontal airbag, depending upon the 1. Turn the vehicle off. and adjust the seat cushion, person s seating posture and body if adjustable, to make sure that ’ 2. Remove the child restraint from build. Everyone in the vehicle the vehicle seatback is not the vehicle. who has outgrown child restraints pushing the child restraint into should wear a safety belt 3. Remove any additional items the seat cushion. from the seat such as blankets, properly — whether or not there is Also make sure the child cushions, seat covers, seat an airbag for that person. restraint is not trapped under the heaters, or seat massagers. vehicle head restraint. If this { WARNING 4. Reinstall the child restraint happens, adjust the head following the directions restraint. See Head Restraints If the airbag readiness light ever provided by the child restraint on page 3‑2. comes on and stays on, it means manufacturer and refer to 6. Restart the vehicle. that something may be wrong Securing Child Restraints (Rear with the airbag system. To help Seat ) on page 3‑62 or The passenger sensing system avoid injury to yourself or others, Securing Child Restraints (Right may or may not turn off the have the vehicle serviced right Front Passenger Seat) on airbag for a child in a child away. See Airbag Readiness page 3‑64. restraint depending upon the Light on page 5‑14 for more child’s seating posture and body information, including important build. It is better to secure the safety information. child restraint in a rear seat. Seats and Restraints 3-43

If the Off Indicator is Lit for an use the following steps to allow the Additional Factors Affecting Adult-Size Occupant system to detect that person and System Operation enable the right front passenger frontal airbag: Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat 1. Turn the vehicle off. during vehicle maneuvers and 2. Remove any additional material braking, which helps the passenger from the seat, such as blankets, sensing system maintain the cushions, seat covers, seat passenger airbag status. See heaters, or seat massagers. “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index for additional 3. Place the seatback in the fully information about the importance of upright position. proper restraint use. 4. Have the person sit upright in A thick layer of additional material, the seat, centered on the seat such as a blanket or cushion, cushion, with legs comfortably or aftermarket equipment such as If a person of adult-size is sitting in extended. seat covers, seat heaters, and seat the right front passenger seat, but massagers can affect how well the the off indicator is lit, it could be 5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger sensing system because that person is not sitting person remain in this position for operates. We recommend that you properly in the seat. If this happens, two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit. not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3‑45 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates. 3-44 Seats and Restraints

A wet seat can affect the The on indicator may be lit if an Your dealer/retailer and the service performance of the passenger object, such as a briefcase, manual have information about sensing system. Here is how: handbag, grocery bag, laptop or servicing the vehicle and the airbag other electronic device, is put on an system. To purchase a service . The passenger sensing system may turn off the passenger unoccupied seat. If this is not manual, see Service Publications airbag when liquid is soaked into desired remove the object from Ordering Information on page 13‑13. the seat. If this happens, the off the seat. indicator will be lit, and the { WARNING airbag readiness light on the { WARNING instrument panel will also be lit. For up to 10 seconds after the Stowing of articles under the ignition is turned off and the . Liquid pooled on the seat that passenger seat or between the battery is disconnected, an airbag has not soaked in may make it passenger seat cushion and can still inflate during improper more likely that the passenger seatback may interfere with the service. You can be injured if you sensing system will enable proper operation of the passenger are close to an airbag when it (turn on) the passenger airbag sensing system. inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. while a child restraint or child occupant is on the seat. If the They are probably part of the passenger airbag is turned on, Servicing the airbag system. Be sure to follow the on indicator will be lit. proper service procedures, and Airbag-Equipped Vehicle make sure the person performing If the passenger seat gets wet, dry work for you is qualified to do so. the seat immediately. If the airbag Airbags affect how the vehicle readiness light is lit, do not install a should be serviced. There are parts child restraint or allow anyone to of the airbag system in several occupy the seat. See Airbag places around the vehicle. Readiness Light on page 5‑14 for important safety information. Seats and Restraints 3-45

Adding Equipment to the position, which includes sensors Step Two of the Customer that are part of the passenger Satisfaction Procedure in this Airbag-Equipped Vehicle seat. The passenger sensing manual. Q: Is there anything I might add system may not operate properly If the vehicle has rollover to or change about the vehicle if the original seat trim is roof-rail airbags, see Different that could keep the airbags replaced with non-GM covers, Size Tires and Wheels on from working properly? upholstery or trim, or with GM page 10‑51 for additional covers, upholstery or trim A: Yes. If you add things that important information. designed for a different vehicle. change the vehicle's frame, Any object, such as an Q: Because I have a disability, bumper system, height, front end aftermarket seat heater or a I have to get my vehicle or side sheet metal, they may comfort enhancing pad or modified. How can I find out keep the airbag system from device, installed under or on top whether this will affect my working properly. Changing or of the seat fabric, could also airbag system? moving any parts of the front interfere with the operation of seats, safety belts, the airbag A: If you have questions, call the passenger sensing system. sensing and diagnostic module, Customer Assistance. The This could either prevent proper steering wheel, instrument phone numbers and addresses deployment of the passenger panel, roof-rail airbag modules, for Customer Assistance are in airbag(s) or prevent the ceiling headliner or pillar garnish Step Two of the Customer passenger sensing system trim, overhead console, front Satisfaction Procedure in this from properly turning off the sensors, side impact sensors, manual. passenger airbag(s). See rollover sensor module, or airbag Passenger Sensing System on In addition, your dealer/retailer and wiring can affect the operation of the service manual have information page 3‑40. the airbag system. about the location of the airbag If you have questions, call In addition, the vehicle has a sensors, sensing and diagnostic Customer Assistance. The passenger sensing system module and airbag wiring. phone numbers and addresses for the right front passenger for Customer Assistance are in 3-46 Seats and Restraints

Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See The airbag system does not need Parts After a Crash your dealer/retailer for service. regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag { WARNING If the airbag readiness light stays on readiness light is working. See after the vehicle is started or comes Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the airbag on when you are driving, the airbag page 5‑14 for more information. systems in your vehicle. system may not work properly. Have A damaged airbag system the vehicle serviced right away. See Notice: If an airbag covering is Airbag Readiness Light may not work properly and may on damaged, opened, or broken, the page 5‑14 for more information. airbag may not work properly. not protect you and your Do not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death. opened or broken airbag covers, To help make sure your airbag have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them location of the airbag modules, inspected and any necessary see What Makes an Airbag replacements made as soon as Inflate? on page 3‑37. See your possible. dealer/retailer for service. Seats and Restraints 3-47

Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that . Does the lap belt fit low and come with the booster seat, state snug on the hips, touching the the weight and height limitations for thighs? If yes, continue. If no, Older Children that booster. Use a booster seat return to the booster seat. with a lap-shoulder belt until the . Can proper safety belt fit be child passes the below fit test: maintained for the length of the . Sit all the way back on the seat. trip? If yes, continue. If no, Do the knees bend at the seat return to the booster seat. edge? If yes, continue. If no, Q: What is the proper way to return to the booster seat. wear safety belts? . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. A: An older child should wear a Does the shoulder belt rest on lap-shoulder belt and get the the shoulder? If yes, continue. additional restraint a shoulder If no, try using the rear safety belt can provide. The shoulder belt comfort guide. See “Rear belt should not cross the face or Safety Belt Comfort Guides” neck. The lap belt should fit Older children who have outgrown under Lap-Shoulder Belt on snugly below the hips, just booster seats should wear the page 3‑24 for more information. touching the top of the thighs. vehicle's safety belts. If the shoulder belt still does not This applies belt force to the rest on the shoulder, then return child's pelvic bones in a crash. to the booster seat. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. 3-48 Seats and Restraints

Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on { WARNING { WARNING page 3‑24. Never do this. Never do this. According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when Never allow two children to wear Never allow a child to wear the properly restrained in a child the same safety belt. The safety safety belt with the shoulder belt restraint system or infant restraint belt can not properly spread the behind their back. A child can be system secured in a rear seating impact forces. In a crash, the two seriously injured by not wearing position. children can be crushed together the lap-shoulder belt properly. and seriously injured. A safety In a crash, the child would not be In a crash, children who are not belt must be used by only one restrained by the shoulder belt. buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be person at a time. The child could move too far thrown out of the vehicle. Older forward increasing the chance of children need to use safety belts head and neck injury. The child properly. might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 3-49

Infants and Young WARNING (Continued) { WARNING Children That could cause serious or fatal Everyone in a vehicle needs Children can be seriously injured injuries. The shoulder belt should protection! This includes infants and or strangled if a shoulder belt is go over the shoulder and across all other children. Neither the wrapped around their neck and the chest. distance traveled nor the age and the safety belt continues to size of the traveler changes the tighten. Never leave children need, for everyone, to use safety unattended in a vehicle and never restraints. In fact, the law in every allow children to play with the state in the United States and in safety belts. every Canadian province says children up to some age must be Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer restrained while in a vehicle. protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints. 3-50 Seats and Restraints

Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people, WARNING (Continued) or can be thrown out of the vehicle. better to secure a forward-facing { child restraint in a rear seat. If you WARNING must secure a forward-facing Never do this. child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front Never hold an infant or a child passenger seat as far back as it while riding in a vehicle. Due to will go. crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) { WARNING infant will suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's Never do this. arms. An infant should be Children who are up against, secured in an appropriate or very close to, any airbag when restraint. it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also (Continued) Seats and Restraints 3-51

Q: What are the different types of height limitations for a particular add-on child restraints? child restraint. In addition, there { WARNING are many kinds of restraints A: Add-on child restraints, which A young child's hip bones are still are purchased by the vehicle's available for children with special needs. so small that the vehicle's regular owner, are available in four basic safety belt may not remain low on types. Selection of a particular { WARNING the hip bones, as it should. restraint should take into Instead, it may settle up around consideration not only the child's the child's abdomen. In a crash, weight, height, and age but also To reduce the risk of neck and the belt would apply force on a whether or not the restraint will head injury during a crash, infants body area that is unprotected by be compatible with the motor need complete support. This is vehicle in which it will be used. because an infant's neck is not any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal For most basic types of child fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with injuries. To reduce the risk of restraints, there are many serious or fatal injuries during a different models available. When the rest of its body. In a crash, an crash, young children should purchasing a child restraint, be infant in a rear-facing child always be secured in appropriate sure it is designed to be used in restraint settles into the restraint, a motor vehicle. If it is, the so the crash forces can be child restraints. restraint will have a label saying distributed across the strongest that it meets federal motor part of an infant's body, the back vehicle safety standards. and shoulders. Infants should The restraint manufacturer's always be secured in rear-facing instructions that come with the child restraints. restraint state the weight and 3-52 Seats and Restraints

Child Restraint Systems

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats (A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the A rear-facing infant seat (A) body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system. provides restraint with the seating A booster seat can also help a child surface against the back of the to see out the window. infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. Seats and Restraints 3-53

Securing an Add-On Child To help reduce the chance of injury, Keep in mind that an unsecured Restraint in the Vehicle the child restraint must be secured child restraint can move around in a in the vehicle. Child restraint collision or sudden stop and injure { WARNING systems must be secured in vehicle people in the vehicle. Be sure to seats by lap belts or the lap belt properly secure any child restraint in A child can be seriously injured or portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the vehicle — even when no child is killed in a crash if the child the LATCH system. See Lower in it. restraint is not properly secured in Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) Securing the Child Within the the vehicle. Secure the child on page 3‑55 for more information. Children can be Child Restraint restraint properly in the vehicle endangered in a crash if the child using the vehicle's safety belt or restraint is not properly secured in { WARNING LATCH system, following the the vehicle. instructions that came with that A child can be seriously injured or When securing an add-on child child restraint and the instructions killed in a crash if the child is not restraint, refer to the instructions in this manual. properly secured in the child that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a restraint. Secure the child booklet, or both, and to this manual. properly following the instructions The child restraint instructions are that came with that child restraint. important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer. 3-54 Seats and Restraints

Where to Put the { WARNING WARNING (Continued) Restraint According to accident statistics, A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints children and infants are safer when restraint can be seriously in a rear seat, even if the properly restrained in a child injured or killed if the right front airbag is off. If you secure a restraint system or infant restraint passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in system secured in a rear seating This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move position. rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to We recommend that children and airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a child restraints be secured in a rear child restraint can be seriously rear seat. seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System passenger airbag inflates and the a child riding in a forward-facing on page 3‑40 for additional child seat; an older child riding in a passenger seat is in a forward information. booster seat; and children, who are position. large enough, using safety belts. Even if the passenger sensing When securing a child restraint in a A label on the sun visor says, system has turned off the right rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child “Never put a rear-facing child front passenger frontal airbag, no restraint to make sure it is restraint in the front.” This is system is fail-safe. No one can because the risk to the rear-facing guarantee that an airbag will not compatible with this vehicle. child is so great, if the airbag deploy under some unusual Wherever a child restraint is deploys. circumstance, even though it is installed, be sure to secure the turned off. child restraint properly. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 3-55

Keep in mind that an unsecured that came with that restraint, and Lower Anchors child restraint can move around in a also the instructions in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure When installing a child restraint with people in the vehicle. Be sure to a top tether, you must also use properly secure any child restraint in either the lower anchors or the the vehicle — even when no child is safety belts to properly secure the in it. child restraint. A child restraint must never be attached using only the top tether and anchor. Lower Anchors and Lower anchors (A) are metal bars Tethers for Children In order to use the LATCH system in built into the vehicle. There are (LATCH System) your vehicle, you need a child two lower anchors for each restraint that has LATCH LATCH seating position that will The LATCH system holds a child attachments. The child restraint accommodate a child restraint with restraint during driving or in a crash. manufacturer will provide you with lower attachments (B). This system is designed to make instructions on how to use the child installation of a child restraint easier. restraint and its attachments. The The LATCH system uses anchors in following explains how to attach a the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint with these child restraint that are made for use attachments in your vehicle. with the LATCH system. Not all vehicle seating positions or Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraints have lower anchors child restraint is properly installed and attachments or top tether using the anchors, or use the anchors and attachments. vehicle's safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions 3-56 Seats and Restraints

Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Anchor Locations Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow A top tether (A, C) anchors the top the instructions for your child Second Row Bucket of the child restraint to the vehicle. restraint. — i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating A top tether anchor is built into If the child restraint does not have a positions with top tether anchors. the vehicle. The top tether top tether, one can be obtained, in attachment (B) on the child restraint kit form, for many child restraints. j (Lower Anchor): Seating connects to the top tether anchor in Ask the child restraint manufacturer positions with two lower anchors. the vehicle in order to reduce the whether or not a kit is available. forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Seats and Restraints 3-57

To assist you in locating the lower anchors, each second row anchor position has a label, near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.

Second Row — 60/40 Bench Third Row i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. To assist you in locating the top tether anchors, the top tether anchor symbol is located on the cover or near the anchor. 3-58 Seats and Restraints

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 3‑54 for additional information. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System

{ WARNING Second Row — Bucket Shown, Third Row Seat If a LATCH-type child restraint is Bench Similar The third row has one top tether not attached to anchors, the child The top tether anchors are located anchor located at the bottom rear of restraint will not be able to protect at the bottom rear of the seatback the center seatback. This anchor the child correctly. In a crash, the for each seating position in the should be used for the center child could be seriously injured or second row. Open the cover to seating position only. Never install killed. Install a LATCH-type child two top tethers using the same top access the anchors. Be sure to use restraint properly using the tether anchor. an anchor located on the same side anchors, or use the vehicle's of the vehicle as the seating Do not secure a child restraint in a safety belts to secure the position where the child restraint will position without a top tether anchor restraint, following the instructions be placed. if a national or local law requires that came with the child restraint that the top tether be attached, or if and the instructions in this the instructions that come with the manual. child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. Seats and Restraints 3-59

seating position does not have { WARNING WARNING (Continued) lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and Do not attach more than one child Pull the shoulder belt all the way the safety belts. Refer to your restraint to a single anchor. out of the retractor to set the lock, child restraint manufacturer Attaching more than one child if your vehicle has one, after the instructions and the instructions restraint to a single anchor could child restraint has been installed. in this manual. cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break Notice: Do not let the LATCH 1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired seating during a crash. A child or others attachments rub against the position. could be injured. To reduce the vehicle’s safety belts. This may risk of serious or fatal injuries damage these parts. If necessary, 1.2. Recline the seatback to the during a crash, attach only one move buckled safety belts to full reclined position. child restraint per anchor. avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments. Make sure the second row bench seatbacks are Do not fold the empty rear seat aligned at the same angle { WARNING with a safety belt buckled. This before placing the child could damage the safety belt or restraint on the seat. Make Children can be seriously injured the seat. Unbuckle and return the sure the third row bench or strangled if a shoulder belt is safety belt to its stowed position, seatbacks are both upright wrapped around their neck and before folding the seat. before placing the child the safety belt continues to 1. Attach and tighten the lower restraint on the seat. tighten. Buckle any unused safety attachments to the lower belts behind the child restraint anchors. If the child restraint so children cannot reach them. does not have lower (Continued) attachments or the desired 3-60 Seats and Restraints

1.3. Put the child restraint on 2.3. Route, attach and tighten the seat. the top tether according to 1.4. Attach and tighten the lower your child restraint attachments on the child instructions and the restraint to the lower following instructions: anchors. 2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if the vehicle has one. Refer to the child restraint If the position you are using instructions and the following does not have a headrest steps: or head restraint and you 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. are using a dual tether, 2.2. If the anchor is covered, flip route the tether over the open the cover to expose seatback. the anchor. If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback. Seats and Restraints 3-61

Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle. A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make If the position you are using If the position you are using sure the LATCH system is has a fixed headrest or has a fixed headrest or working properly after a crash, head restraint and you are head restraint and you are see your dealer/retailer to have using a dual tether, route using a single tether, route the system inspected and any the tether around the the tether over the headrest necessary replacements made as headrest or head restraint. or head restraint. soon as possible. 3. Push and pull the child restraint If the vehicle has the LATCH system in different directions to be sure and it was being used during a it is secure. crash, new LATCH system parts may be needed. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash. 3-62 Seats and Restraints

Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have (Rear Seat ) a top tether, and that the tether be When securing a child restraint in a attached. rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. If the child restraint has the LATCH Be sure to follow the instructions system, see Lower Anchors and that came with the child restraint. Tethers for Children (LATCH Secure the child in the child restraint System) on page 3‑55 for how and when and as the instructions say. 3. Push the latch plate into the where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint buckle until it clicks. using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3‑54. the buckle so that the safety belt see Lower Anchors and Tethers for could be quickly unbuckled if 1. Put the child restraint on Children (LATCH System) on necessary. page 3‑55 for top tether anchor the seat. locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show the instructions that come with the you how. child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. Seats and Restraints 3-63

6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3‑55 for more information. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt 5. To tighten the belt, push down unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and all the way out of the retractor to on the child restraint, pull the let it return to the stowed position. set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt to If the top tether is attached to a top tighten the lap portion of the belt tether anchor, disconnect it. and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 3-64 Seats and Restraints

Securing Child Restraints { WARNING WARNING (Continued) (Right Front Passenger Seat) A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag The vehicle has airbags. A rear or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a seat is a safer place to secure a passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in forward-facing child restraint. because the back of the the right front seat, always move See Where to Put the Restraint on rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far page 3 54. ‑ be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to In addition, the vehicle has a airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a passenger sensing system which is child restraint can be seriously rear seat. designed to turn off the right front injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System passenger frontal airbag under passenger airbag inflates and the certain conditions. See Passenger on page 3‑40 for additional passenger seat is in a forward information. Sensing System on page 3‑40 and position. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 5‑15 for more information, Even if the passenger sensing including important safety system has turned off the right information. front passenger frontal airbag, no A label on the sun visor says, system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to deploy under some unusual the rear-facing child is so great, circumstance, even though it is if the airbag deploys. turned off. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 3-65

If the child restraint has the LATCH You will be using the lap-shoulder system, see Lower Anchors and belt to secure the child restraint in Tethers for Children (LATCH this position. Follow the instructions System) on page 3‑55 for how and that came with the child restraint. where to install the child restraint 1. Move the seat as far back as it using LATCH. If a child restraint is will go before securing the secured using a safety belt and it forward-facing child restraint. uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right (LATCH System) on page 3‑55 for top tether anchor locations. front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator on the Do not secure a child seat in a passenger airbag status 4. Push the latch plate into the position without a top tether anchor indicator should light and stay lit buckle until it clicks. if a national or local law requires when the vehicle is started. See that the top tether be anchored, or if Passenger Airbag Status Position the release button on the instructions that come with the Indicator on page 5‑15. the buckle so that the safety belt child restraint say that the top strap could be quickly unbuckled if 2. Put the child restraint on must be anchored. necessary. the seat. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run a top tether, and that the tether be the lap and shoulder portions of attached. the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 3-66 Seats and Restraints

If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on page 3‑40 for more information. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt 6. To tighten the belt, push down let it return to the stowed position. all the way out of the retractor to on the child restraint, pull the set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Storage 4-1

Storage cupholders located at the rear of the Storage center console. To access, pull the Compartments handle down. Storage Compartments Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage Armrest Storage Glove Box ...... 4-1 This vehicle has an instrument Vehicles with a rear seat armrest, Cupholders ...... 4-1 panel storage area located above have two cupholders. Pull the Armrest Storage ...... 4-1 the radio. To open the cover, press armrest down from the rear Center Console Storage ...... 4-1 the button. seatback to access the cupholders. Floor Console Storage ...... 4-2 Additional Storage Features Glove Box Center Console Storage Cargo Cover ...... 4-3 Lift the glove box handle up to open Cargo Tie Downs ...... 4-3 it. Use the key to lock and unlock Cargo Management the glove box. System ...... 4-3 Convenience Net ...... 4-3 Cupholders Roof Rack System There are two cupholders, with Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 removable liners, located in front of the center console. There may be cupholders located in the second row seat armrest. To access, pull the armrest down. There are additional cupholders located on each side of the third row seat Pull up on the lever, located on the and in each door. There may be front of the center console armrest, to slide it forward and backward. 4-2 Storage

To open the armrest storage area, press the button located on the front { WARNING of the armrest. There is additional storage under the armrest. Move Never open more than one of the the armrest all the way to the rear three latches at a time to help position, slide the cover back and avoid personal injury and damage remove the tray. to the console. Floor Console Storage Notice: Slide the front console as far forward as it will go before folding the second row console forward to help prevent damage to the consoles. To access the upper storage area, press the upper button (B) and lift up. To access the lower storage area, press the lower button (C) and lift up. The top of the console can be folded forward for increased storage area. Lift up on handle on the rear of the console (A) and pull forward.

For vehicles with a second row center console, open each area to access the storage compartment inside. Storage 4-3

Cargo Management Additional Storage { WARNING Features System This vehicle has a cargo An improperly latched and closed Cargo Cover management system located cargo cover, or cargo cover left in the rear of the vehicle. in the open position, could be For vehicles with a cargo cover, it thrown about the vehicle during a can be used to cover items in the collision or sudden maneuver. rear of the vehicle. To install the Someone could be injured. cover, place the loops on each Be sure to return the cover to corner of the cover on the four the closed position and latch hooks in the rear of the vehicle. before driving. If the cover is The cover should be stored removed, always store it outside securely when not in use. of the vehicle. When it is replaced, always be sure that Cargo Tie Downs it is securely reattached. Four cargo tie-downs are located in the rear compartment of the vehicle. 3. Remove the cover from the The tie-downs can be used to vehicle and store outside of the secure small loads. To remove the cargo management vehicle. cover: Convenience Net 1. Open the cover. It remains open when lifted. For vehicles with a convenience net in the rear, use it to store small 2. Pull the cover up making sure to loads as far forward as possible. unhook the hinges at the rear of The net should not be used to store the cover. heavy loads. 4-4 Storage

Roof Rack System Notice: Loading cargo on the roof rack that weighs more than 91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the { WARNING rear or sides of the vehicle may damage the vehicle. Load cargo If something is carried on top of so that it rests evenly between the vehicle that is longer or wider the crossrails, making sure to than the roof rack— like paneling, fasten cargo securely. plywood, or a mattress— the wind can catch it while the vehicle is To prevent damage or loss of cargo being driven. The item being when driving, check to make sure crossrails and cargo are securely carried could be violently torn off, fastened. Loading cargo on the roof and this could cause a collision, rack will make the vehicle’s center and damage the vehicle. Never of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, carry something longer or wider sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden than the roof rack on top of the braking or abrupt maneuvers, vehicle unless using a GM otherwise it may result in loss of Certified accessory carrier. control. If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, For vehicles with a roof rack, the occasionally stop the vehicle to rack can be used to load items. make sure the cargo remains in its For roof racks that do not have place. Do not exceed the maximum crossrails included, GM Certified vehicle capacity when loading the crossrails can be purchased as an vehicle. accessory. See your dealer/retailer for additional information. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10. Instruments and Controls 5-1

Safety Belt Reminders ...... 5-13 Vehicle Messages Instruments and Airbag Readiness Light ...... 5-14 Vehicle Messages ...... 5-31 Controls Passenger Airbag Status Battery Voltage and Charging Indicator ...... 5-15 Messages ...... 5-31 Charging System Light ...... 5-16 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-32 Controls Malfunction Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-32 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Indicator Lamp ...... 5-16 Door Ajar Messages ...... 5-32 Steering Wheel Controls ...... 5-3 Brake System Warning Engine Cooling System Horn ...... 5-5 Light ...... 5-18 Messages ...... 5-33 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Engine Oil Messages ...... 5-34 Rear Window Wiper/ Warning Light ...... 5-19 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-34 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 5-20 Fuel System Messages ...... 5-34 Washer ...... 5-6 ® Compass ...... 5-6 StabiliTrak Indicator Light . . . 5-20 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-35 Clock ...... 5-9 Engine Coolant Temperature Lamp Messages ...... 5-35 Power Outlets ...... 5-9 Warning Light ...... 5-20 Object Detection System Tire Pressure Light ...... 5-21 Messages ...... 5-35 Warning Lights, Gages, and Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-21 Ride Control System Indicators Security Light ...... 5-22 Messages ...... 5-36 Warning Lights, Gages, and High-Beam on Light ...... 5-22 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-36 Indicators ...... 5-10 Cruise Control Light ...... 5-22 Anti-Theft Alarm System Messages ...... 5-36 Instrument Cluster ...... 5-11 Information Displays Speedometer ...... 5-12 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-37 Odometer ...... 5-12 Driver Information Center Tire Messages ...... 5-37 Tachometer ...... 5-12 (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 5-22 Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-38 Fuel Gage ...... 5-12 Driver Information Center Vehicle Reminder Engine Coolant (DIC) (Without DIC Messages ...... 5-39 Temperature Gage ...... 5-12 Buttons) ...... 5-28 Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-39 Voltmeter Gage ...... 5-13 Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-39 5-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle Personalization Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel Vehicle Personalization while driving. (With DIC Buttons) ...... 5-40 Steering Wheel Power Tilt Wheel Universal Remote System Adjustment Universal Remote System . . . 5-47 Universal Remote System The steering wheel can be adjusted. Programming ...... 5-47 The adjustment lever is on the Universal Remote System outboard side of the steering Operation ...... 5-51 column.

For vehicles with the power tilt and telescope wheel, the control is on the outboard side of the steering column. Push the control up or down to tilt the steering wheel up or down. Pull the lever down to move the steering wheel up or down and in or out. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. Instruments and Controls 5-3

Push the control forward or w / x (Next / Previous): Press to 2. Press and release w or x to rearward to move the steering wheel select preset or favorite radio scroll up or down the list, then toward the front or rear of the stations, select tracks on a CD/ press and hold , or press vehicle. To set the memory position, w ¨ DVD, or to select tracks and to play the highlighted track. see Vehicle Personalization (With navigate folders on an iPod® or DIC Buttons) on page 5‑40. USB device. To select tracks on an iPod or USB device for vehicles with a navigation To select preset or favorite radio system: Steering Wheel Controls stations: 1. Press and hold or while . w x Press and release w or x to go listening to a song listed in the to the next or previous radio main audio page, to quickly station stored as a preset or move forward or in reverse favorite. through the tracks. See the To select tracks on a CD/DVD: separate Navigation System manual for more information. Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous track. Track information is displayed on the screen. Release or To select tracks on an iPod or USB w x when the desired track is device for vehicles without a reached. navigation system: 2. Press and release to begin Vehicles with audio steering wheel 1. Press and hold w or x while x playing the track shown in the controls could differ depending on listening to a song until the display. the vehicle's options. Some audio contents of the current folder controls can be adjusted at the display on the radio display. steering wheel. 5-4 Instruments and Controls

To navigate folders on an iPod or To navigate folders on an iPod or interact with those systems. See USB device for vehicles without a USB device for vehicles with a Bluetooth on page 7‑48 and the navigation system: navigation system: OnStar Owner's Guide for more information. 1. Press and hold w or x while 1. Go to the Music Navigator by listening to a song until the first touching the center touch c (End): Press to reject an contents of the current folder screen folder button in the main incoming call, or end a current call. display on the radio display. audio page. SRCE (Source/Voice 2. While in Music Navigator, select Recognition): Press to switch 2. Press and hold to go back to x the folder/artist/genre/category, between the radio, CD, and for the previous folder list. etc. using the touch screen. vehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. 3. Press and release w or x to 3. Press and release x to scroll scroll up or down the list. through the selected music list. For vehicles with the navigation . To select a folder, press Touch the track label on the system, press and hold this button for longer than one second to and hold , or press touch screen to highlight and w ¨ initiate voice recognition. See “Voice when the folder is begin playing the track from that list. Recognition” in the Navigation highlighted. System manual for more . To go back further in the 4. Press and hold x to quickly information. folder list, press and scroll through the selected ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next hold x . music list radio station while in AM, b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press FM, or XM™. to silence the vehicle speakers only. For vehicles with or without a Press again to turn the sound on. navigation system: For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar® systems, press and hold Press ¨ to go to the next track or for longer than two seconds to chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Instruments and Controls 5-5

Press ¨ to select a track or a Windshield Wiper/Washer 6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Turn the band up for more frequent folder when navigating folders on an The windshield wiper/washer lever wipes or down for less frequent iPod or USB device. is located on the left side of the wipes. For vehicles with a navigation steering column. 1 : Slow wipes. system: Turn the band with the wiper symbol 1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep to control the windshield wipers. 2 : Fast wipes. is heard, to place the radio into Clear ice and snow from the wiper SCAN mode, a station will play blades before using them. If frozen for five seconds before moving to the windshield, carefully loosen or to the next station. thaw them. Damaged wiper blades 2. To stop the SCAN function, should be replaced. See Wiper Blade Replacement on page 10‑26. press ¨ again. Heavy snow or ice can overload the 3. In CD/DVD, iPod, or AUX USB, wipers. A circuit breaker stops them press and hold to quickly move until the motor cools. forward through the tracks. Release to stop on the desired track. + e − e (Volume): Press to 8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn the increase or to decrease the volume. band to 8 and then release. Several wipes, hold the band on 8 Horn longer. Press near or on the horn symbols 9 (Off): Turns the wipers off. on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn. 5-6 Instruments and Controls

Windshield Washer Rear Window Wiper/ Compass J (Washer Fluid): Press the Washer Your vehicle may have a compass button at the end of the turn signal/ The rear wiper and rear wash button in the Driver Information Center lane change lever, to spray washer (DIC). See Driver Information fluid on the windshield. The wipers is located on the instrument panel below the climate control system. Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on clear the windshield and either stop page 5‑22 or Driver Information or return to the preset speed. The Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) ignition key must be in ACC/ rear wiper on and off. The wiper on page 5‑28 for more information ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for this to speed cannot be changed. about the DIC. work. See Washer Fluid on Y (Wash): Press to spray washer page 10 21 Windshield Washer Compass Zone ‑ fluid on the rear window. The Fluid . window wiper will also come on. The zone is set to zone eight upon Release the button when enough leaving the factory. Your dealer/ { WARNING fluid has been sprayed on the retailer will set the correct zone for window. The rear wiper will run a your location. In freezing weather, do not use few more cycles after it is released. your washer until the windshield Under certain circumstances, such If the rear wiper function was as during a long distance is warmed. Otherwise the washer already on, prior to pressing the cross-country trip or moving to a fluid can form ice on the wash button, it stays on until the new state or province, it will be windshield, blocking your vision. wiper button is pressed again. necessary to compensate for compass variance by resetting the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID The rear window washer uses the zone through the DIC if the zone is is displayed on the Driver same fluid that is in the windshield not set correctly. Information Center (DIC) when the washer reservoir. See Washer Fluid washer fluid is low. See Washer on page 10‑21. Fluid Messages on page 5‑39. Instruments and Controls 5-7

Compass variance is the difference 5. If calibration is necessary, between the earth's magnetic north calibrate the compass. See and true geographic north. If the “Compass Calibration compass is not set to the zone Procedure” following. where you live, the compass may give false readings. The compass Compass Calibration must be set to the variance zone in The compass can be manually which the vehicle is traveling. calibrated. Only calibrate the To adjust for compass variance, use compass in a magnetically clean the following procedure: and safe location, such as an open parking lot, where driving the Compass Variance (Zone) vehicle in circles is not a danger. Procedure 2. Find the vehicle's current It is suggested to calibrate away 1. Do not set the compass zone location and variance zone from tall buildings, utility wires, when the vehicle is moving. Only number on the map. manhole covers, or other industrial structures, if possible. set it when the vehicle is in Zones 1 through 15 are P (Park). available. If CAL should ever appear in the Press the vehicle information DIC display, the compass should be 3. Press the set/reset button to calibrated. button until PRESS V TO scroll through and select the CHANGE COMPASS ZONE appropriate variance zone. displays. 4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading, for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC. 5-8 Instruments and Controls

If the DIC display does not show a To calibrate the compass, use the 3. Press the set/reset button to heading, for example, N for North, following procedure: start the compass calibration. or the heading does not change Compass Calibration Procedure 4. The DIC will display after making turns, there may be a CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN strong magnetic field interfering with 1. Before calibrating the compass, CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in the compass. Such interference make sure the compass zone is tight circles at less than 5 mph may be caused by a magnetic CB or set to the variance zone in which (8 km/h) to complete the cell phone antenna mount, a the vehicle is located. See calibration. The DIC will display magnetic emergency light, magnetic “Compass Variance (Zone) CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a note pad holder, or any other Procedure” earlier in this few seconds when the magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, section. calibration is complete. The DIC move the magnetic item, then turn Do not operate any switches display will then return to the on the vehicle and calibrate the such as window, sunroof, previous menu. compass. climate controls, seats, etc. during the calibration procedure. 2. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPASS displays. Instruments and Controls 5-9

Clock 5. To decrease the time or date, do Power Outlets one of the following: To adjust the time and date: Accessory power outlets can be . Press SEEK. 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ © used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone. ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then . Press s REV. press O , to turn the radio on. The vehicle may have four . Turn f counter-clockwise. accessory power outlets. They are 2. Press G to display HR, MIN, To change the time default setting located on the instrument panel below the climate controls, under MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, from 12 hour to 24 hour or to the front center console cupholders, month, day, and year). change the date default setting from at the rear of the center console, 3. Press the pushbutton located month/day/year to day/month/year: and in the rear cargo area. under any one of the labels to be G changed. 1. Press and then the pushbutton located under the 4. To increase the time or date, do forward arrow that displays on one of the following: the radio screen until the time . Press the pushbutton below 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the selected label. the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day and . Press ¨ SEEK. month) displays. . Press \ FWD. 2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired option. . Turn f clockwise. 3. Press G again to apply the selected default, or let the screen time out. 5-10 Instruments and Controls

To use the outlets, remove the Notice: Adding any electrical Warning Lights, cover. When not in use, always equipment to the vehicle can cover the outlet with the damage it or keep other Gages, and Indicators protective cap. components from working as Warning lights come on when there they should. The repairs would Notice: Leaving electrical could be a problem with a vehicle not be covered by the vehicle equipment on for extended function. Some warning lights come warranty. Do not use equipment periods will drain the battery. on briefly when the engine is started exceeding maximum amperage Always turn off electrical to indicate they are working. equipment when not in use and rating of 20 amperes. Check with Gages can indicate when there do not plug in equipment that your dealer/retailer before adding could be a problem with a vehicle exceeds the maximum amperage electrical equipment. function. Often gages and warning rating of 20 amperes. When adding electrical equipment, lights work together to indicate a be sure to follow the installation Certain electrical accessories may problem with the vehicle. not be compatible with the instructions included with the When one of the warning lights accessory power outlets and could equipment. comes on and stays on while result in blown vehicle or adapter Notice: Improper use of the driving, or when one of the gages fuses. If you experience a problem, power outlet can cause damage shows there may be a problem, see your dealer/retailer for not covered by the vehicle check the section that explains what additional information on the warranty. Do not hang any type of to do. Follow this manual's advice. accessory power outlet. accessory or accessory bracket Waiting to do repairs can be costly from the plug because the power and even dangerous. outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only. Instruments and Controls 5-11

Instrument Cluster

United States Uplevel version shown, Canada similar 5-12 Instruments and Controls

Speedometer Fuel Gage full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank's The speedometer shows the capacity to fill the tank. vehicle's speed in both kilometers per hour (km/h) and miles per . The gage moves a little while hour (mph). turning a corner or speeding up. . The gage does not go back to empty when the ignition is Odometer United States Canada turned off. The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either When the ignition is on, the fuel kilometers or miles. gage indicates about how much fuel Engine Coolant the vehicle has left in the fuel tank. This vehicle has a tamper-resistant Temperature Gage odometer. If the vehicle needs a An arrow on the fuel gage indicates new odometer installed, the new the side of the vehicle the fuel door one is set to the mileage of the old is on. odometer. If this is not possible, it is Here are four things that some set at zero and a label is put on the owners ask about. None of these driver's door to show the old show a problem with the fuel gage: mileage reading. United States Canada . At the gas station, the gas pump Tachometer shuts off before the gage This gage shows the engine coolant reads full. temperature. If the gage pointer The tachometer displays the engine moves into the red area, it means . It takes a little more or less fuel speed in revolutions per that the engine coolant has to fill up than the gage indicated. minute (rpm). overheated. If the vehicle has been For example, the gage might operated under normal driving have indicated the tank was half Instruments and Controls 5-13 conditions, pull off the road, stop the voltmeter gage can also read lower Safety Belt Reminders vehicle, and turn off the engine as when in fuel economy mode. This is soon as possible. normal. Driver Safety Belt Reminder See Engine Overheating on Readings in the low warning zone Light page 10‑18 for more information. can occur when a large number of The driver safety belt reminder light electrical accessories are operating on the instrument panel cluster. Voltmeter Gage in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the When the engine is started this light When the engine is not running, but charging system to create maximum and the chime come on and stay on the ignition is on, this gage displays power. for several seconds to remind the the battery voltage in DC volts. The vehicle can only be driven for a driver to fasten the safety belt. The light also begins to flash. When the engine is running, the short time with the reading in either gage shows the condition of the warning zone. If the vehicle must be This cycle repeats if the driver charging system. The gage can driven, turn off all unnecessary remains unbuckled and the vehicle transition from a higher to lower or a accessories. is moving. lower to higher reading. This is Readings in either warning zone If the driver safety belt is already normal. Readings between the low indicate a possible problem in the buckled, neither the light nor chime and high warning zones indicate the electrical system. Have the vehicle comes on. normal operating range. The serviced as soon as possible. 5-14 Instruments and Controls

Passenger Safety Belt as a briefcase, handbag, grocery If the airbag readiness light stays on Reminder Light bag, laptop or other electronic after the vehicle has been started or device. To turn off the warning light comes on when while driving, the and or chime, remove the object airbag system may not work from the seat or buckle the properly. Have the vehicle serviced safety belt. right away.

Airbag Readiness Light { WARNING This light shows if there is an If the airbag readiness light stays When the engine is started this light electrical problem. The system on after the vehicle is started or and the chime come on and stay on check includes the airbag sensor, comes on while driving, it means for several seconds to remind the the pretensioners, the airbag passenger to fasten their safety belt. modules, the wiring and the crash the airbag system might not be The light also begins to flash. sensing and diagnostic module. For working properly. The airbags in This only occurs if the passenger more information on the airbag the vehicle might not inflate in a airbag is enabled. See Passenger system, see Airbag System on crash, or they could even inflate Sensing System on page 3‑40 for page 3‑32. without a crash. To help avoid more information. injury, have the vehicle serviced right away. This cycle repeats if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is moving. If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on. This light will come on and stay on The front passenger safety belt for several seconds when the warning light and chime may turn on vehicle is started. Then the light if an object is put on the seat such should go out. Instruments and Controls 5-15

Passenger Airbag Status as a system check. If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from { WARNING Indicator a distance, if equipped, you may not The vehicle has a passenger see the system check. Then, after If the airbag readiness light ever sensing system. See Passenger several more seconds, the status comes on and stays on, it means Sensing System on page 3‑40 for indicator will light either ON or OFF, that something may be wrong important safety information. The or either the on or off symbol to let with the airbag system. To help instrument panel has a passenger you know the status of the right front avoid injury to yourself or others, airbag status indicator. passenger frontal airbag. have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness If the word ON or the on symbol is Light on page 5 14 for more lit on the passenger airbag status ‑ indicator, it means that the right information, including important front passenger frontal airbag is safety information. enabled (may inflate). If the word OFF or the off symbol is United States lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag. If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there Canada are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the When the vehicle is started, the passenger sensing system. See passenger airbag status indicator your dealer/retailer for service. will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds 5-16 Instruments and Controls

Charging System Light If a short distance must be driven If the check engine light comes on with the light on, be sure to turn off and stays on, while the engine is all accessories, such as the radio running, this indicates that there is and air conditioner. an OBD II problem and service is required. Malfunction Malfunctions often are indicated by Indicator Lamp the system before any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light A computer system called OBD II The charging system light comes on can prevent more serious damage (On-Board Diagnostics-Second briefly when the ignition is turned to the vehicle. This system assists Generation) monitors operation of on, but the engine is not running, as the service technician in correctly the fuel, ignition, and emission a check to show the light is working. diagnosing any malfunction. It should go out when the engine is control systems. It ensures that Notice: If the vehicle is started. emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to continually driven with this light If the light stays on, or comes on produce a cleaner environment. on, after a while, the emission while driving, there may be a controls might not work as well, problem with the electrical charging the vehicle's fuel economy might system. Have it checked by your not be as good, and the engine dealer/retailer. Driving while this might not run as smoothly. This light is on could drain the battery. could lead to costly repairs that When this light comes on, the Driver might not be covered by the Information Center (DIC) also vehicle warranty. displays the SERVICE BATTERY This light comes on when the CHARGING SYSTEM message. ignition is on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show it is See Vehicle Messages on working. If it does not, have the page 5‑31 for more information. vehicle serviced by your dealer/ retailer. Instruments and Controls 5-17

Notice: Modifications made to the The following can prevent more An emission system malfunction engine, transmission, exhaust, serious damage to the vehicle: might be corrected. intake, or fuel system of the . Reduce vehicle speed. . Make sure the fuel cap is fully vehicle or the replacement of the installed. See Filling the Tank on original tires with other than . Avoid hard accelerations. page 9‑41. The diagnostic those of the same Tire . Avoid steep uphill grades. system can determine if the fuel Performance Criteria (TPC) can . If towing a trailer, reduce the cap has been left off or affect the vehicle's emission improperly installed. A loose or controls and can cause this light amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. missing fuel cap allows fuel to to come on. Modifications to evaporate into the atmosphere. these systems could lead to If the light continues to flash, when A few driving trips with the cap costly repairs not covered by the it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. properly installed should turn the vehicle warranty. This could also Find a safe place to park the light off. result in a failure to pass a vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at required Emission Inspection/ least 10 seconds, and restart the . If the vehicle has been driven Maintenance test. See engine. If the light is still flashing, through a deep puddle of water, Accessories and Modifications on follow the previous steps and see the vehicle's electrical system page 10‑3. your dealer/retailer for service as might be wet. The condition is soon as possible. usually corrected when the This light comes on during a electrical system dries out. A few malfunction in one of two ways: Light On Steady: An emission driving trips should turn the Light Flashing: A misfire condition control system malfunction has light off. has been detected. A misfire been detected on the vehicle. increases vehicle emissions and Diagnosis and service might be could damage the emission control required. system on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. 5-18 Instruments and Controls

. Make sure to fuel the vehicle Emissions Inspection and down. The diagnostic system is with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality Maintenance Programs designed to evaluate critical causes the engine not to run as emission control systems during efficiently as designed and may Some state/provincial and local normal driving. This can take cause: stalling after start-up, governments have or might begin several days of routine driving. stalling when the vehicle is programs to inspect the emission If this has been done and the changed into gear, misfiring, control equipment on the vehicle. vehicle still does not pass the hesitation on acceleration, Failure to pass this inspection could inspection for lack of OBD II or stumbling on acceleration. prevent getting a vehicle system readiness, your dealer/ These conditions might go away registration. retailer can prepare the vehicle once the engine is warmed up. Here are some things to know to for inspection. If one or more of these help the vehicle pass an inspection: conditions occurs, change the . The vehicle will not pass this Brake System Warning fuel brand used. It will require at inspection if the check engine Light least one full tank of the proper light is on with the engine This vehicle's hydraulic brake fuel to turn the light off. running, or if the key is in ON/ system is divided into two parts. RUN and the light is not on. See Gasoline Specifications on If one part is not working, the other page 9‑39. . The vehicle will not pass this part can still work and stop the If none of the above have made the inspection if the OBD II vehicle. For good braking both parts light turn off, your dealer/retailer can (on-board diagnostic) system need to be working. determines that critical emission check the vehicle. The dealer/ If the warning light comes on, there control systems have not been retailer has the proper test is a brake problem. Have the brake completely diagnosed by the equipment and diagnostic tools to system inspected right away. fix any mechanical or electrical system. The vehicle would be problems that might have considered not ready for developed. inspection. This can happen if the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run Instruments and Controls 5-19

If the light comes on while driving, Antilock Brake System pull off the road and stop carefully. Make sure the parking brake is fully (ABS) Warning Light released. The pedal may be harder to push or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to United States Canada stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See This light should come on briefly Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑82. when the ignition key is turned to United States Canada ON/RUN. If it does not come on { WARNING then, have it fixed so it will be ready The ABS warning light comes on to warn if there is a problem. briefly when the ignition key is The brake system might not be turned to ON/RUN. This is normal. This light may also come on due to working properly if the brake If the light does not come on then, low brake fluid. See Brakes on system warning light is on. have it fixed so it will be ready to page 10‑22 for more information. Driving with the brake system warn you if there is a problem. warning light on can lead to a When the ignition is on, the brake crash. If the light is still on after If the light stays on, turn the ignition system warning light will also come to LOCK/OFF. If the light comes on the vehicle has been pulled off on when the parking brake is set. while driving, stop as soon as the road and carefully stopped, The light will stay on if the parking possible and turn the ignition off. brake does not release fully. If it have the vehicle towed for stays on after the parking brake is service. fully released, it means there is a brake problem. 5-20 Instruments and Controls

Then start the engine again to reset StabiliTrak® Indicator Engine Coolant the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while driving, the Light Temperature Warning vehicle needs service. If the regular Light brake system warning light is not on, there are still brakes, but no antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, there are no antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning This light comes on briefly while Light on page 5‑18. starting the engine. If it does not, The engine coolant temperature have the vehicle serviced by your warning light comes on briefly when Tow/Haul Mode Light dealer/retailer. If the system is the engine is started. working normally the indicator light goes off. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If it stays on, or comes on while If the system is working normally the driving, there could be a problem indicator light then goes off. with the StabiliTrak system and the vehicle might need service. When If the light comes on and stays on this warning light is on, the system while driving, the vehicle may have This light comes on when the Tow/ is off and will not limit wheel spin. a problem with the cooling system. Haul mode has been activated. Stop the vehicle and turn off the This light flashes when the engine to avoid damage to the For more information, see Tow/Haul StabiliTrak system is active. engine. A warning chime sounds Mode on page 9‑24. See StabiliTrak System on when this light is on. page 9‑27 for more information. See Engine Overheating on page 10‑18 for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-21

Tire Pressure Light loading information label. See Tire Notice: Lack of proper engine oil Pressure on page 10‑42 for more maintenance can damage the information. engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. When the Light Flashes First and Always follow the maintenance Then is On Steady schedule in this manual for This indicates that there may be a changing engine oil. problem with the Tire Pressure For vehicles with a tire pressure Monitor System. The light flashes monitoring system, this light comes for about a minute and stays on on briefly when the engine is steady for the remainder of the started. It provides information ignition cycle. This sequence about tire pressures and the Tire repeats with every ignition cycle. Pressure Monitoring System. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 10‑44 for more The oil pressure light should come When the Light is On Steady information. on briefly as the engine is started. This indicates that one or more of If it does not come on have the the tires are significantly Engine Oil Pressure Light vehicle serviced by your dealer/ underinflated. retailer. A tire pressure message in the { WARNING If the light comes on and stays on, it Driver Information Center (DIC), can means that oil is not flowing through Do not keep driving if the oil accompany the light. See Tire the engine properly. The vehicle pressure is low. The engine can Messages on page 5‑37 for more could be low on oil and might have information. Stop as soon as become so hot that it catches fire. some other system problem. possible, and inflate the tires to the Someone could be burned. Check pressure value shown on the tire the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced. 5-22 Instruments and Controls

Security Light Cruise Control Light Information Displays Driver Information Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below explains the operation of this system. This light flashes when the security This light comes on whenever the The DIC displays information about system is activated. cruise control is set. your vehicle. It also displays For more information, see Anti-Theft The light goes out when the cruise warning messages if a system Alarm System on page 2‑13. control is turned off. See Cruise problem is detected. Control on page 9 30 for more ‑ All messages will appear in the DIC information. High-Beam on Light display located at the top of the instrument panel cluster. The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off. The high-beam on light comes on The DIC also displays a shift lever when the high-beam headlamps are position indicator on the bottom line in use. of the display. See Automatic See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Transmission on page 9‑22 for more information. Changer on page 6‑2 for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-23

The outside air temperature and DIC Buttons T (Vehicle Information): Press compass, if equipped, also display this button to display the oil life, on the DIC when viewing the trip park assist on vehicles with this and fuel information. The outside air feature, units, tire pressure readings temperature automatically appears on vehicles with this feature, in the top right corner of the DIC Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) display. If there is a problem with transmitter programming, and the system that controls the compass calibration and zone temperature display, the numbers The buttons are the set/reset, setting on vehicles with this feature. will be replaced with dashes. If this customization, vehicle information, 3 occurs, have the vehicle serviced. and trip/fuel buttons. The button (Trip/Fuel): Press this button The compass will be shown in the functions are detailed in the to display the odometer, trip bottom right corner of the DIC following pages. odometers, fuel range, average display. See Compass on economy, timer, fuel used, and V (Set/Reset): Press this button to page 5 6 for more information. average speed. ‑ set or reset certain functions and to The DIC has different displays turn off or acknowledge messages Vehicle Information Menu which can be accessed by pressing on the DIC. Items the DIC buttons located on the U (Customization): Press this T (Vehicle Information): Press instrument panel. button to customize the feature this button to scroll through the The DIC also allows some features settings on your vehicle. See following menu items: to be customized. See Vehicle Vehicle Personalization (With DIC OIL LIFE Personalization (With DIC Buttons) Buttons) on page 5‑40 for more on page 5‑40 for more information. information. Press the vehicle information button If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you until OIL LIFE REMAINING can also use the trip odometer reset displays. This display shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful stem to view the odometer and trip life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE odometers. REMAINING on the display, that 5-24 Instruments and Controls means 99% of the current oil life To reset the engine oil life system, UNITS remains. The engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on Press the vehicle information button will alert you to change the oil on a page 10‑10. until UNITS displays. This display schedule consistent with your PARK ASSIST allows you to select between driving conditions. English or Metric units of When the remaining oil life is low, If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic measurement. Once in this display, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, press the set/reset button to select message will appear on the display. press the vehicle information button between ENGLISH or METRIC until PARK ASSIST displays. This See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” units. All of the vehicle information under Engine Oil Messages on display allows the system to be will then be displayed in the unit of turned on or off. Once in this page 5‑34. You should change the measurement selected. oil as soon as you can. See Engine display, press the set/reset button to select between ON or OFF. If you FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the choose ON, the system will be On vehicles with the Tire Pressure oil life, additional maintenance is turned on. If you choose OFF, the Monitor System (TPMS), the recommended in the Maintenance system will be turned off. The URPA pressure for each tire can be viewed Schedule in this manual. See system automatically turns back on in the DIC. The tire pressure will be Scheduled Maintenance on after each vehicle start. When the shown in either pounds per square URPA system is turned off and the page 11‑2 for more information. inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the Press the vehicle information button Remember, you must reset the OIL DIC will display the PARK ASSIST LIFE display yourself after each oil until the DIC displays FRONT OFF message as a reminder that TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## change. It will not reset itself. Also, the system has been turned off. See be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle Object Detection System Messages information button again until the display accidentally at any time on page 5‑35 and Ultrasonic other than when the oil has just DIC displays REAR TIRES Parking Assist on page 9‑32 for PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. been changed. It cannot be reset more information. accurately until the next oil change. Instruments and Controls 5-25

If a low tire pressure condition is 2. Press the set/reset button until COMPASS ZONE SETTING detected by the system while REMOTE KEY LEARNING This display will be available if the driving, a message advising you ACTIVE is displayed. vehicle has a compass. See add air to a specific tire will appear 3. Press and hold the lock and Compass on page 5‑6 for more in the display. See Tire Pressure on unlock buttons on the first information. page 10‑42 and Tire Messages on transmitter at the same time for page 5‑37 for more information. about 15 seconds. COMPASS RECALIBRATION If the tire pressure display shows On vehicles with memory recall This display will be available if the dashes instead of a value, there seats, the first transmitter vehicle has a compass. See may be a problem with your vehicle. learned will match driver 1 and Compass on page 5‑6 for more If this consistently occurs, see your the second will match driver 2. information. dealer/retailer for service. A chime will sound indicating Blank Display RELEARN REMOTE KEY that the transmitter is matched. This display shows no information. This display allows you to match 4. To match additional transmitters Trip/Fuel Menu Items Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) at this time, repeat Step 3. transmitters to your vehicle. This 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button procedure will erase all previously Each vehicle can have a to scroll through the following menu learned transmitters. Therefore, they maximum of eight transmitters items: must be relearned as additional matched to it. ODOMETER transmitters. 5. To exit the programming mode, To match an RKE transmitter to your you must cycle the key to Press the trip/fuel button until vehicle: LOCK/OFF. ODOMETER displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle has 1. Press the vehicle information been driven in either miles (mi) or button until PRESS V TO kilometers (km). Pressing the trip RELEARN REMOTE KEY odometer reset stem will also displays. display the odometer. 5-26 Instruments and Controls

To switch between English and To use the retroactive reset feature, RANGE metric measurements, see “UNITS” press and hold the set/reset button Press the trip/fuel button until earlier in this section. for at least four seconds. The trip RANGE displays. This display odometer will display the number of TRIPA and TRIP B shows the approximate number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven remaining miles (mi) or Press the trip/fuel button until since the ignition was last turned on kilometers (km) the vehicle can be TRIPA or TRIP B displays. This and the vehicle was moving. Once driven without refueling. The display display shows the current distance the vehicle begins moving, the trip will show LOW if the fuel level traveled in either miles (mi) or odometer will accumulate mileage. is low. kilometers (km) since the last reset For example, if the vehicle was for each trip odometer. Both trip driven 5 miles (8 km) before it is The fuel range estimate is based on odometers can be used at the same started again, and then the an average of the vehicle's fuel time. Pressing the trip odometer retroactive reset feature is activated, economy over recent driving history reset stem will also display the trip the display will show 5 miles (8 km). and the amount of fuel remaining in odometers. As the vehicle begins moving, the the fuel tank. This estimate will display will then increase to change if driving conditions change. Each trip odometer can be reset to For example, if driving in traffic and zero separately by pressing the set/ 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. making frequent stops, this display reset button or the trip odometer may read one number, but if the reset stem while the desired trip If the retroactive reset feature is vehicle is driven on a freeway, the odometer is displayed. activated after the vehicle is started, number may change even though The trip odometer has a feature but before it begins moving, the the same amount of fuel is in the called retroactive reset. This can be display will show the number of fuel tank. This is because different used to set the trip odometer to the miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that driving conditions produce different number of miles (kilometers) driven were driven during the last ignition fuel economies. Generally, freeway since the ignition was last turned on. cycle. driving produces better fuel This can be used if the trip economy than city driving. Fuel odometer is not reset at the range cannot be reset. beginning of the trip. Instruments and Controls 5-27

AVG (Average) ECONOMY TIMER FUEL USED Press the trip/fuel button until AVG Press the trip/fuel button until Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL ECONOMY displays. This display TIMER displays. This display can be USED displays. This display shows shows the approximate average used as a timer. the number of gallons (gal) or miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per To start the timer, press the set/ liters (L) of fuel used since the last 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This reset button while TIMER is reset of this menu item. To reset the number is calculated based on the displayed. The display will show the fuel used information, press and number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded amount of time that has passed hold the set/reset button while FUEL since the last time this menu item since the timer was last reset, not USED is displayed. was reset. To reset AVG including time the ignition is off. AVG (Average) SPEED ECONOMY, press and hold the set/ Time will continue to be counted as reset button. long as the ignition is on, even if Press the trip/fuel button until AVG SPEED displays. This display Fuel Economy another display is being shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to shows the average speed of the Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL 99 hours, 59 minutes and vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or ECONOMY displays. The FUEL 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which kilometers per hour (km/h). This ECONOMY display shows an the display will return to zero. average is calculated based on the estimate of the vehicle fuel various vehicle speeds recorded economy under a given driving To stop the timer, press the set/reset since the last reset of this value. To condition at a specific moment. For button briefly while TIMER is reset the value to zero, press and example, if the vehicle is displayed. hold the set/reset button. accelerating and achieving low fuel To reset the timer to zero, press and Blank Display efficiency this display will show hold the set/reset button while fewer bars, but if the vehicle is TIMER is displayed. This display shows no information. cruising on a flat freeway and getting high fuel efficiency, the display will show more bars. Fuel economy cannot be reset. 5-28 Instruments and Controls

Driver Information Center Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) for each trip odometer. Both trip transmitter programming, units, and odometers can be used at the (DIC) (Without DIC display language. same time. Buttons) If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you Each trip odometer can be reset to If your vehicle does not have DIC can use the trip odometer reset zero separately by pressing and buttons, the information below stem to view the following displays: holding the trip odometer reset stem explains the operation of this odometer and trip odometers. while the desired trip odometer is system. displayed. Trip Odometer Reset Stem The DIC has different displays Menu Items The trip odometer has a feature which can be accessed by pressing called the retro-active reset. This the trip odometer reset stem located ODOMETER can be used to set the trip odometer on the instrument panel cluster. Press the trip odometer reset stem to the number of miles (kilometers) Pressing the trip odometer reset until ODOMETER displays. This driven since the ignition was last stem will also turn off, display shows the distance the turned on. This can be used if the or acknowledge, DIC messages. vehicle has been driven in either trip odometer is not reset at the The DIC displays trip and vehicle miles (mi) or kilometers (km). beginning of the trip. system information, and warning To switch between English and To use the retro-active reset feature, messages if a system problem is metric measurements, see “UNITS” press and hold the trip odometer detected. later in this section. reset stem for at least four seconds. If your vehicle does not have DIC The trip odometer will display the TRIPA or TRIP B buttons, you can use the trip number of miles (mi) or odometer reset stem to view the Press the trip odometer reset stem kilometers (km) driven since the following displays: odometer, trip until TRIPA or TRIP B displays. This ignition was last turned on and the odometers, oil life, park assist menu display shows the current distance vehicle was moving. Once the for vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear traveled in either miles (mi) or vehicle begins moving, the trip Parking Assist (URPA) system, kilometers (km) since the last reset odometer will accumulate mileage. For example, if the vehicle was Instruments and Controls 5-29 driven 5 miles (8 km) before it is change the oil on a schedule PARK ASSIST started again, and then the consistent with your driving To access this display, the vehicle retro-active reset feature is conditions. must be in P (Park). If your vehicle activated, the display will show When the remaining oil life is low, has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Assist (URPA) system, press the trip moving, the display will then message will appear on the display. odometer reset stem until PARK increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” ASSIST displays. This display 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. under Engine Oil Messages on allows the system to be turned on or If the retro-active reset feature is page 5‑34. You should change the off. Once in this display, press and activated after the vehicle is started, oil as soon as you can. See Engine hold the trip odometer reset stem to but before it begins moving, the Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the select between ON or OFF. If you display will show the number of engine oil life system monitoring the choose ON, the system will be miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that oil life, additional maintenance is turned on. If you choose OFF, the were driven during the last ignition recommended in the Maintenance system will be turned off. The URPA cycle. Schedule in this manual. See system automatically turns back on Scheduled Maintenance on after each vehicle start. When the OIL LIFE page 11‑2 for more information. URPA system is turned off and the To access this display, the vehicle Remember, you must reset the OIL vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the must be in P (Park). Press the trip LIFE display yourself after each oil DIC will display the PARK ASSIST odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE change. It will not reset itself. Also, OFF message as a reminder that REMAINING displays. This display be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE the system has been turned off. See shows an estimate of the oil's display accidentally at any time Object Detection System Messages remaining useful life. If you see other than when the oil has just on page 5‑35 and Ultrasonic 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the been changed. It cannot be reset Parking Assist on page 9‑32 for display, that means 99% of the accurately until the next oil change. more information. current oil life remains. The engine To reset the engine oil life system, oil life system will alert you to see Engine Oil Life System on page 10‑10. 5-30 Instruments and Controls

RELEARN REMOTE KEY On vehicles with memory recall units. All of the vehicle information To access this display, the vehicle seats, the first transmitter will then be displayed in the unit of must be in P (Park). This display learned will match driver 1 and measurement selected. the second will match driver 2. allows you to match Remote DISPLAY LANGUAGE Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to A chime will sound indicating your vehicle. This procedure will that the transmitter is matched. To access this display, the vehicle erase all previously learned must be in P (Park). This display 4. To match additional transmitters allows you to select the language in transmitters. Therefore, they must at this time, repeat Step 3. be relearned as additional which the DIC messages will transmitters. Each vehicle can have a appear. To select a language: maximum of eight transmitters 1. Press the trip odometer reset To match an RKE transmitter to your matched to it. vehicle: stem until DISPLAY LANGUAGE 5. To exit the programming mode, displays. 1. Press the trip odometer reset you must cycle the key to 2. Continue to press and hold the stem until RELEARN REMOTE LOCK/OFF. KEY displays. trip odometer reset stem to scroll UNITS through all of the available 2. Press and hold the trip odometer languages. reset stem until REMOTE KEY To access this display, the vehicle LEARNING ACTIVE is must be in P (Park). Press the trip The available languages are displayed. odometer reset stem until UNITS ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS displays. This display allows you to (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), 3. Press and hold the lock and and NO CHANGE. unlock buttons on the first select between English or Metric transmitter at the same time for units of measurement. Once in this 3. Once the desired language is about 15 seconds. display, press and hold the trip displayed, release the trip odometer reset stem to select odometer reset stem to set your between ENGLISH or METRIC choice. Instruments and Controls 5-31

Vehicle Messages The following are the possible SERVICE BATTERY messages that can be displayed CHARGING SYSTEM Messages are displayed on the DIC and some information about them. to notify the driver that the status of On some vehicles, this message the vehicle has changed and that Battery Voltage and displays if there is a problem with some action may be needed by the the battery charging system. Under driver to correct the condition. Charging Messages certain conditions, the charging system light may also turn on in the Multiple messages may appear one BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE after another. instrument panel cluster. See This message displays when the Charging System Light on Some messages may not require system detects that the battery page 5‑16. Driving with this immediate action, but you can press voltage is dropping below expected problem could drain the battery. any of the DIC buttons on the levels. The battery saver system Turn off all unnecessary instrument panel or the trip starts reducing certain features of accessories. Have the electrical odometer reset stem on the the vehicle that you may be able to system checked as soon as instrument panel cluster to notice. At the point that the features possible. See your dealer/retailer. acknowledge that you received the are disabled, this message is messages and to clear them from displayed. It means that the vehicle the display. is trying to save the charge in the Some messages cannot be cleared battery. from the DIC display because they Turn off all unnecessary are more urgent. These messages accessories to allow the battery to require action before they can be recharge. cleared. You should take any messages that appear on the The normal battery voltage range is display seriously and remember that 11.5 to 15.5 volts. clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear, not correct the problem. 5-32 Instruments and Controls

Brake System Messages Door Ajar Messages obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM DRIVER DOOR OPEN still appears on the DIC. This message displays along with This message displays and a chime LIFTGATE OPEN the brake system warning light if sounds if the driver door is not fully there is a problem with the brake closed and the vehicle is shifted out This message displays and a chime system. See Brake System Warning of P (Park). Stop and turn off the sounds if the liftgate is open while Light on page 5‑18. If this message vehicle, check the door for the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off appears, stop as soon as possible obstructions, and close the door the vehicle and check the liftgate. and turn off the vehicle. Restart the again. Check to see if the message Restart the vehicle and check for vehicle and check for the message still appears on the DIC. the message on the DIC display. on the DIC display. If the message PASSENGER DOOR OPEN is still displayed or appears again HOOD OPEN when you begin driving, the brake On some models, this message This message displays and a chime system needs service as soon as displays and a chime sounds if the sounds if the passenger door is not possible. See your dealer/retailer. hood is not fully closed. Stop and fully closed and the vehicle is turn off the vehicle, check the hood shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn Cruise Control Messages for obstructions, and close the hood off the vehicle, check the door for again. Check to see if the message obstructions, and close the door CRUISE SET TO XXX still appears on the DIC. again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. This message displays whenever LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN the cruise control is set. See Cruise Control on page 9‑30 for more This message displays and a chime information. sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for Instruments and Controls 5-33

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN If this message continues to appear, ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP have the system repaired by your This message displays and a chime ENGINE dealer/retailer as soon as possible sounds if the passenger side rear to avoid damage to the engine. Notice: If you drive your vehicle door is not fully closed and the while the engine is overheating, vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE severe engine damage may Stop and turn off the vehicle, check ENGINE occur. If an overheat warning the door for obstructions, and close appears on the instrument panel the door again. Check to see if the Notice: If you drive your vehicle cluster and/or DIC, stop the message still appears on the DIC. while the engine is overheating, vehicle as soon as possible. Do severe engine damage may not increase the engine speed Engine Cooling System occur. If an overheat warning above normal idling speed. See appears on the instrument panel Messages Engine Overheating on page 10‑18 cluster and/or DIC, stop the for more information. ENGINE HOT A/C (Air vehicle as soon as possible. Do not increase the engine speed This message displays and a Conditioning) OFF above normal idling speed. See continuous chime sounds if the This message displays when the Engine Overheating on page 10‑18 engine cooling system reaches engine coolant becomes hotter than for more information. unsafe temperatures for operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as the normal operating temperature. This message displays when the See Engine Coolant Temperature soon as it is safe to do so to avoid engine coolant temperature is too severe damage. This message Gage on page 5‑12. To avoid hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to added strain on a hot engine, the air clears when the engine has cooled idle until it cools down. See Engine to a safe operating temperature. conditioning compressor Coolant Temperature Gage on automatically turns off. When the page 5‑12. coolant temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning See Overheated Engine Protection compressor turns back on. You can Operating Mode on page 10‑20 for continue to drive your vehicle. information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. 5-34 Instruments and Controls

Engine Oil Messages pressure is corrected. See Engine This message also displays when Oil on page 10‑8 for more the vehicle's engine power is CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON information. reduced. Reduced engine power This message displays when the This message displays if low oil can affect the vehicle's ability to engine oil needs to be changed. pressure levels occur. Stop the accelerate. If this message is on, When you change the engine oil, be vehicle as soon as safely possible but there is no reduction in sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE and do not operate it until the cause performance, proceed to your OIL SOON message. See Engine of the low oil pressure has been destination. The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle Oil Life System on page 10‑10 for corrected. Check the oil as soon as information on how to reset the possible and have your vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven message. See Engine Oil on serviced by your dealer/retailer. See at a reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration and page 10‑8 and Scheduled Engine Oil on page 10‑8. speed may be reduced. Anytime Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more information. this message stays on, the vehicle Engine Power Messages should be taken to your dealer/ OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED retailer for service as soon as ENGINE possible. This message displays and a chime Notice: If you drive your vehicle sounds when the cooling system Fuel System Messages while the engine oil pressure is temperature gets too hot and the low, severe engine damage may engine further enters the engine FUEL LEVEL LOW occur. If a low oil pressure coolant protection mode. See This message displays and a chime warning appears on the Engine Overheating on page 10‑18 instrument panel cluster and/or for further information. sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage possible. Do not drive the vehicle on page 5‑12 and Fuel on until the cause of the low oil page 9‑38 for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-35

TIGHTEN GAS CAP and Driver Information Center (DIC) AUTOMATIC LIGHT (With DIC Buttons) on page 5 22 or This message may display along ‑ CONTROL ON Driver Information Center (DIC) with the check engine light on the (Without DIC Buttons) on This message displays when the instrument panel cluster if the automatic headlamps are turned on. page 5‑28 for more information. vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened This message clears itself after properly. See Malfunction Indicator REPLACE BATTERY IN 10 seconds. Lamp on page 5‑16. Reinstall the REMOTE KEY fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays if a Remote on page 9‑41. The diagnostic This message displays and a chime Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter system can determine if the fuel cap sounds if a turn signal is left on for battery is low. The battery needs to has been left off or improperly 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn be replaced in the transmitter. See installed. A loose or missing fuel signal/multifunction lever to the off Battery Replacement under cap allows fuel to evaporate into the “ ” position. atmosphere. A few driving trips with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the cap properly installed should System Operation on page 2‑3. Object Detection System turn this light and message off. Lamp Messages Messages Key and Lock Messages AUTOMATIC LIGHT PARK ASSIST OFF REMOTE KEY LEARNING CONTROL OFF If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic ACTIVE This message displays when the Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, automatic headlamps are turned off. after the vehicle has been started This message displays while you and shifted out of P (Park), this are matching a Remote Keyless This message clears itself after 10 seconds. message displays to remind the Entry (RKE) transmitter to your driver that the URPA system has vehicle. See “Matching been turned off or to notify the driver Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” that the system has turned itself off. under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2‑3 5-36 Instruments and Controls

Press the set/reset button or there is a problem. See your dealer/ Airbag System Messages the trip odometer reset stem to retailer for service. The vehicle is acknowledge this message and safe to drive, however, you do not SERVICE AIR BAG clear it from the DIC display. For have the benefit of StabiliTrak, so This message displays if there is a more information see Ultrasonic reduce your speed and drive problem with the airbag system. Parking Assist on page 9‑32. accordingly. Have your dealer/retailer inspect the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SERVICE TRACTION system for problems. See Airbag CONTROL Readiness Light on page 5‑14 and If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Airbag System on page 3‑32 for Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, This message displays when there more information. this message displays if there is a is a problem with the Traction problem with the URPA system. Do Control System (TCS). When this Anti-Theft Alarm System not use this system to help you message is displayed, the system park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your Messages on page 9‑32 for more information. driving accordingly. See your dealer/ SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT See your dealer/retailer for service. retailer for service. See StabiliTrak SYSTEM System on page 9‑27 for more Ride Control System information. This message displays when there Messages is a problem with the theft-deterrent TRACTION CONTROL OFF system. The vehicle may or may not SERVICE STABILITRAK This message displays when the restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer before This message displays if there is a Traction Control System (TCS) is ® turned off. Adjust your driving turning off the engine. See problem with the StabiliTrak Immobilizer Operation on system. If this message appears, try accordingly. See StabiliTrak System page 2‑14 for more information. to reset the system. Stop; turn off on page 9‑27 for more information. the engine for at least 15 seconds; This message clears itself after then start the engine again. If this 10 seconds. message still comes on, it means Instruments and Controls 5-37

THEFT ATTEMPTED SERVICE POWER STEERING Tire Messages This message displays if the content This message displays when a TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE theft-deterrent system has detected problem is detected with the power a break-in attempt while you were steering system. When this On vehicles with the Tire Pressure away from your vehicle. See message is displayed, you may Monitor System (TPMS), this Anti-Theft Alarm System on notice that the effort required to message displays when the page 2‑13 for more information. steer the vehicle increases or feels pressure in one or more of the heavier, but you will still be able to vehicle's tires is low. Service Vehicle Messages steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle This message also displays LEFT serviced by your dealer/retailer FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (right SERVICE A/C (Air immediately. front), LEFT RR (left rear), Conditioning) SYSTEM SERVICE VEHICLE SOON or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate This message displays when the the location of the low tire. This message displays when a electronic sensors that control the The low tire pressure warning light air conditioning and heating non-emissions related malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced will also come on. See Tire systems are no longer working. Pressure Light on page 5‑21. Have the climate control system by your dealer/retailer as soon as serviced by your dealer/retailer if possible. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you you notice a drop in heating and air STARTING DISABLED conditioning efficiency. can. Inflate the tires by adding air SERVICE THROTTLE until the tire pressure is equal to the This message displays when your values shown on the Tire Loading vehicle's throttle system is not Information label. See Tires on functioning properly. Have your page 10‑36, Vehicle Load Limits on vehicle serviced by your dealer/ page 9‑10, and Tire Pressure on retailer. page 10‑42. 5-38 Instruments and Controls

You can receive more than one tire comes on and stays on, there may rear differential fluid is overheating. pressure message at a time. To be a problem with the TPMS. See This message turns off when the read the other messages that may your dealer/retailer. differential fluid cools. have been sent at the same time, TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE The AWD system is disabled until press the set/reset button or the trip the compact spare tire is replaced odometer reset stem. The DIC also This message displays when the by a full-size tire. If the warning shows the tire pressure values. See Tire Pressure Monitor System message is still on after putting on Driver Information Center (DIC) (TPMS) is re-learning the tire the full-size tire, you need to reset (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑22 or positions on your vehicle. The tire the warning message. To reset the Driver Information Center (DIC) positions must be re-learned after warning message, turn the ignition (Without DIC Buttons) on rotating the tires or after replacing a off and then back on again after page 5‑28. tire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on 30 seconds. If the message stays page 10 48, Tire Pressure Monitor SERVICE TIRE MONITOR ‑ on, see your dealer/retailer right System on page 10‑43, and Tire SYSTEM away. See All-Wheel Drive on Pressure on page 10‑42 for more page 9‑25 for more information. On vehicles with the Tire Pressure information. Monitor System (TPMS), this SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE message displays if a part on the Transmission Messages If your vehicle has the All-Wheel TPMS is not working properly. The ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF Drive (AWD) system, this message tire pressure light also flashes and displays if there is a problem with then remains on during the same If your vehicle has the All-Wheel this system. If this message ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Drive (AWD) system, this message appears, stop as soon as possible Light on page 5‑21. Several displays when there is a compact and turn off the vehicle. Restart the conditions may cause this message spare tire on the vehicle, when the vehicle after 30 seconds and check to appear. See Tire Pressure Antilock Brake System (ABS) for the message on the DIC display. Monitor Operation on page 10‑44 for warning light comes on, or when the If the message is still displayed or more information. If the warning Instruments and Controls 5-39 appears again when you begin This message displays and a chime Vehicle Speed Messages driving, the AWD system needs sounds if the transmission fluid in service. See your dealer/retailer. the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the SPEED LIMITED TO transmission fluid temperature high XXX MPH (KM/H) SERVICE TRANSMISSION can cause damage to the vehicle. This message displays when your Stop the vehicle and let it idle to This message displays when there vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph allow the transmission to cool. This is a problem with the transmission. (128 km/h) because the vehicle message clears when the fluid See your dealer/retailer for service. detects a problem in the speed temperature reaches a safe level. TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE variable assist steering system. ENGINE Have your vehicle serviced by your Vehicle Reminder dealer/retailer. Notice: If you drive your vehicle Messages while the transmission fluid is Washer Fluid Messages overheating and the transmission ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE temperature warning is displayed WITH CARE WASHER FLUID LOW ADD on the instrument panel cluster This message displays when the FLUID and/or DIC, you can damage the outside air temperature is cold This message displays when the transmission. This could lead to enough to create icy road costly repairs that would not be windshield washer fluid is low. Fill conditions. Adjust your driving the windshield washer fluid reservoir covered by your warranty. Do accordingly. not drive your vehicle with as soon as possible. See Engine overheated transmission fluid Compartment Overview on or while the transmission page 10‑6 for the location of the temperature warning is displayed. windshield washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Washer Fluid on page 10‑21 for more information. 5-40 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle To change customization Feature Settings Menu Items preferences, use the following The following are customization Personalization procedure. features that allow you to program Vehicle Personalization Entering the Feature settings to the vehicle: Settings Menu (With DIC Buttons) DISPLAY IN ENGLISH 1. Turn the ignition on and place This feature will only display if a Your vehicle may have the vehicle in P (Park). language other than English has customization capabilities that allow been set. This feature allows you to you to program certain features to To avoid excessive drain on the change the language in which the one preferred setting. Customization battery, it is recommended that DIC messages appear to English. features can only be programmed to the headlamps are turned off. one setting on the vehicle and 2. Press the customization button Press the customization button until cannot be programmed to a to enter the feature the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN preferred setting for two different settings menu. ENGLISH screen appears on the drivers. If the menu is not available, DIC display. Press the set/reset All of the customization options may FEATURE SETTINGS button once to display all DIC not be available on your vehicle. AVAILABLE IN PARK will messages in English. Only the options available will be display. Before entering the DISPLAY LANGUAGE displayed on the DIC. menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park). This feature allows you to select the The default settings for the language in which the DIC customization features were set messages will appear. when your vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed from their default state since then. The customization preferences are automatically recalled. Instruments and Controls 5-41

Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK To select a setting, press the set/ the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen This feature allows you to select reset button while the desired appears on the DIC display. Press when the vehicle's doors will setting is displayed on the DIC. the set/reset button once to access automatically lock. See Automatic the settings for this feature. Then AUTO DOOR UNLOCK Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more press the customization button to information. This feature allows you to select scroll through the following settings: whether or not to turn off the Press the customization button until automatic door unlocking feature. ENGLISH (default): All messages AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the will appear in English. It also allows you to select which DIC display. Press the set/reset doors and when the doors will FRANCAIS: All messages will button once to access the settings automatically unlock. See Automatic appear in French. for this feature. Then press the Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more ESPANOL: All messages will customization button to scroll information. through the following settings: appear in Spanish. Press the customization button until NO CHANGE: No change will be SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on made to this feature. The current The doors will automatically lock the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting will remain. when the vehicle is shifted out of button once to access the settings P (Park). for this feature. Then press the To select a setting, press the set/ AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors customization button to scroll reset button while the desired through the following settings: setting is displayed on the DIC. will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph OFF: None of the doors will You can also change the language (13 km/h) for three seconds. automatically unlock. by pressing the trip odometer reset NO CHANGE: No change will be stem. See “Language” under Driver DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the Information Center (Without DIC made to this feature. The current driver's door will unlock when the Buttons) earlier in this section for setting will remain. key is taken out of the ignition. more information. 5-42 Instruments and Controls

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/ driver's door will unlock when the REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on reset button while the desired vehicle is shifted into P (Park) . the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. button once to access the settings ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK will unlock when the key is taken for this feature. Then press the out of the ignition. customization button to scroll This feature allows you to select the through the following settings: type of feedback you will receive ALL IN PARK (default): All of the OFF: There will be no feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the doors will unlock when the vehicle is Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) shifted into P (Park). when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter. transmitter. You will not receive NO CHANGE: No change will be feedback when unlocking the made to this feature. The current LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps vehicle with the RKE transmitter if setting will remain. will flash when you press the lock the doors are open. See Remote button on the RKE transmitter. Keyless Entry (RKE) System To select a setting, press the set/ HORN ONLY: The horn will sound Operation on page 2‑3 for more reset button while the desired information. setting is displayed on the DIC. on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN & LIGHTS (default): The REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears This feature allows you to select the exterior lamps will flash when you on the DIC display. Press the set/ type of feedback you will receive press the lock button on the RKE reset button once to access the when locking the vehicle with the transmitter, and the horn will sound settings for this feature. Then press Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) when the lock button is pressed the customization button to scroll transmitter. You will not receive again within five seconds of the through the following settings: feedback when locking the vehicle previous command. LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps with the RKE transmitter if the doors NO CHANGE: No change will be will not flash when you press the are open. See Remote Keyless made to this feature. The current unlock button on the RKE Entry (RKE) System Operation on setting will remain. transmitter. page 2‑3 for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-43

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lock button on the RKE transmitter is dark enough outside. This lamps will flash when you press the twice. See Delayed Locking on happens after the key is turned from unlock button on the RKE page 2‑7 for more information. ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. transmitter. Press the customization button until Press the customization button until NO CHANGE: No change will be DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC made to this feature. The current the DIC display. Press the set/reset display. Press the set/reset button setting will remain. button once to access the settings once to access the settings for this To select a setting, press the set/ for this feature. Then press the feature. Then press the reset button while the desired customization button to scroll customization button to scroll setting is displayed on the DIC. through the following settings: through the following settings: OFF: There will be no delayed OFF: The exterior lamps will not DELAY DOOR LOCK locking of the vehicle's doors. turn on. This feature allows you to select ON (default): The doors will not 30 SECONDS (default): The whether or not the locking of the lock until five seconds after the last exterior lamps will stay on for vehicle's doors and liftgate will be door or the liftgate is closed. 30 seconds. delayed. When locking the doors and liftgate with the power door lock NO CHANGE: No change will be 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will switch and a door or the liftgate is made to this feature. The current stay on for one minute. open, this feature will delay locking setting will remain. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will the doors and liftgate until To select a setting, press the set/ stay on for two minutes. five seconds after the last door is reset button while the desired NO CHANGE: No change will be closed. You will hear three chimes setting is displayed on the DIC. to signal that the delayed locking made to this feature. The current feature is in use. The key must be EXIT LIGHTING setting will remain. out of the ignition for this feature to This feature allows you to select the To select a setting, press the set/ work. You can temporarily override amount of time you want the reset button while the desired delayed locking by pressing the exterior lamps to remain on when it setting is displayed on the DIC. power door lock switch twice or the 5-44 Instruments and Controls

APPROACH LIGHTING Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) NO CHANGE: No change will be This feature allows you to select System Operation on page 2‑3 for made to this feature. The current whether or not to have the exterior more information. setting will remain. lights turn on briefly during low light NO CHANGE : No change will be There is no default for chime periods after unlocking the vehicle made to this feature. The current volume. The volume will stay at the using the Remote Keyless Entry setting will remain. last known setting. (RKE) transmitter. To select a setting, press the set/ To select a setting, press the set/ Press the customization button until reset button while the desired reset button while the desired APPROACH LIGHTING appears on setting is displayed on the DIC. setting is displayed on the DIC. the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings CHIME VOLUME PARK TILT MIRRORS for this feature. Then press the This feature allows you to select the If your vehicle has this feature, it customization button to scroll volume level of the chime. allows you to select whether through the following settings: Press the customization button until or not the outside mirror(s) will OFF: The exterior lights will not CHIME VOLUME appears on the automatically tilt down when the turn on when you unlock the vehicle DIC display. Press the set/reset vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). with the RKE transmitter. button once to access the settings See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑19 for more information. ON (default): If it is dark enough for this feature. Then press the outside, the exterior lights will turn customization button to scroll on briefly when you unlock the through the following settings: vehicle with the RKE transmitter. NORMAL: The chime volume will The lights will remain on for be set to a normal level. 20 seconds or until the lock button LOUD: The chime volume will be on the RKE transmitter is pressed, set to a loud level. or the vehicle is no longer off. See Instruments and Controls 5-45

Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/ The automatic easy exit seat PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on reset button while the desired movement will only occur one time the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. after the key is removed from the button once to access the settings ignition. If the automatic movement for this feature. Then press the EASY EXIT SEAT has already occurred, and you put customization button to scroll If your vehicle has this feature, it the key back in the ignition and through the following settings: allows you to select your preference remove it again, the seat and OFF (default): Neither outside for the automatic easy exit seat steering column will stay in the mirror will be tilted down when the feature. See Delayed Locking on original exit position, unless a vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). page 2‑7 for more information. memory recall took place prior to removing the key again. DRIVER MIRROR: The driver's Press the customization button until outside mirror will be tilted down EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the NO CHANGE: No change will be when the vehicle is shifted into DIC display. Press the set/reset made to this feature. The current R (Reverse). button once to access the settings setting will remain. for this feature. Then press the PASSENGER MIRROR: The To select a setting, press the set/ customization button to scroll reset button while the desired passenger's outside mirror will be through the following settings: tilted down when the vehicle is setting is displayed on the DIC. shifted into R (Reverse). OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will occur. MEMORY SEAT RECALL BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's and ON: The driver's seat will move If your vehicle has this feature, it passenger's outside mirrors will be allows you to select your preference tilted down when the vehicle is back when the key is removed from the ignition. for the remote memory seat recall shifted into R (Reverse). feature. See Delayed Locking on NO CHANGE: No change will be page 2‑7 for more information. made to this feature. The current setting will remain. 5-46 Instruments and Controls

Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/ NO CHANGE: No change will be MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears reset button while the desired made to this feature. The current on the DIC display. Press the set/ setting is displayed on the DIC. setting will remain. reset button once to access the REMOTE START To select a setting, press the set/ settings for this feature. Then press reset button while the desired the customization button to scroll If your vehicle has this feature, it setting is displayed on the DIC. through the following settings: allows you to turn the remote start OFF (default): No remote memory off or on. The remote start feature FACTORY SETTINGS seat recall will occur. allows you to start the engine from This feature allows you to set all of outside of the vehicle using the ON: The driver's seat and outside the customization features back to Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) their factory default settings. mirrors will automatically move to transmitter. See Remote Vehicle the stored driving position when the Start on page 2‑5 for more Press the customization button until unlock button on the Remote information. FACTORY SETTINGS appears on Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is the DIC display. Press the set/reset Press the customization button until pressed. See “Relearn Remote Key” button once to access the settings under Driver Information Center REMOTE START appears on the for this feature. Then press the (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on DIC display. Press the set/reset customization button to scroll button once to access the settings page 5‑22 or Driver Information through the following settings: Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll RESTORE ALL (default): The on page 5‑28 for more information through the following settings: customization features will be set to on matching transmitters to driver ID their factory default settings. numbers. OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled. DO NOT RESTORE: The NO CHANGE: No change will be customization features will not be made to this feature. The current ON (default): The remote start set to their factory default settings. setting will remain. feature will be enabled. Instruments and Controls 5-47

To select a setting, press the set/ Exiting the Feature Universal Remote reset button while the desired Settings Menu setting is displayed on the DIC. System The feature settings menu will be EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS exited when any of the following See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 17 for information regarding This feature allows you to exit the occurs: ‑ Part 15 of the Federal feature settings menu. . The vehicle is shifted out of Communications Commission (FCC) Press the customization button until P (Park). Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V . The vehicle is no longer in and Science Canada. TO EXIT appears in the DIC display. ON/RUN. Press the set/reset button once to . The trip/fuel or vehicle Universal Remote System exit the menu. information DIC buttons are Programming If you do not exit, pressing the pressed. customization button again will . The end of the feature settings return you to the beginning of the menu is reached and exited. feature settings menu. . A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made.

This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. 5-48 Instruments and Controls

Do not use the Universal Home When programming a garage door, To program up to three devices: Remote with any garage door park outside of the garage. Park opener that does not have the stop directly in line with and facing the and reverse feature. This includes garage door opener motor-head or any garage door opener model gate motor-head. Be sure that manufactured before April 1, 1982. people and objects are clear of the Read the instructions completely garage door or gate that is being before attempting to program the programmed. Universal Home Remote. Because It is recommended that a new of the steps involved, it may be battery be installed in your helpful to have another person hand-held transmitter for quicker available to assist you with and more accurate transmission of programming the Universal Home the radio-frequency signal. Remote. Programming the Universal 1. From inside the vehicle, press Keep the original hand-held Home Remote System and hold down the two outside transmitter for use in other vehicles buttons at the same time, as well as for future Universal Home For questions or help programming releasing only when the Remote programming. It is also the Universal Home Remote Universal Home Remote recommended that upon the sale of System, call 1-800-355-3515 or go indicator light begins to flash, the vehicle, the programmed to www.homelink.com. after 20 seconds. This step will Universal Home Remote buttons Programming a garage door opener erase the factory settings or all should be erased for security involves time-sensitive actions, so previously programmed buttons. purposes. See “Erasing Universal read the entire procedure before Home Remote Buttons” later in this starting. Otherwise, the device will Do not hold down the buttons for section. time out and the procedure will have longer than 30 seconds and do to be repeated. not repeat this step to program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons. Instruments and Controls 5-49

2. Hold the end of your hand-held 4. The indicator light on the to a constant light, continue transmitter about 3 to 8 cm Universal Home Remote will with the programming (1 to 3 inches) away from the flash slowly at first and then Steps 6 through 8. Universal Home Remote buttons rapidly after Universal Home It may be helpful to have while keeping the indicator light Remote successfully receives another person assist with in view. The hand-held the frequency signal from the the remaining steps. transmitter was supplied by the hand-held transmitter. Release manufacturer of your garage both buttons. door opener receiver (motor 5. Press and hold the newly-trained head unit). Universal Home Remote button 3. At the same time, press and and observe the indicator light. hold both the Universal Home . If the indicator light stays Remote button to be used to on continuously, the control the garage door and the programming is complete hand-held transmitter button. Do and the garage door should not release the Universal Home move when the Universal Remote button or the hand-held Home Remote button is transmitter button until Step 4 pressed and released. has been completed. There is no need to Some entry gates and garage continue programming 6. After Steps 1 through 5 have door openers may require Steps 6 through 8. been completed, locate inside substitution of Step 3 with the the garage the garage door . If the Universal Home opener receiver (motor-head procedure noted in “Gate Remote indicator light unit). Locate the Learn or Operator and Canadian blinks rapidly for “ ” Smart button. The name and Programming” later in this two seconds and then turns “ ” section. color of the button may vary by manufacturer. 5-50 Instruments and Controls

7. Firmly press and release the To program the remaining two If you live in Canada, or you are “Learn” or “Smart” button. After Universal Home Remote buttons, having difficulty programming a gate you press this button, you will begin with Step 2 of “Programming operator or garage door opener by have 30 seconds to complete the Universal Home Remote using the “Programming Universal Step 8. System.” Do not repeat Step 1, as Home Remote” procedures, 8. Immediately return to the this will erase all previous regardless of where you live, vehicle. Firmly press and hold programming from the Universal replace Step 3 under “Programming the Universal Home Remote Home Remote buttons. Universal Home Remote” with the following: button, selected in Step 3 to Gate Operator and Canadian control the garage door, for Programming Continue to press and hold the two seconds, and then release Universal Home Remote button it. If the garage door does not If you have questions or need help while you press and release every move, press and hold the same programming the Universal Home two seconds (cycle) the hand-held button a second time for Remote System, call transmitter button until the two seconds, and then release 1-800-355-3515 or go to frequency signal has been it. Again, if the door does not www.homelink.com. successfully accepted by the move, press and hold the same Canadian radio-frequency laws Universal Home Remote. The button a third time for require transmitter signals to time Universal Home Remote indicator two seconds, and then release. out or quit after several seconds of light will flash slowly at first and then The Universal Home Remote transmission. This may not be long rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under should now activate the enough for Universal Home Remote “Programming Universal Home garage door. to pick up the signal during Remote” to complete the training programming. Similarly, some U.S. procedure. gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner. Instruments and Controls 5-51

Universal Remote System To erase all programmed buttons on Reprogramming a Single Operation the Universal Remote device: Universal Remote Button To reprogram any of the three Using Universal Remote Universal Remote buttons, repeat Press and hold the appropriate the programming instructions earlier Universal Remote button for at least in this section, beginning with half of a second. The indicator light Step 2. will come on while the signal is For help or information on the being transmitted. Universal Home Remote System, Erasing Universal Remote call the customer assistance phone Buttons number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 13‑3. All programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends. 1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. 2. Release both buttons. 5-52 Instruments and Controls

2 NOTES Lighting 6-1

Lighting Features Exterior Lighting Lighting Entry Lighting ...... 6-5 Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 Exterior Lamp Controls Exterior Lighting Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 6-6 Parade Dimming ...... 6-6 Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 6-1 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Battery Power Protection ...... 6-7 Changer ...... 6-2 Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-2 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp System ...... 6-3 Delayed Headlamps ...... 6-3 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...... 6-4 Interior Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination The exterior lamps control is located Control ...... 6-4 on the instrument panel to the left of Courtesy Lamps ...... 6-4 the steering wheel. Dome Lamps ...... 6-5 It controls the following systems: Reading Lamps ...... 6-5 . Headlamps . Taillamps . Parking Lamps . License Plate Lamps . Instrument Panel Lights 6-2 Lighting

The exterior lamps control has four 2 (Headlamps): Turns the positions: headlamps on together with the 9 (Off): Briefly turn to this position following lamps listed below. to turn the automatic light control off A warning chime sounds if the or on again. driver's door is opened when the ignition switch is off and the AUTO (Automatic): Turns the headlamps are on. This indicator light turns on in the headlamps on automatically at . Parking Lamps instrument panel cluster when the normal brightness, together with the high beam headlamps are on. following: . Taillamps . Parking Lamps . License Plate Lamps Flash-to-Pass . Taillamps . Instrument Panel Lights This feature is used to signal to the vehicle ahead that you want . License Plate Lamps Headlamp High/ to pass. . Instrument Panel Lights Low-Beam Changer If the headlamps are off or in the ; (Parking Lamps): Turns the 2 3 low-beam position, pull the turn parking lamps on together with the Headlamp High/Low Beam signal lever toward you to following: Changer: Push the turn signal/lane momentarily switch to high-beams. change lever away from you to turn . Taillamps the high beams on. Release the lever to turn the high-beam headlamps off. . License Plate Lamps Pull the lever towards you to return . Instrument Panel Lights to low beams. Lighting 6-3

Daytime Running Lamps The headlamps automatically If the ignition is turned off with the change from DRL to the regular exterior lamp control in the parking (DRL)/Automatic headlamps depending on the lamps or headlamps position, the Headlamp System darkness of the surroundings. delayed headlamps cycle will not Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can The other lamps that come on with occur. make it easier for others to see the the headlamps will also come on. To disable the delayed headlamps front of your vehicle during the day. When it is bright enough outside, feature or change the time of delay, Fully functional daytime running the headlamps will go off and the see Vehicle Personalization (With lamps are required on all vehicles DRL will come on. DIC Buttons) on page 5‑40. first sold in Canada. Do not cover the light sensor on top The DRL system makes the of the instrument panel because it Hazard Warning Flashers low-beam headlamps come on at a works with the DRL. | Hazard Warning Flasher: reduced brightness when the Press this button located on the following conditions are met: Delayed Headlamps instrument panel below the audio . The ignition is in the ON/RUN Delayed headlamps provide a system, to make the front and rear position. period of exterior lighting as you turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns others that you are . leave the area around the vehicle. The exterior lamps control is having trouble. Press again to turn in AUTO. This feature is activated when the headlamps are on due to the the flashers off. . The engine is running. automatic headlamps control The turn signals do not work while When the DRL are on, the regular feature, and when the ignition is the hazard warning flashers are on. headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, turned off. The headlamps remain and other lamps will not be on. on until the exterior lamps control is The instrument panel and cluster moved to the parking lamps position will also not be lit. or until the pre-selected delayed headlamp lighting period has ended. 6-4 Lighting

Turn and Lane-Change Raise or lower the lever until the Interior Lighting arrow starts to flash to signal a lane Signals change. Hold it there until the lane change is completed. If the lever is Instrument Panel briefly pressed and released, the Illumination Control turn signal flashes three times. D (Instrument Panel The lever returns to its starting Brightness): The knob with this position whenever it is released. symbol on it is next to the exterior If after signaling a turn or lane lamps control to the left of the change the arrow flashes rapidly or steering wheel. Push the knob in does not come on, a signal bulb all the way until it extends out and might be burned out. then turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb the lights. Push the knob back in is not burned out, check the fuse. when finished. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on An arrow on the instrument panel page 10‑30. cluster flashes in the direction of the Courtesy Lamps turn or lane change. Turn Signal On Chime The courtesy lamps automatically Move the lever all the way up or If either one of the turn signals are come on when a door is opened. down to signal a turn. left on and the vehicle has been The lamps can also be turned on driven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), manually by fully turning the a chime will sound. instrument panel brightness control clockwise. Lighting 6-5

The reading lamps, located on the Dome Lamp Override Lighting Features headliner above the rearview mirror, The dome lamp override button is can be turned on or off independent next to the exterior lamps control. of the automatic courtesy lamps, Entry Lighting E when the doors are closed. (Dome Lamp Override): Press For vehicles with courtesy lamps, the button in and the dome lamps they come on and stay on for a set Dome Lamps remain off when a door is opened. time whenever the unlock symbol is Press the button again to return it to pressed on the Remote Keyless The dome lamps are located in the the extended position so that the Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the overhead console and above the dome lamps come on when a door vehicle has one. rear seat passengers. is opened. If a door is opened, the lamps stay The dome lamps automatically on while it is open and then turn off come on when a door is opened, Reading Lamps automatically about 20 seconds unless the dome lamp override Press the button near each lamp to after the door is closed. If the unlock button is pressed in. turn them on or off. symbol is pressed and no door is The lamps can also be turned on opened, the lamps turn off after and off by turning the instrument about 20 seconds. panel brightness control clockwise Entry lighting includes a feature to the farthest position. called theater dimming. With theater dimming, the lamps do not turn off at the end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly dim and then go out. The delay time is canceled if the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN or the power door lock switch is pressed. The lamps will dim right away. 6-6 Lighting

When the ignition is on, illuminated Delayed Exit Lighting Parade Dimming entry is inactive, which means the courtesy lamps will not come on Delayed exit lighting illuminates the This feature automatically prohibits unless a door is opened. interior for a period of time after the the dimming of the instrument panel key is removed from the ignition. displays in daylight while the Delayed Entry Lighting The ignition must be off for delayed headlamps are on so that the exit lighting to work. When the key displays are still able to be seen. Delayed entry lighting illuminates is removed, interior illumination the interior for a period of time after activates and remains on until one Battery Load all the doors have been closed. of the following occurs: Management The ignition must be off for delayed . The ignition is in ON/RUN. entry lighting to work. Immediately The vehicle has Electric Power after all the doors have been closed, . The power door locks are Management (EPM) that estimates the delayed entry lighting feature activated. the battery's temperature and state of charge. It then adjusts the voltage continues to work until one of the . An illumination period of following occurs: for best performance and extended 20 seconds has elapsed. life of the battery. . The ignition is in ON/RUN. If during the illumination period a When the battery's state of charge . The doors are locked. door is opened, the timed is low, the voltage is raised slightly illumination period will be canceled . An illumination period of about to quickly bring the charge back up. and the interior lamps will remain on 25 seconds has elapsed. When the state of charge is high, because a door is open. the voltage is lowered slightly to If during the illumination period a prevent overcharging. If the vehicle door is opened, the timed has a voltmeter gage or a voltage illumination period is canceled and display on the Driver Information the interior lamps remain on. Lighting 6-7

Center (DIC), you may see the It can increase engine idle speed to Battery Power Protection voltage move up or down. This is generate more power, whenever normal. If there is a problem, an needed. It can temporarily reduce This feature helps prevent the alert will be displayed. the power demands of some battery from being drained, if the accessories. interior courtesy lamps, reading/map The battery can be discharged at lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk idle if the electrical loads are very Normally, these actions occur in lamp are accidentally left on. If any high. This is true for all vehicles. steps or levels, without being of these lamps are left on, they This is because the generator noticeable. In rare cases at the automatically turn off after (alternator) may not be spinning fast highest levels of corrective action, 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. enough at idle to produce all the this action may be noticeable to the The lamps will not come back on power that is needed for very high driver. If so, a Driver Information again until one of the following electrical loads. Center (DIC) message might be occurs: displayed, such as BATTERY A high electrical load occurs when . The ignition is turned on. several of the following are on, such SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY as: headlamps, high beams, fog VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. . The exterior lamps control is lamps, rear window defogger, If one of these messages displays, turned off, then on again. climate control fan at high speed, it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much The headlamps will timeout after heated seats, engine cooling fans, 10 minutes, if they are manually trailer loads, and loads plugged into as possible. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on turned on while the ignition is on accessory power outlets. or off. page 5‑22 or Driver Information EPM works to prevent excessive Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) discharge of the battery. It does this on page 5‑28. by balancing the generator's output and the vehicle's electrical needs. 6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES Infotainment System 7-1

Audio Players Introduction Infotainment CD Player ...... 7-13 System CD/DVD Player ...... 7-15 Read the following pages to MP3 (Radio with CD and become familiar with the audio Radio with CD/USB) ...... 7-23 system's features. Introduction MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) . . . 7-29 Introduction ...... 7-1 Auxiliary Devices ...... 7-36 { WARNING Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 7-2 Rear Seat Infotainment Operation ...... 7-2 Taking your eyes off the road Rear Seat Entertainment for extended periods could cause Radio (RSE) System ...... 7-37 a crash resulting in injury or Rear Seat Audio (RSA) AM-FM Radio ...... 7-7 death to you or others. Do not System ...... 7-46 Satellite Radio ...... 7-8 give extended attention to Radio Reception ...... 7-12 Phone entertainment tasks while driving. Multi-Band Antenna ...... 7-13 Bluetooth ...... 7-48 This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings. To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving, do the following while the vehicle is parked: . Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system. . Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. 7-2 Infotainment System

For more information, see Defensive Operation Driving on page 9‑2. The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 9‑16 for more information. Navigation/Radio System For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the separate Navigation System manual. Theft-Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Radio with CD, Radio with CD/USB similar Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle. Infotainment System 7-3

If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system, it has a CD, DVD, and USB radio. See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 7‑37 for more information on the vehicle's RSE system. The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the Radio with CD, DVD, and USB double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. The vehicle may have one of these Radios with CD, DVD, and USB radios as its audio system. Radios with CD, DVD, and USB have a Bose® Surround Sound System. Some of its features are explained later in this section under, “Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)”. 7-4 Infotainment System

Playing the Radio 4 (Information): Press to switch Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, and WMA features): If O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the display between the radio additional information is available the system on and off. Turn to station frequency and the time. for the current song being played, increase or decrease the volume. When the ignition is in the OFF position, press 4 to display the time. Auto Text will automatically page/ For vehicles with a Rear scroll the information every For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA Entertainment System (RSE), press five seconds above the FAV and hold for more than two seconds or RDS features, press 4 to display presets on the radio display. to turn off the entire radio and RSE additional text information related to To activate Auto Text: system and to start the parental the current FM-RDS or XM station; control feature. Parental control or CD, MP3 or WMA song. 1. Press MENU to display the radio prevents the rear seat occupant If information is available during XM, setup menu. CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the from operating the Rear Seat Audio 2. Press the softkey under AUTO song title information displays on (RSA) system or remote control. TXT tab on the radio display. the top line of the display and artist A lock symbol displays next to the information displays on the bottom 3. Press the softkey under the ON clock display while the parental line. When information is not tab on the radio display. control feature is being used. available, “NO INFO” is displayed. The feature remains on until O is If 4 is pressed and the song title pressed and held for more than or artist information is longer than two seconds, or the driver turns the what can be displayed, the extra ignition off and exits the vehicle. information will page every five seconds when Auto Text is activated. Infotainment System 7-5

Speed Compensated Volume 4. Press the softkey under the 3. To adjust the highlighted setting, (SCV): The Speed Compensated Speed Compensated Volume do one of the following until the Volume (SCV) feature automatically setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) levels are obtained. adjusts the radio volume to to select the level of radio . f compensate for road and wind noise volume compensation. Press Turn clockwise or as the vehicle speeds up or slows the softkey located below the counterclockwise. down, so that the volume level is BACK tab on the MENU SETUP . Press \ FWD, consistent. display or let the display time out or s REV. To activate SCV: after approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting allows If a station's frequency is weak or if 1. Set the radio volume. for more radio volume there is static, decrease the treble. 2. Press the MENU button to compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To quickly adjust bass, midrange, display the radio setup menu. or treble to the middle position, 3. Press the softkey under the Setting the Tone press the softkey under the BASS, AUTO VOLUM (automatic (Bass/Midrange/Treble) MID, or TREB tab for more than volume) tab on the radio display. two seconds. A beep sounds and BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, the level adjusts to the middle or Treble): To adjust bass, position. midrange, or treble: To quickly adjust all tone and 1. Press f until the tone control speaker controls to the middle tabs display. position, press f for more than 2. Continue pressing f to highlight two seconds until a beep sounds. the tab, or press the softkey under the tab. 7-6 Infotainment System

EQ (Equalization): Press to 3. To adjust the highlighted setting, Radios with CD and DVD fade choose bass and treble equalization do one of the following until the differently depending on the DVD settings designed for different types levels are obtained. Media type: of music. The choices are pop, rock, . f . With DVD-A 5.1 Surround country, talk, jazz, and classical. Turn clockwise or counterclockwise. media, the left front and right Selecting MANUAL or changing front speakers fade rearward, bass or treble, returns the EQ to the . Press \ FWD, leaving the center front speakers manual bass and treble settings. or s REV. unaffected until the last Unique EQ settings can be saved fade step, then all front for each source. To quickly adjust balance or fade speakers mute. ® to the middle position, press the If the radio has a Bose audio softkey under the BAL or FADE tab . With DVD-V 5.1 Surround system, the EQ settings are either for more than two seconds. A beep media, surround sound is MANUAL or TALK. sounds and the level adjusts to the maintained until Step 4 of the middle position. Fade control is reached while Adjusting the Speakers fading rearward. At that point the (Balance/Fade) To quickly adjust all speaker and audio system output changes to BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): tone controls to the middle position, Stereo to prevent the loss of To adjust the balance or fade: press f for more than two seconds Center channel output when the until a beep sounds. full rearward fade position is 1. Press f until the speaker control reached. tabs display. If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is 2. Continue pressing f to highlight turned on, the radio disables FADE the tab, or press the softkey and mutes the rear speakers. under the tab. Infotainment System 7-7

Radio Messages Radio Finding a Station Calibration Error: The audio BAND: Press to switch between system has been calibrated AM-FM Radio AM, FM, or XM. The selection for the vehicle from the factory. displays. Radio Data System (RDS) If Calibration Error displays, it f (Tune): Turn to select radio means that the radio has not been The Radio Data System (RDS) stations. configured properly for the vehicle feature is available for use only on and it must be returned to your FM stations that broadcast RDS © SEEK ¨ : Press to go to the dealer/retailer for service. information. This system relies upon previous or to the next station and stay there. Locked: This message displays receiving specific information from when the THEFTLOCK® system these stations and only works when To scan stations, press and hold has locked up the radio. Take the the information is available. While © or ¨ until a beep sounds. The vehicle to your dealer/retailer for the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS radio goes to a station, plays for a service. station, the station name or call few seconds, then goes to the next letters display. In rare cases, a radio station. Press either arrow again to If any error occurs repeatedly or station could broadcast incorrect stop scanning. if an error cannot be corrected, information that causes the radio contact your dealer/retailer. The radio only seeks and scans features to work improperly. If this stations with a strong signal that happens, contact the radio station. are in the selected band. 7-8 Infotainment System

Storing a Radio Station as a To store a station as a favorite: 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time Favorite 1. Tune to the desired radio station. out, to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio Drivers are encouraged to set up 2. Press FAV to display the page to station frequency tabs and their radio station favorites while store the station. to begin the process of the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to programming favorites for the favorite stations using the presets, 3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep sounds. chosen amount of numbered favorites button, and steering wheel pages. controls. See Steering Wheel When that softkey is pressed Controls on page 5‑3. and released, the station that was set, returns. Satellite Radio FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as 4. Repeat the steps for each radio XM™ Satellite Radio Service station to be stored as a favorite. favorites using the six softkeys XM is a satellite radio service below the radio station frequency To setup the number of favorites that is based in the 48 contiguous tabs and by using the radio favorites pages: United States and 10 Canadian page button (FAV button). Press 1. Press MENU to display the radio provinces. XM Satellite Radio to go through up to six pages of setup menu. has a wide variety of programming favorites, each having six favorite and commercial-free music, stations available per page. Each 2. Press the softkey below the coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality page of favorites can contain any FAV 1-6 tab. sound. For more information, combination of AM, FM, or XM 3. Select the desired number of contact XM at www.xmradio.com stations. favorites pages by pressing the or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. The balance/fade and tone settings softkey below the displayed and www.xmradio.ca or call that were previously adjusted, are page numbers. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. stored with the favorite stations. Infotainment System 7-9

Finding a Station Finding a Category (CAT) 5. To go to the next or previous XM station within the selected BAND: Press to switch between Station category, do one of the AM, FM, or XM. The selection CAT (Category): The CAT button is following: displays. used to find XM™ stations when the . f f (Tune): Turn to select radio radio is in the XM mode. To find XM Turn . channels within a desired category: stations. . Press the buttons below the © SEEK ¨ : Press to go to the 1. Press BAND until the XM right or left arrows on the previous or to the next station and frequency displays. display. stay there. 2. Press CAT to display the . Press either SEEK arrow. category tabs. To scan stations, press and hold 6. To exit the category search © or ¨ until a beep sounds. 3. Continue pressing CAT until the mode, press the FAV button The radio goes to a station, plays desired category name displays. or BAND button to display the for a few seconds, then goes to the . Radios with CD and DVD favorites again. next station. Press either arrow can also navigate the again to stop scanning. Undesired XM categories can be category list by pressing removed through the setup menu. The radio only seeks and scans s REV or \ FWD. To remove an undesired category, stations with a strong signal that 4. Press either of the two buttons perform the following: are in the selected band. below the desired category tab 1. Press MENU to display the radio to immediately tune to the first setup menu. XM station associated with that 2. Press the softkey below the category. XM CAT tab. 3. Turn f to display the category to be removed. 7-10 Infotainment System

4. Press the softkey under the FAV (Favorites): A maximum of To setup the number of favorites Remove tab until the category 36 stations can be programmed as pages: name along with the word favorites using the six softkeys 1. Press MENU to display the radio Removed displays. below the radio station frequency setup menu. tabs and by using the radio favorites 5. Repeat the steps to remove 2. Press the softkey below the more categories. page button (FAV button). Press to go through up to six pages of FAV 1-6 tab. Removed categories can be favorites, each having six favorite 3. Select the desired number of restored by pressing the softkey stations available per page. Each favorites pages by pressing the under the Add tab when a removed page of favorites can contain any softkey below the displayed category is displayed or by pressing combination of AM, FM, or XM page numbers. the softkey under the Restore stations. All tab. 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time The balance/fade and tone settings out, to return to the original main Categories cannot be removed or that were previously adjusted, are radio screen showing the radio added while the vehicle is moving stored with the favorite stations. station frequency tabs and faster than 8 km/h (5 mph). To store a station as a favorite: to begin the process of programming favorites for the Storing a Radio Station as a 1. Tune to the desired radio station. Favorite chosen amount of numbered 2. Press FAV to display the page to pages. Drivers are encouraged to set up store the station. their radio station favorites while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to 3. Press and hold one of the favorite stations using the presets, six softkeys until a beep sounds. favorites button, and steering wheel When that softkey is pressed controls. See Steering Wheel and released, the station that Controls on page 5‑3. was set, returns. 4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored as a favorite. Infotainment System 7-11

XM™ Radio Messages Channel Off Air: This channel is No Information: No text or not currently in service. Tune in to informational messages are XL (Explicit Language another channel. available at this time on this Channels): These channels, channel. The system is working or any others, can be blocked at Channel Unauth : This channel is properly. a customer's request, by calling blocked or cannot be received with 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). your XM Subscription package. CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for the selected XM Updating: The encryption code Channel Unavail: This previously category. The system is working in the receiver is being updated, and assigned channel is no longer properly. no action is required. This process assigned. Tune to another station. should take no longer than If this station was one of the XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver 30 seconds. presets, choose another station in the vehicle could have previously for that preset button. been in another vehicle. For security No XM Signal: The system is purposes, XM receivers cannot be functioning correctly, but the vehicle No Artist Info: No artist swapped between vehicles. If this is in a location that is blocking the information is available at this time message is received after having XM signal. When the vehicle is on this channel. The system is ™ the vehicle serviced, check with moved into an open area, the signal working properly. your dealer/retailer. should return. No Title Info: No song title XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, Loading XM: The audio system is information is available at this time this message alternates with the acquiring and processing audio and on this channel. The system is XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. text data. No action is needed. This working properly. ™ This label is needed to activate the message should disappear shortly. No CAT Info: No category service. information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. 7-12 Infotainment System

Unknown: If this message is FM XM™ Satellite Radio Service received when tuned to channel 0, FM signals only reach about 16 to XM Satellite Radio Service gives there could be a receiver fault. 65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the digital radio reception from Consult with your dealer/retailer. radio has a built-in electronic circuit coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous Check XM Receivr: If this that automatically works to reduce United States, and in Canada. Just message does not clear within a interference, some static can occur, as with FM, tall buildings or hills can short period of time, the receiver especially around tall buildings or interfere with satellite radio signals, could have a fault. Consult with your hills, causing the sound to fade in causing the sound to fade in and dealer/retailer. and out. out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, XM Not Available: If this message AM does not clear within a short period garages, or tunnels may cause loss of time, the receiver could have a The range for most AM stations is of the XM signal for a period of time. greater than for FM, especially at fault. Consult with your dealer/ Cellular Phone Usage retailer. night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with Cellular phone usage may cause Radio Reception each other. For better radio interference with the vehicle's radio. reception, most AM radio stations This interference may occur when Frequency interference and static boost the power levels during the making or receiving phone calls, can occur during normal radio day, and then reduce these levels charging the phone's battery, reception if items such as cell phone during the night. Static can also or simply having the phone on. This chargers, vehicle convenience occur when things like storms and interference can cause an increased accessories, and external electronic power lines interfere with radio level of static while listening to the devices are plugged into the reception. When this happens, try radio. If static is received while accessory power outlet. If there is reducing the treble on the radio. listening to the radio, unplug the interference or static, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off. item from the accessory power outlet. Infotainment System 7-13

Multi-Band Antenna Audio Players © SEEK ¨ : Press © to go to the start of the current track, if more The multi-band antenna is located than ten seconds on the CD have on the roof of the vehicle. This type CD Player of antenna is used with the AM/FM played. Press ¨ to go to the next radio, as well as OnStar® and the Playing a CD track. XM™ Satellite Radio Service Insert a CD partway into the slot, If either arrow is held, or pressed System, if the vehicle has these label side up. The player pulls it in multiple times, the player continues features. Keep this antenna clear and the CD should begin playing. moving backward or forward of snow and ice build up for clear Z EJECT : Press and release through the tracks on the CD. radio reception. If the vehicle has to eject the disc that is currently s a sunroof, the performance of the REV (Fast Reverse): Press playing. A beep sounds and radio system may be affected if the and hold to reverse playback quickly Ejecting Disc displays. Once the sunroof is open. Loading items onto within a track. Sound will be heard disc is ejected, Remove Disc the roof of the vehicle can interfere at a reduced volume. Release to displays. The disc can be removed. with the performance of the radio resume playing the track. The If the disc is not removed, after system and, if the vehicle has this elapsed time of the track displays. several seconds, the disc feature, OnStar®. Make sure the \ automatically pulls back into FWD (Fast Forward): Press multi-band antenna is not the player. and hold to advance playback obstructed. quickly within a track. Sound will be f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on heard at a reduced volume. Release the CD that is currently playing. to resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays. 7-14 Infotainment System

RDM (Random): CD tracks can be Care of CDs Care of the CD Player listened to in random, rather than If playing a CD-R, the sound quality Do not add any label to a CD, it sequential order with the random can be reduced due to CD-R or could get caught in the CD player. setting. To use random, press the CD-RW quality, the method of If a CD is recorded on a personal softkey under the RDM label until recording, the quality of the music computer and a description label is Random Current Disc displays. that has been recorded, and the needed, try labeling the top of the Press the softkey again to turn way the CD-R or CD-RW has been recorded CD with a marking pen. off random play. handled. Handle them carefully. The use of CD lens cleaners for BAND: Press to listen to the radio Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their CDs is not advised. when a CD is playing. The CD original cases or other protective remains inside the radio for future cases and away from direct sunlight Notice: If a label is added to a listening. and dust. The CD player scans the CD, or more than one CD is bottom surface of the disc. If the inserted into the slot at a time, CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to or an attempt is made to play select between CD, or Auxiliary. surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, scratched or damaged CDs, the . When a CD is in the player the CD does not play properly or not CD player could be damaged. the CD icon and a message at all. Do not touch the bottom side While using the CD player, use showing the disc and/or track of a CD while handling it; this could only CDs in good condition number displays. damage the surface. Pick up CDs without any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player . If an auxiliary input device is not by grasping the outer edges or the and the loading slot free of connected, “No Input Device edge of the hole and the outer edge. foreign materials, liquids, and Found” displays. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take debris. a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral If an error displays, see “CD detergent solution mixed with water, Messages” later in this section. and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge. Infotainment System 7-15

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or . The road is very rough. When CD/DVD Player CD-RW Disc the road becomes smoother, the CD should play. Playing a CD (In Either the The radio has the capability of . DVD or CD Slot) playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, CD-RW disc. For more information or upside down. Insert a CD partway into the slot, on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R . The air is very humid. If so, wait label side up. The player pulls it in or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio about an hour and try again. and the CD should begin playing with CD and Radio with CD/USB) (loading a disc into the system, . There could have been a depending on media type and on page 7‑23 or MP3 (Radio with problem while burning the CD. CD/DVD) on page 7‑29. format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds . The label could be caught in the for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for CD Messages CD player. a DVD to begin playing). CHECK DISC: Radios with a If the CD is not playing correctly If the ignition or radio is turned off, Single CD player display CHECK for any other reason, try a known while a CD is in the player, it stays DISC and/or ejects the CD if an good CD. in the player. When the ignition or error occurs. If any error occurs repeatedly or if radio is turned on, the CD starts Optical Error: The disc was an error cannot be corrected, playing where it stopped, if it was inserted upside down. contact your dealer/retailer. If the the last selected audio source. The CD is controlled by the buttons Disk Read Error: A disc was radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your on the radio faceplate or by the RSA inserted with an invalid or unknown unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) format. dealer/retailer when reporting the problem. System on page 7‑46 for more Player Error: There are disc LOAD information. The DVD/CD decks, or disc EJECT problems. (upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck) of the . It is very hot. When the radio are compatible with most temperature returns to normal, audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and the CD should play. MP3/WMAs. 7-16 Infotainment System

When a CD is inserted, the text f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press label DVD or CD symbol displays the CD that is currently playing. and hold to advance playback on the left side of the radio display. © SEEK ¨ : Press © to go quickly within a track. Sound will As each new track starts to play, the be heard at a reduced volume. track number displays. to the start of the current track if the track has played more than Release to resume playing the Z CD (Eject): Press and release five seconds. If the track has played track. The elapsed time of the to eject the disc that is currently less than five seconds the previous track displays. playing. The disc ejects from the track will play. RDM (Random): CD tracks can be bottom slot. A beep sounds and listened to in random, rather than Ejecting Disc displays. Once the Press ¨ to go to the next track. sequential order with the random disc is ejected, Remove Disc If either arrow is held, or pressed setting. To use random, press the displays. The disc can be removed. multiple times, the player continues softkey under the RDM tab until If the disc is not removed, after moving backward or forward Random Current Disc displays. several seconds, the disc through the tracks on the CD. Press the softkey again to turn off automatically pulls back into random play. the player. s REV (Fast Reverse): Press Z and hold to reverse playback quickly BAND: Press to listen to the radio DVD (Eject): Press and within a track. Sound will be heard when a CD or DVD is playing. release to eject the disc that is at a reduced volume. Release to The CD or DVD remains inside currently playing in the top slot. resume playing the track. The the radio for future listening or A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc elapsed time of the track displays. for viewing entertainment. displays. If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed, and the disc fails to eject, press and hold Z DVD for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject. Infotainment System 7-17

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press If a disc is inserted into the top DVD Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their to select between DVD, CD, slot, the rear seat operator can turn original cases or other protective or Auxiliary. on the video screen and use the cases and away from direct sunlight remote control to only navigate the and dust. The CD or DVD player . If an auxiliary input device is CD tracks through the remote scans the bottom surface of the not connected, “No Aux Input control. disc. If the surface of a CD is Device” displays. damaged, such as cracked, broken, See “Using the Auxiliary Input . When a disc is in either slot, the or scratched, the CD does not play Jack(s)” later in this section, DVD/CD text tab and a message properly or not at all. Do not touch showing the track or chapter or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) the bottom side of a CD while number displays. handling it; this could damage the System on page 7‑37 for more . If an auxiliary input device is not information. surface. Pick up CDs by grasping connected, and a disc is in both the outer edges or the edge of the the DVD slot and the CD slot the Care of CDs and DVDs hole and the outer edge. DVD/CD AUX button only cycles If playing a CD-R, the sound quality If the surface of a CD is soiled, take between the two sources and can be reduced due to CD-R or a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a does not indicate “No Aux Input CD-RW quality, the method of clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral Device”. recording, the quality of the music detergent solution mixed with water, . If a front auxiliary input device is that has been recorded, and the and clean it. Make sure the wiping connected, the DVD/CD AUX way the CD-R or CD-RW has been process starts from the center to button cycles through all handled. Handle them carefully. the edge. available options. 7-18 Infotainment System

Care of the CD and DVD Player Radios with CD and DVD the vehicle speakers. See “Using Do not add any label to a CD, it Audio Output the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) could get caught in the CD or DVD Only one audio source can be player. If a CD is recorded on a Jacks” under, Rear Seat heard through the speakers at one Entertainment (RSE) System on personal computer and a description time. An audio source is defined as page 7‑37 for more information. label is needed, try labeling the DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, top of the recorded CD with a Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear In some vehicles, depending on marking pen. Auxiliary Jack. audio options, the rear speakers can be muted when the RSA power The use of CD lens cleaners for Press O to turn the radio on. CDs is not advised. is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio The radio can be heard through (RSA) System on page 7‑46 for Notice: If a label is added to a all of the vehicle speakers. more information. CD, or more than one CD is Front seat passengers can listen inserted into the slot at a time, Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or to the radio (AM, FM, or XM) by or an attempt is made to play CD-RW Disc pressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX to scratched or damaged CDs, the select the CD slot, DVD slot, front or The radio has the capability of CD player could be damaged. rear auxiliary input (if available). playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or While using the CD player, use CD-RW disc. For more information only CDs in good condition If a playback device is plugged into on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R without any label, load one CD at the radio’s front auxiliary input jack or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio a time, and keep the CD player or the rear auxiliary jack, the front with CD and Radio with CD/USB) seat passengers are able to listen to and the loading slot free of on page 7‑23 or MP3 (Radio with playback from this source through foreign materials, liquids, and CD/DVD) on page 7‑29. debris. If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this section. Infotainment System 7-19

CD Messages If the CD is not playing correctly The DVD slot of the radio is for any other reason, try a known compatible with most audio CDs, Optical Error: The disc was good CD. CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, inserted upside down. If any error occurs repeatedly or DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/ Disk Read Error: A disc was if an error cannot be corrected, RW media along with MP3 and inserted with an invalid or unknown contact your dealer/retailer. If the WMA formats. format. radio displays an error message, If an error message displays on the Player Error: There are disc LOAD write it down and provide it to your video screen or the radio, see “DVD or disc EJECT problems. dealer/retailer when reporting the Display Error Messages” under, . It is very hot. When the problem. Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 7‑37 and “DVD temperature returns to normal, Using the DVD Player the CD should play. Radio Error Messages” in this The DVD player can be controlled section for more information. . The road is very rough. When by the buttons on the remote Playing a DVD the road becomes smoother, the control, the RSA system, or by CD should play. the buttons on the radio faceplate. f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on . The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, See “Remote Control”, under Rear a CD or DVD, to manually tune a or upside down. Seat Entertainment (RSE) System radio station, or to change clock on page 7‑37 and Rear Seat Audio or date settings, while in the clock . The air is very humid. If so, wait (RSA) System on page 7‑46 for or date setting mode. See the about an hour and try again. more information. information given earlier in this . section specific to the radio, CD, There could have been a The DVD player is only compatible and the DVD. Also, see Setting problem while burning the CD. with DVDs of the appropriate region “ the Clock” in the index, for setting . The label could be caught in the code that is printed on the jacket of the clock and date. CD player. most DVDs. 7-20 Infotainment System

© SEEK (Previous Track/ \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to The rear seat passenger can Chapter): Press to return to fast forward the DVD. The radio navigate the DVD-V menus and the start of the current track or displays the elapsed time and fast controls through the remote control. chapter. Press again to go forwards five times the normal See “Remote Control”, under Rear © Seat Entertainment (RSE) System to the previous track or chapter. speed. To stop fast forwarding, on page 7 37 for more information. This button may not work when press again. This button may not ‑ The Video Screen automatically the DVD is playing the copyright work when the DVD is playing the turns on when the DVD-V is information or the previews. copyright information or the previews. inserted into the DVD slot. SEEK (Next Track/Chapter): ¨ Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD. r / j (Play/Pause): Press either Press to go to the next track or If the DVD is ejected, but not the play or pause icon displayed on chapter. This button may not work removed, the player automatically the radio system, to toggle between when the DVD is playing the pulls it back in after 15 seconds. pausing or restarting playback of copyright information or the a DVD. previews. If loading and reading of a DVD . s cannot be completed, because of an If the forward arrow is showing REV (Fast Reverse): Press unknown format, etc., and the disc on display, the system is in to quickly reverse the DVD at fails to eject, press and hold for pause mode. five times the normal speed. The more than five seconds to force the . If the pause icon is showing radio displays the elapsed time disc to eject. while in fast reverse. To stop fast on display, the system is in reversing, press again. This button DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons playback mode. may not work when the DVD is Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio . If the DVD screen is off, press playing the copyright information display menu shows several icons. the play button to turn the or the previews. Press the softkeys under any icon screen on. during DVD playback. See the icon list below for more information. Infotainment System 7-21

Some DVDs begin playing after the q (Return): Press to exit the r / j (Play/Pause): Press either previews have finished, although current active menu and return to the play or pause icon displayed on there could be a delay of up to the previous menu. This button the radio system, to toggle between 30 seconds. If the DVD does operates only when a DVD is pausing or restarting playback of not begin playing the movie playing and a menu is active. a DVD. automatically, press the softkey under the play/pause icon displayed DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons . If the forward arrow is showing on the radio. If the DVD still does on display, the system is in Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio pause mode. not play, refer to the on-screen display menu shows several icons. instructions, if available. Press the softkeys under any icon . If the pause icon is showing c (Stop): Press to stop playing, during DVD playback. See the icon on display, the system is in rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. list below for more information. playback mode. r (Enter): Press to select the The rear seat operator can navigate q Group r : Press to cycle choices that are highlighted in the DVD-A menus and controls through musical groupings on the any menu. through the remote control. See DVD-A disc. y “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Nav (Navigate): Press to display (Menu): Press to access the Entertainment (RSE) System on DVD menu. The DVD menu is directional arrows for navigating page 7‑37 for more information. through the menus. different on every DVD. Use the The Video Screen does not softkeys under the navigation automatically power on when the e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle arrows to navigate the cursor DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. through audio stream formats through the DVD menu. After It must be manually turned on by located on the DVD-A disc. The making a selection press this the rear seat occupant through the video screen shows the audio button. This button only operates remote control power button. stream changing. when using a DVD. Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus. 7-22 Infotainment System

Inserting a Disc Stopping and Resuming Playback button has not been pressed twice To play a disc, gently insert the To stop playing a DVD without on the remote control. If the disc disc, with the label side up, into the turning off the system, do one has been ejected or the stop button loading slot. The DVD player might of the following: has been pressed twice on the not accept some paper labeled remote control, the disc resumes media. The player starts loading the . Press c on the remote control. playing at the beginning of the disc. disc into the system and shows . Press the softkey under the Ejecting a Disc “Loading Disc” on the radio display. stop or the play/pause icons Z At the same time, the radio displays displayed on the radio. Press DVD on the radio to eject a softkey menu of option(s). Some the disc. If a disc is ejected from the . discs automatically play the movie If the radio head is sourced to radio, but not removed, the radio while others default to the softkey something other than DVD-V, reloads the disc after a short period menu display, which requires the press the DVD/CD AUX button of time. The disc is stored in the Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys to make DVD-V the active radio. The radio does not resume to be pressed; either by the softkey source. play of the disc automatically. If the on the radio or by the rear seat To resume DVD playback, do one of movie is reloaded and the RSA passenger using the remote control. the following: system is sourced to the DVD, the player begins to play again. It may take up to 30 seconds for a . Press r / j on the remote If loading and reading a DVD or DVD to begin playing. control. CD cannot be completed, and the . Press the softkey under the play/ disc fails to eject, press and hold pause icon displayed on the Z DVD for more than five seconds radio. to force the disc to eject. The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop Infotainment System 7-23

DVD Error Messages MP3 (Radio with CD and Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs Player Error: This message Radio with CD/USB) displays when there are disc The radio can play discs that load or eject problems. Format contain both uncompressed CD audio and MP3/WMA files. If both Disc Format Error: This message Radios that have the capability of formats are on the disc, the radio displays, if the disc is inserted with playing MP3s can play.mp3 or .wma plays both file formats in the order the disc label wrong side up, or if files that were recorded onto a in which they were recorded to the disc is damaged. CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with the following the disc. Disc Region Error: This message fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, displays, if the disc is not from a CD-R or CD-RW Supported File 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, and Folder Structure correct region. 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, No Disc Inserted: This message 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and The radio supports: displays, if no disc is present when 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. . Up to 50 folders. Z DVD or DVD/CD AUX is Radios that have a USB port can . Up to 8 folders in depth. pressed on the radio. play.mp3 and .wma files that are . Up to 15 playlists. stored on a USB storage device as well as AAC files that are stored on . Up to 512 files and folders. ® an iPod . . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension. 7-24 Infotainment System

USB Supported File and Folder Root Directory Tracks are played in the following Structure The root directory of the disc is order: The radio supports: treated as a folder. If the root . Play begins from the first track in directory has compressed audio the first playlist and continues . Up to 700 folders. files, the directory displays on the sequentially through all tracks . Up to 8 folders in depth. radio as the CD label. in each playlist. When the last . Up to 65,535 files. If a disc contains both track of the last playlist has uncompressed CD audio and MP3/ played, play continues from the . Folder and file names up to first track of the first playlist. 64 bytes. WMA files, a folder under the root directory called CD accesses all of . Play begins from the first track . Files with an .mp3 or .wma file the CD audio tracks on the disc. in the first folder and continues extension. sequentially through all tracks in Empty Folder . AAC files stored on an iPod. each folder. When the last track Folders that do not contain files are of the last folder has played, . FAT16 skipped, and the player advances to play continues from the first . FAT32 the next folder that contains files. track of the first folder. Order of Play When play enters a new folder, the display does not automatically show Compressed audio files are the new folder name unless the accessed in the following order: folder mode has been chosen as . Playlists (Px). the default display. The new track . Files stored in the root directory. name displays. . Files stored in folders in the root directory. Infotainment System 7-25

File System and Naming Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3 S c (Previous Folder): Press The song name that displays is the f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA the softkey below S c to go to the song name that is contained in the files. first track in the previous folder. ID3 tag. If the song name is not SEEK: Press to go to the c T (Next Folder): Press the present in the ID3 tag, then the © start of the track, if more than radio displays the file name without softkey below c T to go to the first ten seconds have played. Press the extension (such as .mp3) as the track in the next folder. and hold or press multiple times to track name. continue moving backward through RDM (Random): Files on the disc Track names longer than tracks. can be listened to in random, rather 32 characters or four pages are than sequential order. To use SEEK: Press to go to the next shortened. Parts of words on the ¨ random, press the softkey under the track. Press and hold or press last page of text and the extension RDM tab until Random Current Disc multiple times to continue moving of the filename does not display. displays to play songs in random forward through tracks. order. Press the same softkey again Preprogrammed Playlists s REV (Reverse): Press and to turn off random play. Preprogrammed playlists that hold to reverse playback quickly. h (Music Navigator): Press the were created using WinAmp , Sound is heard at a reduced volume ™ softkey below h to play files in MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ and the elapsed time of the file order by artist or album. software can be accessed, however, displays. Release s REV to they cannot be edited using the resume playing. The player scans the disc to sort radio. These playlists are treated the files by artist and album ID3 tag as special folders containing \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press information. It can take several compressed audio song files. and hold to advance playback minutes to scan the disc depending quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced on the number of files on the disc. Playlists that have an .m3u or volume and the elapsed time of the .pls file extension and are stored on The radio may begin playing while file displays. Release \ FWD to a USB device may be supported by it is scanning in the background. the radio with a USB port. resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays. 7-26 Infotainment System

When the scan is finished, the disc The album name displays on the end to the USB port located in the begins playing files in order by second line between the arrows center console. If the vehicle is on artist. The current artist playing is and songs from the current album and the USB connection works, shown on the second line of the begins to play. Once all songs from “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo display. Once all songs by that artist that album have played, the player may appear on the iPod and iPod are played, the player moves to the moves to the next album in appears on the radio's display. The next artist in alphabetical order and alphabetical order on the CD and iPod music appears on the radio’s begins playing files by that artist. begins playing MP3 files from that display and begins playing. To listen to files by another artist, album. The iPod charges while it is press the softkey located below To exit music navigator mode, press connected to the vehicle if the either arrow tab. The disc goes the softkey below the Back tab to vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY to the next or previous artist in return to normal MP3 playback. or ON/RUN position. When the alphabetical order. Continue vehicle is turned off, the iPod Connecting a USB Storage pressing either softkey below the ® automatically powers off and will arrow tab until the artist displays. Device or iPod not charge or draw power from the To change from playback by artist to The USB Port can be used to vehicle's battery. playback by album: control an iPod or a USB storage If you have an older iPod model that device. 1. Press the softkey located below is not supported, it can still be used the Sort By tab. To connect a USB storage device, by connecting it to the Auxiliary connect the device to the USB port Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm 2. Press one of the softkeys below located in the center console. (1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the the album tab from the sort Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more screen. To connect an iPod, connect one information. end of the USB cable that came 3. Press the softkey below the with the iPod to the iPod’s dock back tab to return to the main connector and connect the other music navigator screen. Infotainment System 7-27

Using the Radio to Control a \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press j (Pause): Press the softkey USB Storage Device or iPod and hold to advance playback below j to pause the track. The tab The radio can control a USB quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced appears raised when pause is being storage device or an iPod using the volume. Release \ FWD to used. Press the softkey below j radio buttons and knobs and display resume playing. The elapsed again to resume playback. song information on the radio’s time of the file displays. display. Back: Press the softkey below the 4 (Information): Press to display back tab to go back to the main f (Tune): Turn to select files. additional information about the display screen on an iPod, or the selected track. © SEEK: Press to go to the root directory on a USB storage start of the track, if more than Using Softkeys to Control a device. ten seconds have played. Press USB Storage Device or iPod c (Folder View): Press the and hold or press multiple times to softkey below c to view the continue moving backward through The five softkeys below the radio contents of the current folder on tracks. display are used to control the functions listed below. the USB drive. To browse and ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next select files: To use the softkeys: track. Press and hold or press c multiple times to continue moving 1. Press the first or fifth softkey 1. Press the softkey below . forward through tracks. below the radio display to 2. Turn f to scroll through the list s REV (Reverse): Press and display the functions listed of folders. hold to reverse playback quickly. below, or press the softkey Sound is heard at a reduced below the function if it is 3. Press f to select the folder. currently displayed. volume. Release s REV to If there is more than one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the resume playing. The elapsed 2. Press the softkey below the tab folder is reached. time of the file displays. with the function on it to use that function. 7-28 Infotainment System

4. Turn f to scroll through the files h (Music Navigator): Press To skip through large lists, the five in the selected folder. the softkey below h to view and softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order: 5. Press f to select the file to be select a file on an iPod, using the iPod's menu system. Files are . First softkey, first item in the list. played. sorted by: . Second softkey, 1% through the To skip through large lists, the five . Playlists list each time the softkey is softkeys can be used to navigate in pressed. the following order: . Artists . Third softkey, 5% through the list . . Albums First softkey, first item in the list. each time the softkey is pressed. . . Genres Second softkey, 1% through the . Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the softkey is . Songs list each time the softkey is pressed. . Composers pressed. . Third softkey, 5% through the list . Fifth softkey, end of the list. each time the softkey is pressed. To select files: Repeat Functionality . Fourth softkey, 10% through the 1. Press the softkey below h . list each time the softkey is f To use Repeat: pressed. 2. Turn to scroll through the list of menus. Press the softkey below " or ' . Fifth softkey, end of the list. to select between Repeat All and 3. Press f to select the menu. Repeat Track. 4. Turn f to scroll through " (Repeat All): Press the softkey the folders or files in the below " to repeat all tracks. The selected menu. tab appears lowered when Repeat All is being used. This is the default 5. Press f to select the file to be mode when a USB storage device played. or iPod is first connected. Infotainment System 7-29

' (Repeat Track): Press the MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) before MP3/WMA files. Press the softkey below to repeat one CAT (category) button to toggle ' Format between uncompressed audio and track. The tab appears raised when MP3/WMA files. Repeat Track is being used. The radio can play.mp3 or .wma files that were recorded CD-R or CD-RW Supported File Shuffle Functionality onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc. and Folder Structure To use Shuffle: The USB port can The DVD Player supports: play.mp3 and .wma files that are Press the softkey below > , . Up to 255 folders. , or to select stored on a USB storage device as 2 < = . between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All well as AAC files that are stored on Up to 8 folders in depth. an iPod®. Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle . Up to 15 playlists. Album, or Shuffle Folder. Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode . Up to 40 sessions. (Shuffle Off): This is the Discs > . Playlists with an .m3u or default mode when a USB storage The radio plays discs that contain .wpl extension. device or iPod is first connected. both uncompressed CD audio and MP3/WMA files depending on which . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or 2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle .cda file extension. Songs): Shuffles all songs on the slot the disc is loaded into. USB storage device or iPod. The DVD Player only reads The CD Player supports: < (Shuffle Album): Shuffles uncompressed audio and ignores . Up to 512 files and folders. MP3/WMA files on a mixed all songs in the current album on . Up to 8 folders in depth. an iPod. mode disc. . The CD Player reads both Playlists with an .m3u or = (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all .wpl extension. songs in the current folder on a USB uncompressed audio and MP3/ storage device. WMA files on a mixed mode disc. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or Uncompressd audio is played .cda file extension. 7-30 Infotainment System

USB Supported File and Folder Root Directory folders or playlists. When displaying Structure The root directory of the disc is the name of the folder the radio The radio supports: treated as a folder. If the root displays ROOT. directory has compressed audio When the disc contains only . Up to 700 folders. files, the directory displays as playlists and compressed audio . Up to 8 folders in depth. F1 ROOT on the radio. files, but no folders, all files are . Up to 65,535 files. If a disc contains both located under the root folder. uncompressed CD audio and MP3/ The folder down and the folder up . Folder and file names up to buttons search playlists first and 64 bytes. WMA files, a folder under the root directory called CD accesses all of then goes to the root folder. When . Files with an .mp3 or .wma file the CD audio tracks on the disc. the radio displays the name of the extension. folder the radio displays ROOT. Empty Folder . AAC files stored on an iPod. Order of Play Folders that do not contain files are . FAT16 skipped, and the player advances to Compressed audio files are accessed in the following order: . FAT32 the next folder that contains files. . Playlists. No Folder . Files stored in the root directory. When the disc contains only compressed files, the files are . Files stored in folders in the root located under the root folder. directory. The next and previous folder function does not function on a disc that was recorded without Infotainment System 7-31

Tracks are played in the following File System and Naming Playing an MP3/WMA File order: The song name that displays is the From a Disc (In Either the DVD . Play begins from the first track in song name that is contained in the or CD Slot) the first playlist and continues ID3 tag. If the song name is not If a disc is inserted into the top DVD sequentially through all tracks present in the ID3 tag, then the slot, the rear seat operator can turn in each playlist. When the last radio displays the file name without on the video screen and use the track of the last playlist has the extension (such as .mp3) as the remote control to navigate the CD played, play continues from the track name. (tracks only). first track of the first playlist. Track names longer than f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA . Play begins from the first track 32 characters or four pages are files. in the first folder and continues shortened. Parts of words on the sequentially through all tracks in last page of text and the extension © SEEK: Press to go to the each folder. When the last track of the filename does not display. start of the track, if more than of the last folder has played, five seconds have played. Press to play continues from the first Preprogrammed Playlists go to the previous track if more then track of the first folder. Preprogrammed playlists that five seconds have played. Press and hold or press multiple times to When play enters a new folder, the were created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ continue moving backward through display does not automatically show tracks. the new folder name unless the software can be accessed, however, folder mode has been chosen as they cannot be edited using the ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next the default display. The new track radio. These playlists are treated track. Press and hold or press name displays. as special folders containing multiple times to continue moving compressed audio song files. forward through tracks. Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio with a USB port. 7-32 Infotainment System s REV (Reverse): Press and displays to play songs in random alphabetical order. Continue hold to reverse playback quickly. order. Press the same softkey again pressing either softkey below the Sound is heard at a reduced volume to turn off random play. arrow tab until the artist displays. and the elapsed time of the file h (Music Navigator): Press the To change from playback by artist to displays. Release s REV to softkey below h to play files in playback by album: resume playing. order by artist or album. 1. Press the softkey located below \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press The player scans the disc to sort the the Sort By tab. and hold to advance playback files by artist and album ID3 tag 2. Press one of the softkeys below quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced information. It can take several the album tab from the sort volume and the elapsed time of the minutes to scan the disc depending screen. file displays. Release \ FWD to on the number of files on the disc. 3. Press the softkey below the resume playing. The elapsed time The radio may begin playing while it back tab to return to the main of the file displays. is scanning in the background. music navigator screen. S c (Previous Folder): Press When the scan is finished, the disc The album name displays on the begins playing files in order by the softkey below S c to go to the second line between the arrows first track in the previous folder. artist. The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the and songs from the current album begins to play. Once all songs from c T (Next Folder): Press the display. Once all songs by that artist that album have played, the player softkey below c T to go to the first are played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order and moves to the next album in track in the next folder. alphabetical order on the CD and begins playing files by that artist. RDM (Random): Files on the disc begins playing MP3 files from that can be listened to in random, rather To listen to files by another artist, album. than sequential order. To use press the softkey located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to To exit music navigator mode, press random, press the softkey under the the softkey below the Back tab to the next or previous artist in RDM tab until Random Current Disc return to normal MP3 playback. Infotainment System 7-33

Connecting a USB Storage automatically powers off and will not ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next Device or iPod® charge or draw power from the track. Press and hold or press vehicle's battery. The USB Port can be used to multiple times to continue moving control an iPod or a USB storage If you have an older iPod model that forward through tracks. device. is not supported, it can still be used s REV (Reverse): Press and by connecting it to the Auxiliary hold to reverse playback quickly. To connect a USB storage device, Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm connect the device to the USB port Sound is heard at a reduced (1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the volume. Release s REV to located in the center console. Auxiliary Input Jack earlier for more ” resume playing. The elapsed To connect an iPod, connect one information. time of the file displays. end of the USB cable that came Using the Radio to Control a with the iPod to the iPod’s dock \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press connector and connect the other USB Storage Device or iPod and hold to advance playback end to the USB port located in the The radio can control a USB quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced center console. If the vehicle is on storage device or an iPod using the volume. Release \ FWD to and the USB connection works, radio buttons and knobs and display resume playing. The elapsed “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo song information on the radio’s time of the file displays. may appear on the iPod and iPod display. 4 appears on the radio's display. The (Information): Press to display f (Tune): Turn to select files. additional information about the iPod music appears on the radio’s display and begins playing. © SEEK: Press to go to the selected track. The iPod charges while it is start of the track, if more than connected to the vehicle if the ten seconds have played. Press vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY and hold or press multiple times to or ON/RUN position. When the continue moving backward through vehicle is turned off, the iPod tracks. 7-34 Infotainment System

Using Softkeys to Control a Back: Press the softkey below the 4. Turn f to scroll through the files USB Storage Device or iPod back tab to go back to the main in the selected folder. display screen on an iPod, or the The five softkeys below the radio root directory on a USB storage 5. Press f to select the file to be display are used to control the device. played. functions listed below. c (Folder View): Press the To skip through large lists, the five To use the softkeys: softkey below c to view the softkeys can be used to navigate in 1. Press the first or fifth softkey contents of the current folder on the the following order: below the radio display to USB drive. To browse and select . First softkey, first item in the list. display the functions listed files: below, or press the softkey . Second softkey, 1% through below the function if it is 1. Press the softkey below c . the list each time the softkey is currently displayed. pressed. 2. Turn f to scroll through the list . 2. Press the softkey below the tab of folders. Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. with the function on it to use that f function. 3. Press to select the folder. . Fourth softkey, 10% through the j (Pause): Press the softkey If there is more than one folder, list each time the softkey is repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the pressed. below j to pause the track. The tab folder is reached. appears raised when pause is being . Fifth softkey, end of the list. used. Press the softkey below j again to resume playback. Infotainment System 7-35 h (Music Navigator): Press To skip through large lists, the five ' (Repeat Track): Press the the softkey below h to view and softkeys can be used to navigate in softkey below to repeat one the following order: ' select a file on an iPod, using the track. The tab appears raised when iPod's menu system. Files are . First softkey, first item in the list. Repeat Track is being used. sorted by: . Second softkey, 1% through the Shuffle Functionality . Playlists list each time the softkey is pressed. To use Shuffle: . Artists . Third softkey, 5% through the list Press the softkey below > , . Albums each time the softkey is pressed. 2 , < or = to select . Genres between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All . Fourth softkey, 10% through the Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle . Songs list each time the softkey is Album, or Shuffle Folder. . Composers pressed. (Shuffle Off): This is the . Fifth softkey, end of the list. > To select files: default mode when a USB storage Repeat Functionality device or iPod is first connected. 1. Press the softkey below h . To use Repeat: 2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle 2. Turn f to scroll through the list Songs): Shuffles all songs on the of menus. Press the softkey below " or ' USB storage device or iPod. to select between Repeat All and 3. Press f to select the menu. Repeat Track. < (Shuffle Album): Shuffles all songs in the current album on 4. Turn f to scroll through " (Repeat All): Press the softkey an iPod. the folders or files in the below " to repeat all tracks. The (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all selected menu. = tab appears lowered when Repeat songs in the current folder on a USB All is being used. This is the default 5. Press f to select the file to be storage device. mode when a USB storage device played. or iPod is first connected. 7-36 Infotainment System

Auxiliary Devices To use an auxiliary input device, DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to to select between DVD, CD, The vehicle may have a 3.5 mm the radio's front auxiliary input jack. or Auxiliary. (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the O (Power/Volume): Turn . If an auxiliary input device is faceplate and for vehicles with a clockwise or counterclockwise to not connected, “No Aux Input USB port, it is located in the center increase or decrease the volume Device” displays. of the portable player. Additional console. . When a disc is in either slot, the volume adjustments might have to Using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) DVD/CD text tab and a message be made from the portable device showing the track or chapter Auxiliary Input Jack if the volume is not loud or soft number displays. enough. The auxiliary input jack is located on . If an auxiliary input device is not the lower right side of the faceplate. BAND: Press to listen to the radio connected, and a disc is in both This is not an audio output; do not when a portable audio device is the DVD slot and the CD slot the plug a headphone set into the front playing. The portable audio device DVD/CD AUX button only cycles auxiliary input jack. Connect an continues playing, so you might between the two sources and auxiliary input device such as an want to stop it or turn it off. does not indicate “No Aux Input iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to Device”. CD player, or cassette tape player, select between CD, or Auxiliary. etc. to the auxiliary input jack for . If a front auxiliary input device is use as another source for audio . When a CD is in the player connected, the DVD/CD AUX listening. the CD icon and a message button cycles through all showing the disc and/or track available options. Drivers are encouraged to number displays. set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P (Park). . If an auxiliary input device is not See Defensive Driving on connected, “No Input Device page 9‑2 for more information Found” displays. on driver distraction. Infotainment System 7-37

If a disc is inserted into top DVD USB Supported Devices Rear Seat slot, the rear seat operator can turn . USB Flash Drives on the video screen and use the Infotainment remote control to only navigate the . Portable USB Hard Drives CD tracks through the remote . Fifth generation or later iPod Rear Seat Entertainment control. . iPod nanos (RSE) System See “Using the Auxiliary Input . The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Jack(s)” later in this section, iPod touch Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, . iPod classic Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) The RSE system works with the Not all iPods and USB Drives are vehicle's audio system. The DVD System on page 7‑37 for more information. compatible with the USB port. player is part of the front radio. Make sure the iPod has the latest The RSE system includes a radio Using the USB Port firmware from Apple® for proper with a DVD player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks, two For vehicles with a USB port, the operation. iPod firmware can be ® wireless headphones, and a connector is located in the center updated using the latest iTunes remote control. See Operation on console. application. See www.apple.com/ itunes. page 7‑2 for more information on Radios with a USB port can control the vehicle's audio/DVD system. a USB storage device or an iPod® For help with identifying your iPod, using the radio buttons and knobs. go to www.apple.com/support. See MP3 (Radio with CD and Radio with CD/USB) on page 7‑23 or MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) on page 7‑29 for information about how to connect and control a USB storage device or an iPod. 7-38 Infotainment System

Before Driving Parental Control connected to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle The RSE is designed for rear seat The RSE system may have a has this feature. The wireless passengers only. The driver cannot Parental Control feature, depending headphones have an On/Off button, safely view the video screen while on the radio. To enable Parental channel 1/2 switch, and a volume driving and should not try to do so. Control, press and hold the radio control. Switch the headphones to power button for more than In severe or extreme weather Off when not in use. conditions the RSE system might or two seconds to stop all system Push the power button to turn on might not work until the temperature features such as: radio, video the headphones. An indicator light is within the operating range. The screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. located on the headphones comes operating range for the RSE system While Parental Control is on, Q on. If the light does not come on, is above −4°F (−20°C) or below displays. the batteries might need to be 140°F (60°C). If the temperature of When the radio is turned back on, replaced. Intermittent sound or static the vehicle is outside of this range, Parental Control is unlocked. on the headphones can also be heat or cool the vehicle until the an indication of weak batteries. temperature is within the operating Headphones See Battery Replacement later in range of the RSE system. “ ” The RSE includes two 2-channel this section for more information. wireless headphones that are The headphones may automatically dedicated to this system. Channel 1 turn off after four hours of is dedicated to the video screen, continuous use. while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones are To adjust the volume on the used to listen to media such as headphones, use the volume CDs, DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As, control located on the right side. radio, any auxiliary source Infotainment System 7-39

Infrared transmitters are located Notice: Do not store the Battery Replacement at the rear of the RSE overhead headphones in heat or direct To change the batteries on the console. The headphones shut off sunlight. This could damage the headphones: automatically to save the battery headphones and repairs will not power if the RSE system and RSA be covered by the warranty. 1. Turn the screw to loosen the are shut off or if the headphones are Storage in extreme cold can battery door located on the left out of range of the transmitters for weaken the batteries. Keep the side of the headphones. Slide more than three minutes. Moving too headphones stored in a cool, the battery door open. far forward or stepping out of the dry place. 2. Replace the two batteries in the vehicle, can cause the headphones If the foam ear pads attached to compartment. Make sure that to lose the audio signal. the headphones become worn or they are installed correctly, using For optimal audio performance, the damaged, the pads can be replaced the diagram on the inside of the headphones must be worn correctly. separately from the headphone set. battery compartment. Headphones should be worn with See your dealer/retailer for more 3. Replace the battery door and the headband over the top of the information. tighten the door screw. head for best audio reception. Headphones should be stored in the The symbol L (Left) appears on the If the headphones are to be stored front floor console and not in the for a long period of time, remove the upper left side, above the ear pad front seat back pocket. Headphone and should be positioned on the left batteries and keep them in a cool, damage can occur when the second dry place. ear. The symbol R (Right) appears row seats are folded forward. on the upper right side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on the right ear. 7-40 Infotainment System

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks The A/V jacks are color coded to How to Change the RSE Video match typical home entertainment Screen Settings system equipment. The yellow The screen display mode (normal, jack (A) is for the video input. The full, and zoom), screen brightness, white jack (B) is for the left audio and setup menu language can be input. The red jack (C) is for the changed from the on screen setup right audio input. menu by using the remote control. Power for auxiliary devices is not To change a setting: supplied by the radio system. 1. Press z . To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect an external 2. Use n , q , p , o and r to auxiliary device to the color-coded navigate and use the A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary setup menu. device and the video screen power z The A/V jacks, located on the rear on. If the video screen is in the DVD 3. Press again to remove the of the floor console, allow audio player mode, pressing the AUX setup menu from the screen. or video signals to be connected (auxiliary) button on the remote Audio Output from an auxiliary device such as control, switches the video screen a camcorder or a video game from the DVD player mode to the Audio from the DVD player or unit to the RSE system. Adapter auxiliary device. The radio can auxiliary inputs can be heard connectors or cables (not supplied) listen to the audio of the connected through the following sources: might be required to connect the auxiliary device by sourcing to . Wireless Headphones auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. auxiliary. See Auxiliary Devices on Refer to the manufacturer s . ’ page 7‑36 for more information. Vehicle Speakers instructions for proper usage. . Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system, if the vehicle has this feature. Infotainment System 7-41

The RSE system always transmits Video Screen Notice: Avoid directly touching the audio signal to the wireless the video screen, as damage may The video screen is located in the headphones, if there is audio occur. See Cleaning the Video overhead console. When the video “ available. See Headphones earlier Screen later in this section for “ ” screen is not in use, push it up into ” in this section for more information. more information. its locked position. The DVD player is capable of To use the video screen: Remote Control outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the RSA 1. Push the release button located To use the remote control, aim it at system, if the vehicle has this on the overhead console. the transmitter window at the rear of feature. The DVD player can be the overhead console and press the 2. Move the screen to the desired desired button. Direct sunlight or selected as an audio source on the position. RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio very bright light could affect the (RSA) System on page 7‑46 for If a DVD is playing and the screen ability of the RSE transmitter to more information. is raised to its locked position, the receive signals from the remote screen remains on; this is normal, control. If the remote control does When a device is connected to the and the DVD continues to play not seem to be working, the A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary through the previous audio source. batteries might need to be replaced. input jack, if the vehicle has this P See “Battery Replacement” later in feature, the rear seat passengers Press on the remote control or eject the disc to turn off the screen. this section. Objects blocking the are able to hear audio from the line of sight could also affect the auxiliary device through the wireless The infrared receivers for the function of the remote control. or wired headphones. The front seat wireless headphones and the passengers are able to listen to remote control are located at the playback from this device through rear of the overhead console. the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio. 7-42 Infotainment System

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD v (Title): Press to return the DVD c (Stop): Press to stop playing, slot, the remote control O button to the main menu of the DVD. This rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. can be used to turn on the video function could vary for each disc. Press twice to return to the screen display and start the disc. y (Main Menu): Press to access beginning of the DVD. The radio can also turn on the video the DVD menu. The DVD menu is s (Play/Pause): Press to start screen display. See Operation on different on every DVD. Use the playing a DVD. Press while a DVD page 7‑2 for more information. navigation arrows to move the is playing to pause it. Press again to Notice: Storing the remote cursor around the DVD menu. After continue playing the DVD. control in a hot area or in direct making a selection press the enter When the DVD is playing, sunlight can damage it, and the button. This button only operates depending on the radio, play may repairs will not be covered by the when using a DVD. be slowed down by pressing s warranty. Storage in extreme cold n , q, p, o (Menu Navigation then [ . The DVD continues can weaken the batteries. Keep Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to the remote control stored in a navigate through a menu. playing in a slow play mode. cool, dry place. Depending on the radio, perform r (Enter): Press to select the s Remote Control Buttons reverse slow play by pressing choice that is highlighted in r O any menu. then . To cancel slow play mode, (Power): Press to turn the s video screen on and off. z (Display Menu): Press to adjust press again. P (Illumination): Press to turn the brightness, screen display mode t (Previous Track/Chapter): the remote control backlight on. (normal, full, or zoom), and display Press to return to the start of the The backlight automatically times the language menu. current track or chapter. Press again out after seven to ten seconds if no q (Return): Press to exit the to go to the previous track or other button is pressed while the current active menu and return to chapter. This button might not work backlight is on. the previous menu. This button when the DVD is playing the operates only when the display copyright information or the menu or a DVD menu is active. previews. Infotainment System 7-43 u (Next Track/Chapter): Press e (Audio): Press to change audio 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): to go to the beginning of the next tracks on DVDs that have this The numeric keypad provides the chapter or track. This button might feature when the DVD is playing. capability of direct chapter or track not work when the DVD is playing The format and content of this number selection. the copyright information or the function vary for each disc. \ (Clear): Press within previews. { (Subtitles): Press to turn three seconds after entering a r (Fast Reverse): Press to ON/OFF subtitles and to move numeric selection, to clear all quickly reverse the DVD or CD. through subtitle options when a numerical inputs. To stop fast reversing a DVD video, DVD is playing. The format and } 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press press s . To stop fast reversing content of this function vary for to select chapter or track numbers each disc. a DVD audio or CD, release r . greater than nine. Press this button This button might not work when AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch before entering the number. the DVD is playing the copyright the system between the DVD player If the remote control becomes lost information or the previews. and an auxiliary source. or damaged, a new universal [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast d (Camera): Press to change remote control can be purchased. forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast camera angles on DVDs that have If this happens, make sure the this feature when a DVD is playing. universal remote control uses a forwarding a DVD video, press s . ® The format and content of this Toshiba code set. To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio function vary for each disc. or CD, release [ . This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. 7-44 Infotainment System

Battery Replacement Tips and Troubleshooting Chart To change the remote control Problem Recommended Action batteries: No power. The ignition might not be turned 1. Slide the rear cover back, on the ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY. remote control. The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings in 2. Replace the two batteries in the There are black borders on the top the setup menu by pressing the compartment. Make sure that and bottom or on both sides or it display menu button on the remote they are installed correctly, using looks stretched out. control. the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input or scrolls. connections at both devices. 3. Replace the battery cover. The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no If the remote control is to be stored obstruction between the remote for a long period of time, remove the control and the transmitter window. batteries and keep them in a cool, Check the batteries to make sure dry place. they are not dead or installed incorrectly. Infotainment System 7-45

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd) DVD Display Error Messages Problem Recommended Action The DVD display error message depends on which radio the vehicle After stopping the player, I push If the stop button was pressed one has. The video screen might display Play but sometimes the DVD starts time, the DVD player resumes one of the following: where I left off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD was beginning. stopped. If the stop button was Disc Load/Eject Error: This pressed two times the DVD player message displays when there are begins to play from the beginning of disc load or eject problems. the DVD. Disc Format Error: This message The auxiliary source is running but Check that the RSE video screen is displays if the disc is inserted with there is no picture or sound. in the auxiliary source mode. the disc label wrong side up, or if Check the auxiliary input the disc is damaged. connections at both devices. Disc Region Error: This message Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low displays if the disc is not from a audio cuts out or buzzes. batteries, reception range, and correct region. interference from cellular telephone No Disc Inserted: This message towers or by using a cellular displays if no disc is present when telephone in the vehicle. the Z EJECT button is pressed on Check that the headphones are the radio. on correctly using the L (left) and R (right) on the headphones. I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer/retailer for headphones. assistance. The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen is picture or sound. sourced to the DVD player. 7-46 Infotainment System

DVD Distortion Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Audio can be heard through wired headphones (not included) plugged Video distortion can occur when System into the jacks on the RSA. If the operating cellular phones, scanners, For vehicles with Rear Seat Audio vehicle has this feature, audio can CB radios, Global Position Systems (RSA), rear seat passengers can also be heard on Channel 2 of the (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, listen to and control any of the wireless headphones. or walkie talkies. music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, The audio system mutes the rear It might be necessary to turn off the or other auxiliary sources. The rear speakers when the RSA audio is DVD player when operating one of seat passengers can only control active through the headphones. these devices in or near the vehicle. the music sources the front seat To listen to an iPod or portable *Excludes the OnStar® System. passengers are not listening to (except on some radios where dual audio device through the RSA, Cleaning the RSE Overhead control is allowed). For example, attach the iPod or portable audio Console rear seat passengers can control device to the front auxiliary input a CD and listen to it through the (if available), located on the front When cleaning the RSE overhead headphones, while the driver listens audio system. Turn the iPod on, console surface, use only a clean to the radio through the front then choose the front auxiliary input cloth dampened with clean water. speakers. The rear seat passengers with the RSA SRCE button. Cleaning the Video Screen have control of the volume for each set of headphones. Use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Use care when The RSA functions operate even directly touching or cleaning the when the main radio is off. The front screen, as damage could result. audio system displays X when the RSA is on, and disappears from the display when it is off. Infotainment System 7-47

While listening to a disc, press ¨ to go to the next track or chapter on the disc. Press © to go back to the start of the current track or chapter (if more than ten seconds have played). This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc. When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press © or ¨ to perform a cursor up or down on the P (Power): Press to turn the RSA © ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the menu. Hold © or ¨ to perform a on or off. previous or to the next station and cursor left or right on the menu. Volume: Turn to increase or to stay there. This function is inactive, decrease the volume of the wired with some radios, if the front seat headphones. The left knob controls passengers are listening to the the left headphones and the right radio. knob controls the right headphones. Press and hold © or ¨ until SRCE (Source): Press to select the display flashes to tune to an between the radio (AM/FM/XM™), individual station. The display stops CD, and if the vehicle has these flashing after the buttons have features, DVD, front auxiliary, and not been pushed for more than rear auxiliary. two seconds. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. 7-48 Infotainment System

PROG (Program): Press to go to Phone Voice Recognition the next preset radio station or The Bluetooth system uses voice channel set on the main radio. recognition to interpret voice This function is inactive, with some Bluetooth commands to dial phone numbers radios, if the front seat passengers Vehicles with a Bluetooth system and name tags. are listening to the radio. can use a Bluetooth capable cell Noise: Keep interior noise levels to When a CD or DVD audio disc is phone with a Hands Free Profile to a minimum. The system may not playing, press PROG to go to the make and receive phone calls. The recognize voice commands if there beginning of the CD or DVD audio. system can be used while the key is is too much background noise. This function is inactive, with some in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY radios, if the front seat passengers position. The range of the Bluetooth When to Speak: A short tone are listening to the disc. system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft.). sounds after the system responds Not all phones support all functions, indicating when it is waiting for a When a disc is playing in the CD or and not all phones are guaranteed voice command. Wait until the tone DVD changer, press PROG to to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth and then speak. select the next disc, if multiple discs system. See gm.com/bluetooth for are loaded. This function is inactive, more information on compatible How to Speak: Speak clearly in a with some radios, if the front seat phones. calm and natural voice. passengers are listening to the disc. When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press PROG to perform the ENTER menu function. Infotainment System 7-49

Audio System Pairing . Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the in-vehicle When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth A Bluetooth enabled cell phone Bluetooth system at a time. system, sound comes through must be paired to the in-vehicle the vehicle's front audio system Bluetooth system first and then . Pairing should only need to be speakers and overrides the audio connected to the vehicle before it completed once, unless changes system. Use the audio system can be used. See the cell phone to the pairing information have volume knob, during a call, to manufacturers user guide for been made or the phone is change the volume level. The Bluetooth functions before pairing deleted. adjusted volume level remains in the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone To link to a different paired phone, memory for later calls. To prevent is not connected, calls will be made see Linking to a Different Phone missed calls, a minimum volume using OnStar® Hands-Free Calling, later in this section. level is used if the volume is turned if available. Refer to the OnStar down too low. owner's guide for more information. Pairing a Phone Bluetooth Controls Pairing Information: 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system . Up to five cell phones can be Use the buttons located on the responds with Ready followed paired to the in-vehicle Bluetooth “ ” steering wheel to operate the by a tone. in-vehicle Bluetooth system. system. 2. Say Bluetooth . The system See Steering Wheel Controls on . The pairing process is disabled “ ” responds with Bluetooth ready page 5‑3 for more information. when the vehicle is moving. “ ” followed by a tone. b g (Push To Talk) : Press to . The in-vehicle Bluetooth system 3. Say Pair . The system responds answer incoming calls, to confirm automatically links with the first “ ” with instructions and a four digit system information, and to start available paired cell phone in the PIN number. The PIN number speech recognition. order the phone was paired. will be used in Step 4. c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a call, or to cancel an operation. 7-50 Infotainment System

4. Start the Pairing process on the Listing All Paired and Connected 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks cell phone that will be paired to Phones which phone to delete followed the vehicle. Reference the cell by a tone. 1. Press and hold b g for phone manufacturers user guide 4. Say the name of the phone for information on this process. two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed to be deleted. If the phone name Locate the device named by a tone. is unknown, use the “List” “General Motors” in the list on command for a list of all paired the cellular phone and follow the 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system phones. The system responds instructions on the cell phone to responds with “Bluetooth ready” with “Would you like to delete enter the four digit PIN number followed by a tone. ? Yes or No” that was provided in Step 3. 3. Say “List”. The system lists all followed by a tone. 5. The system prompts for a name the paired Bluetooth devices. 5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. for the phone. Use a name that If a phone is connected to the The system responds with best describes the phone. This vehicle, the system will say “OK, deleting ”. name will be used to indicate “Is connected” after the which phone is connected. The connected phone. Linking to a Different Phone system then confirms the name Deleting a Paired Phone 1. Press and hold b g for provided. two seconds. The system 1. Press and hold for 6. The system responds with b g responds with “Ready” followed two seconds. The system “ has been by a tone. responds with Ready followed successfully paired” after the “ ” by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system pairing process is complete. responds with “Bluetooth ready” 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system followed by a tone. additional phones to be paired. responds with “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. Infotainment System 7-51

3. Say “Change phone”. The Using the Store Command number is correct, say system responds with “Please The store command allows a phone “Yes”. If the number is not wait while I search for other number to be stored without correct, say “No”. The phones”. entering the digits individually. system will ask for the number to be re-entered. . If another phone is found, the response will be 1. Press and hold b g for 4. After the system stores the “ is now two seconds. The system phone number, it responds with connected”. responds with “Ready” followed “Please say the name tag” by a tone. followed by a tone. . If another phone is not found, the original phone 2. Say “Store”. The system 5. Say a name tag for the phone remains connected. responds with “Store, number number. The name tag is please” followed by a tone. recorded and the system Storing Name Tags 3. Say the complete phone number responds with “About to store The system can store up to thirty to be stored at once with no . Does that phone numbers as name tags that pauses. sound OK?”. are shared between the Bluetooth . If the system recognizes . If the name tag does not and OnStar systems. the number it responds with sound correct, say “No” and The system uses the following “OK, Storing” and repeats repeat Step 5. commands to store and retrieve the phone number. . If the name tag sounds phone numbers: . If the system is unsure it correct, say “Yes” and the . Store recognizes the phone name tag is stored. After the number is stored the . Digit Store number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the system returns to the . Directory number followed by “Please main menu. say yes or no”. If the 7-52 Infotainment System

Using the Digit Store Command 4. After the complete number Using the Directory Command The digit store command allows a has been entered, say “Store”. The directory command lists all of phone number to be stored by The system responds with the name tags stored by the system. entering the digits individually. “Please say the name tag” To use the directory command: followed by a tone. 1. Press and hold b g for 5. Say a name tag for the phone 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system number. The name tag is two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed recorded and the system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. responds with “About to by a tone. 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system store . Does 2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with “Please say the that sound OK?”. responds with “Directory” and first digit to store” followed by . If the name tag does not then plays back all of the stored a tone. sound correct, say “No” and name tags. When the list is 3. Say the first digit to be stored. repeat Step 5. complete, the system returns to the main menu. The system will repeat back the . If the name tag sounds digit it heard followed by a tone. correct, say “Yes” and the Deleting Name Tags Continue entering digits until the name tag is stored. After number to be stored is complete. The system uses the following the number is stored the commands to delete name tags: . If an unwanted number is system returns to the recognized by the system, main menu. . Delete say “Clear” at any time to . Delete all name tags clear the last number. Using the Delete Command . To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system, The delete command allows specific name tags to be deleted. say “Verify” at any time and the system will repeat them. Infotainment System 7-53

To use the delete command: Using the Delete All Name Tags Making a Call Command 1. Press and hold b g for Calls can be made using the two seconds. The system The delete all name tags command following commands: deletes all stored phone book name responds with “Ready” followed . Dial by a tone. tags and route name tags for OnStar (if present). . Digit Dial 2. Say “Delete”. The system . responds with “Delete, please To use the delete all name tags Call say the name tag” followed by command: . Re-dial a tone. 1. Press and hold b g for Using the Dial Command 3. Say the name tag to be deleted. two seconds. The system The system responds with responds with “Ready” followed 1. Press and hold b g for “Would you like to delete, ? Please say yes or no”. 2. Say Delete all name tags . “ ” “ ” by a tone. . If the name tag is correct, The system responds with say “Yes” to delete the “You are about to delete all 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds name tag. The system name tags stored in your with “Dial using ”. responds with “OK, deleting phone directory and your route “Number please” followed by , returning to destination directory. Are you a tone. the main menu.” sure you want to do this? Please say yes or no. . If the name tag is incorrect, ” say “No”. The system . Say “Yes” to delete all responds with “No. OK, let's name tags. try again, please say the . Say “No” to cancel the name tag.” function and return to the main menu. 7-54 Infotainment System

3. Say the entire number without Using the Digit Dial Command 4. Continue entering digits until the pausing. number to be dialed is complete. 1. Press and hold b g for After the whole number has . If the system recognizes two seconds. The system the number, it responds been entered, say “Dial”. The responds with “Ready” followed system responds with “OK, with “OK, Dialing” and dials by a tone. the number. Dialing” and dials the number. 2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system . If an unwanted number is . If the system does not responds with “Digit dial using recognized by the system, recognize the number, it , please say the confirms the numbers say “Clear” at any time to first digit to dial” followed by clear the last number. followed by a tone. If the a tone. number is correct, say . To hear all of the numbers “Yes”. The system responds 3. Say the digit to be dialed one at recognized by the system, with “OK, Dialing” and dials a time. Following each digit, the say “Verify” at any time and the number. If the number system will repeat back the digit the system will repeat them. is not correct, say “No”. it heard followed by a tone. The system will ask for the Using the Call Command number to be re-entered. 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using . Please say the name tag” followed by a tone. Infotainment System 7-55

3. Say the name tag of the person Using the Re-dial Command Call Waiting to call. 1. Press and hold b g for Call waiting must be supported on . If the system clearly two seconds. The system the Bluetooth phone and enabled by recognizes the name tag it responds with “Ready” followed the wireless service carrier to work. responds with “OK, calling, by a tone. ” and dials the . Press b g to answer an number. 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The incoming call when another call system responds with “Re-dial is active. The original call is . If the system is unsure it using ” and dials placed on hold. recognizes the right name the last number called from the tag, it confirms the name connected Bluetooth phone. . Press b g again to return to tag followed by a tone. the original call. If the name tag is correct, Once connected, the person called . To ignore the incoming call, say “Yes”. The system will be heard through the audio responds with OK, calling, speakers. continue with the original call “ with no action. ” and dials the Receiving a Call number. If the name tag . Press c x to disconnect the When an incoming call is received, is not correct, say “No”. current call and switch to the call the audio system mutes and a ring The system will ask for the on hold. name tag to be re-entered. tone is heard in the vehicle. Once connected, the person called . Press b g and begin speaking will be heard through the audio to answer the call. speakers. . Press c x to ignore a call. 7-56 Infotainment System

Three-Way Calling Muting a Call To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone Three-Way Calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside supported on the Bluetooth phone the vehicle can be muted so that the During a call with the audio in the and enabled by the wireless service person on the other end of the call vehicle: carrier to work. cannot hear them. 1. Press b g . The system 1. While on a call press b g . The To Mute a call responds with “Ready” followed system responds with Ready by a tone. “ ” 1. Press . The system followed by a tone. b g responds with “Ready” followed 2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system 2. Say “Three-way call”. by a tone. responds with “Transferring call” The system responds with and the audio will switch from 2. Say Mute Call . The system “Three-way call, please say “ ” the vehicle to the cell phone. dial or call . responds with “Call muted”. ” To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle 3. Use the dial or call command to To Cancel Mute Bluetooth System dial the number of the third party 1. Press b g . The system The cellular phone must be paired to be called. responds with “Ready” followed and connected with the Bluetooth 4. Once the call is connected, by a tone. system before a call can be transferred. The connection process press b g to link all the callers 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. together. The system responds with can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or “Resuming call”. Ending a Call ACC/ACCESSORY position. Transferring a Call Press c x to end a call. During a call with the audio on the Audio can be transferred between cell phone, press b g for more the in-vehicle Bluetooth system and than two seconds. The audio the cell phone. switches from the cell phone to the vehicle. Infotainment System 7-57

Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency 3. Say the number to send. Voice Pass-Thru allows access to (DTMF) Tones . If the system clearly the voice recognition commands on The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can recognizes the number it the cell phone. See the cell phone send numbers and numbers stored responds with “OK, Sending manufacturers user guide to see if as name tags during a call. This is Number” and the dial tones the cell phone supports this feature. used when calling a menu driven are sent and the call This feature can be used to verbally phone system. Account numbers continues. access contacts stored in the cell can be programmed into the . If the system is not sure it phone. phonebook for retrieval during recognized the number menu driven calls. 1. Press and hold b g for properly, it responds “Dial two seconds. The system Sending a Number During a Call Number, Please say yes or no? followed by a tone. responds with “Ready” followed ” by a tone. 1. Press b g . The system If the number is correct, say responds with “Ready” followed “Yes”. The system responds 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system by a tone. with “OK, Sending Number” responds with “Bluetooth ready” and the dial tones are sent 2. Say Dial . The system responds followed by a tone. “ ” and the call continues. with “Say a number to send 3. Say “Voice”. The system tones” followed by a tone. Sending a Stored Name Tag responds with “OK, accessing During a Call ”. 1. Press . The system . The cell phone's normal b g prompt messages will go responds with “Ready” followed through its cycle according by a tone. to the phone's operating 2. Say “Send name tag.” The instructions. system responds with “Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone. 7-58 Infotainment System

3. Say the name tag to send. Clearing the System . If the system clearly Unless information is deleted out recognizes the name tag it of the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, responds with “OK, Sending it will be retained indefinitely. This ” and the dial includes all saved name tags in the tones are sent and the call phonebook and phone pairing continues. information. For information on how . If the system is not sure it to delete this information, see the recognized the name tag above sections on Deleting a Paired properly, it responds “Dial Phone and Deleting Name Tags. , Please say Other Information yes or no? followed by a ” ® tone. If the name tag is The Bluetooth word mark and ® correct, say “Yes”. The logos are owned by the Bluetooth system responds with “OK, SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks Sending ” and by General Motors is under license. the dial tones are sent and Other trademarks and trade names the call continues. are those of their respective owners. See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13‑17 for FCC information. Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls Climate Control Systems The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with Climate Control Systems this system. Climate Control Systems ...... 8-1 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...... 8-4 Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Control Only) ...... 8-10 Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) ...... 8-11 Air Vents Air Vents ...... 8-12

A. Fan Control 9 (Off): Turn the fan control all the B. Temperature Control way counterclockwise to turn the front climate control system off. C. Air Delivery Mode Control 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise D. Air Conditioning or counterclockwise to increase or E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) decrease the fan speed. F. Recirculation G. Rear Window Defogger 8-2 Climate Controls

Temperature Control: Turn automatically selects outside air. # (Air Conditioning): Press to clockwise or counterclockwise to Recirculation cannot be selected turn the air conditioning system on increase or decrease the while in floor mode. or off. An indicator light comes on temperature of the air flowing from - (Defog): This clears the when A/C is on. The air conditioning the system. windows of fog or moisture. Air is system does not operate when the Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn directed to the windshield, floor outside temperature is below 4°C clockwise or counterclockwise to outlets, and side window vents. (40°F). The indicator light flashes change the current airflow mode. When this mode is selected, the three times and turns off when outside conditions affect air By positioning the right knob system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning unless the conditioning operation. This is between two modes, a combination normal. of those two modes is selected. outside temperature is less than 4°C (40°F). Recirculation cannot be For quicker cool down on hot days: H (Vent): Air is directed to the selected while in the defog mode. instrument panel outlets. Do not drive the vehicle until all the 1. Open the windows to let hot air escape. ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided windows are clear. between the instrument panel and 0 (Defrost): This clears the 2. Select H mode. floor outlets. Some air is directed windshield of fog or frost, more towards the windshield and side quickly. Air is directed to the 3. Select # . window outlets. Cooler air is windshield and side window vents, 4. Select the coolest temperature. directed to the upper outlets and with some to the floor vents. In this 5. Select the highest fan speed. warmer air to the floor outlets. mode, outside air is pulled inside 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the the vehicle. Recirculation cannot be 6. Close the windows after the hot floor outlets, with some of the air selected while in the defrost mode. air has escaped. directed to the windshield, side The air conditioning system runs 7. Once the vehicle's interior window, and second row floor automatically in this setting, unless temperature is below the outside outlets. In this mode, the system the outside temperature is less than 4°C (40°F). Do not drive the vehicle temperature, select @ mode until all the windows are clear. for faster cooling. Climate Controls 8-3

Using recirculation for long periods The recirculation mode cannot be < (Rear Window Defogger): of time could cause the air inside of used with floor, defrost, or defogging Press to turn the rear window the vehicle to become too dry. To modes. If recirculation is selected in defogger on or off. The rear window prevent this from happening, after these modes, the indicator flashes defogger stays on for about the inside of the vehicle has cooled, three times and turns off. The air 10 minutes, before automatically turn the recirculation mode off. conditioning also comes on when turning off. The defogger will also The air conditioning system this mode is activated unless the turn off when the engine is removes moisture from the air, so outside air temperature is less than turned off. water might drip under the vehicle 4°C (40°F). While in recirculation mode the windows can fog when Do not drive the vehicle until all the while idling or after turning off the windows are clear. engine. This is normal. the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog For vehicles with heated outside @ (Recirculation): Press to turn or defrost mode and increase the rearview mirrors, fog or frost is the recirculation mode on or off. An fan speed. cleared from the surface of the indicator light comes on when mirror when is pressed. recirculation is on. When the engine REAR (Rear Climate Control): < is turned off, the recirculation mode Press to turn the rear heating and Notice: Do not use anything automatically turns off and must be air conditioning on or off. See Rear sharp on the inside of the rear re-selected when the engine is Climate Control System (Rear window. If you do, you could cut turned on again. Climate Control Only) on page 8‑10 or damage the warming grid, and or Rear Climate Control System the repairs would not be covered This mode recirculates and helps to (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) by the vehicle warranty. Do not quickly cool the air inside the on page 8‑11. attach a temporary vehicle vehicle. It can be used to prevent license, tape, a decal or anything outside air and odors from entering Rear Window Defogger similar to the defogger grid. the vehicle. The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window. 8-4 Climate Controls

Dual Automatic Climate Control System Display Function The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with Each time the temperature, mode, this system. or fan control buttons are pressed, the climate control display shows that function along with the inside temperature setting. The outside temperature is displayed on the instrument panel cluster. O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control system on or off. While the system is off, outside air still enters through the floor outlets, but the air delivery mode can be adjusted. The climate control system will also turn on if either the fan control, A. Fan Control H. Display defrost, AUTO, or air conditioning B. AUTO I. Power (On/Off) buttons are pressed. C. Defrost J. Rear Window Defogger D. Recirculation K. Air Conditioning E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) L. PASS (Passenger) F. Air Delivery Mode Control M. Passenger Side Temperature G. Driver Side Temperature Control Control Climate Controls 8-5

Automatic Operation quickly cool the vehicle. The Temperature Control recirculation indicator light will AUTO (Automatic): The system The driver and passenger side come on. automatically controls the inside temperature buttons are used to temperature, the air delivery, and 2. Set the temperature for the adjust the temperature of the air the fan speed. driver and passenger. coming through the system. The temperature can be adjusted even if To use automatic mode: To find a comfortable setting, start with a 22°C (73°F) the system is turned off since 1. Press the AUTO button. temperature setting and allow outside air still enters the vehicle, When AUTO is selected, the about 20 minutes for the system unless the recirculation mode is current temperature(s) selected to regulate. Use the driver's side selected. See “Recirculation” later in and AUTO is shown on the or passenger side temperature this section. display. The current air delivery buttons to adjust the Driver Side Temperature mode and fan speed also temperature setting as Control: Press the + or − buttons appear for approximately necessary. The system will to increase or decrease the driver five seconds. remain at the selected setting. side temperature. The driver side When AUTO is selected, the air Choosing the warmest or coolest temperature display will show the conditioning and air inlet are temperatures does not cause the temperature setting. automatically controlled. The air vehicle to heat or cool more conditioning runs when the quickly. outside temperature is over 4°C To avoid blowing cold air in cold (40°F). The system is weather, the system delays automatically set to outside air, turning on the fan until warm air unless it is hot outside and then is available. Press the fan the air inlet changes to control to override this delay and recirculation mode to help select the fan speed. 8-6 Climate Controls

Passenger Side Temperature The air delivery mode remains in H (Vent): Air is directed to the Control: Press the + or − buttons automatic control. The fan setting instrument panel outlets. to increase or decrease the still displays, but the word AUTO no passenger side temperature. The longer displays, and the AUTO ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided passenger side display will show the button indicator light turns off. between the instrument panel and temperature setting. floor outlets. Some air is directed H / G (Air Delivery Mode towards the windshield and side PASS (Passenger): Press to set Control): Press to change the window outlets. Cooler air is the passenger temperature to match direction of the airflow in the vehicle. directed to the upper outlets and the driver temperature setting. The Repeatedly press H or G until the warmer air to the floor outlets. PASS indicator will turn off. When desired mode appears on the the passenger temperature setting 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the display. Pressing a mode button floor outlets, with some of the air is different than the driver setting, while the system is off changes the the PASS indicator comes on. directed to the windshield, side air delivery mode without turning the window, and second row floor Manual Operation system on. Press a mode button outlets. In this mode, the system while in automatic control to place uses outside air. The air delivery mode or fan speed the system into manual control. can be manually adjusted. The air delivery mode setting still D / C (Fan Control): Press to displays, but the word AUTO no increase or decrease the fan speed. longer displays, and the AUTO button indicator light turns off. Pressing D or C while in automatic control places the fan speed under manual control. Climate Controls 8-7

- (Defog): This mode clears the Do not drive the vehicle until all the Air Conditioning windows are clear. windows of fog or moisture. Air is # (Air Conditioning): Press to directed to the windshield, floor While in defrost mode, if the PASS turn the air conditioning (A/C) on outlets, and side window vents. button is pressed, the PASS button and off. An indicator light comes on When this mode is selected, the indicator flashes three times to when A/C is on. system turns off recirculation and show that the passenger climate The A/C does not work when the runs the air conditioning compressor control system cannot be activated. outside temperature is below 4°C unless the outside temperature is If the passenger temperature less than 4°C (40°F). Do not drive buttons are adjusted while in defrost (40°F). If # is pressed the indicator the vehicle until all the windows are mode, the driver temperature flashes three times and turns off to clear. indicator will change. The show that the A/C mode is not 0 (Defrost): Press to turn the passenger temperature will not be available. If the A/C is on and the defrost on or off. This mode quickly displayed. outside temperature drops below a clears the windshield of fog or frost. temperature which is too cool for air When returning to bi-level, vent, conditioning to be effective, the A/C Air is directed to the windshield, or floor mode, the previous side window, and floor vents. In this indicator turns off to show that the temperature settings displays in A/C mode has been canceled. mode, outside air is pulled inside place of any change made while in the vehicle. The air conditioning defrost mode. On hot days, open the windows system runs automatically in this briefly to let hot inside air escape. setting, unless the outside This helps reduce the time it takes temperature is less than 4°C (40°F). for the interior of the vehicle to cool down. 8-8 Climate Controls

The air conditioning system is cold and damp. To clear the fog, For vehicles with heated outside removes moisture from the air, so select either the defog or defrost rearview mirrors, fog or frost is water might drip under the vehicle mode and increase the fan speed. cleared from the surface of the while idling or after turning off the REAR: Press to turn the rear mirror when the rear window defog engine. This is normal. heating and air conditioning on or button is pressed. @ (Recirculation): Press to turn off. See Rear Climate Control Notice: Do not use a razor blade the recirculation mode on or off. An System (Rear Climate Control Only) or sharp object to clear the inside indicator light comes on when on page 8‑10 or Rear Climate rear window. Do not adhere recirculation is on. When the engine Control System (Rear Climate with anything to the defogger grid is turned off, the recirculation mode Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑11. lines in the rear glass. These automatically turns off and must be actions may damage the rear re-selected when the engine is Rear Window Defogger defogger. Repairs would not be turned on again. The rear window defogger uses a covered by your warranty. This mode recirculates and helps to warming grid to remove fog from the quickly cool the air inside the rear window. vehicle. It can be used to prevent < (Rear Window Defogger): outside air and odors from entering Press to turn the rear window the vehicle. defogger on or off. The rear window The recirculation mode cannot be defogger stays on for about used with floor, defog, or defrosting 10 minutes, before turning off. The modes. If recirculation is selected in defogger also turns off when the these modes, the indicator flashes engine is turned off. Do not drive the three times and turns off. The air vehicle until all the windows are conditioning compressor also comes clear. on when this mode is activated. While in recirculation mode the windows can fog when the weather Climate Controls 8-9

Sensors The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain comfort settings by adjusting the temperature, fan speed, and the air delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures.

The interior temperature sensor located on the instrument panel to The solar sensor, located in the the right of the steering column, defrost grille in the middle of the measures the temperature of the air instrument panel, monitors the solar inside the vehicle. heat. Do not cover the solar sensor There is also an exterior or the system will not work properly. temperature sensor located behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature. 8-10 Climate Controls

Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating airflow Control Only) according to the settings of the rear controls. It comes on when any rear control is adjusted. Fan Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob to 9 to turn the fan off. Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the airflow temperature. Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn A. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front to the desired mode to change the airflow direction. B. Temperature Control climate control system to turn the rear climate control system on or H (Vent): Air is directed through C. Air Delivery Mode Control off. An indicator comes on when the the overhead outlets. rear system is on. The system also For vehicles with the rear climate ) (Bi-Level): Air is directed control system, the controls are turns on if any of the rear controls are adjusted. through the rear floor outlets, as located on the rear of the center well as the overhead outlets. console. The system can also be Mimic Mode: This mode matches controlled with the front controls. the rear climate control to the front 6 (Floor): Air is directed through climate control settings. It comes on the floor outlets. The rear system when REAR is pressed. floor outlets are located under the third row seats. Climate Controls 8-11

Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Mimic Mode: This mode matches the rear climate control to the front Seat Audio) climate control settings. It comes on when REAR is pressed. Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating airflow according to the settings of the rear controls. It comes on when any rear control is adjusted. DC (Fan Control): Press the fan up or down buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed. Temperature Control: Press + or − to increase or decrease the air temperature. The temperature A. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front settings will display in climate control system to turn the B. Air Delivery Mode Control 0-12 increments, going from rear climate control system on or the coolest (0) to the warmest C. Temperature Control off. The system also turns on if any (12) setting. of the rear controls, except for the For vehicles with the rear climate C control system, the controls are are pressed. An indicator comes located on the rear of the center on when the rear system is on. console. The system can also be turned off, by pressing and holding the C button. 8-12 Climate Controls

. Keep the path under all seats N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Air Vents clear of objects to help circulate Press to manually change the the air inside the vehicle more direction of the airflow. Repeatedly Use the slider switch in the center of effectively. press the button until the desired the outlet, to change the direction of mode appears on the display. the air flow. Use the thumbwheel . If fogging reoccurs while in vent near the outlet to control the amount or bi-level modes with mild (Vent): Air is directed through H of air flow or to shut off the airflow. temperature throughout the the overhead outlets. Keep all outlets open whenever vehicle, turn on the air ) (Bi-Level): Air is directed possible for best system conditioner to reduce windshield through the rear floor outlets, as performance. fogging. well as the overhead outlets. Operation Tips 6 (Floor): Air is directed through the floor outlets. The rear system . Clear away any ice, snow, floor outlets are located under the or leaves from the air inlets at third row seats. the base of the windshield that can block the flow of air into the vehicle. . Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. Driving and Operating 9-1

Shifting Into Park ...... 9-19 Object Detection Systems Driving and Shifting Out of Park ...... 9-20 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-32 Operating Parking Over Things Rear Vision That Burn ...... 9-20 Camera (RVC) ...... 9-34 Engine Exhaust Fuel Driving Information Engine Exhaust ...... 9-21 Fuel ...... 9-38 Defensive Driving ...... 9-2 Running the Vehicle While Recommended Fuel ...... 9-39 Drunk Driving ...... 9-2 Parked ...... 9-21 Gasoline Specifications ...... 9-39 Control of a Vehicle ...... 9-3 California Fuel Braking ...... 9-3 Automatic Transmission Requirements ...... 9-39 Steering ...... 9-4 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-22 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-40 Off-Road Recovery ...... 9-5 Manual Mode ...... 9-24 Fuel Additives ...... 9-40 Loss of Control ...... 9-5 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 9-24 Filling the Tank ...... 9-41 Driving on Wet Roads ...... 9-6 Drive Systems Filling a Portable Fuel Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-7 Container ...... 9-43 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-7 All-Wheel Drive ...... 9-25 Winter Driving ...... 9-8 Brakes Towing If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 9-10 Antilock Brake General Towing Vehicle Load Limits ...... 9-10 System (ABS) ...... 9-25 Information ...... 9-43 Starting and Operating Parking Brake ...... 9-26 Driving Characteristics and Brake Assist ...... 9-27 Towing Tips ...... 9-44 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 9-15 Trailer Towing ...... 9-48 Ignition Positions ...... 9-15 Ride Control Systems Towing Equipment ...... 9-51 Retained Accessory StabiliTrak System ...... 9-27 Power (RAP) ...... 9-16 Conversions and Add-Ons Starting the Engine ...... 9-17 Cruise Control Add-On Electrical Engine Heater ...... 9-18 Cruise Control ...... 9-30 Equipment ...... 9-53 9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information Death and injury associated with WARNING (Continued) drinking and driving is a global tragedy. Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or Alcohol affects four things that Defensive driving means always “ possible death. These simple anyone needs to drive a vehicle: expect the unexpected.” The first defensive driving techniques judgment, muscular coordination, step in driving defensively is to wear vision, and attentiveness. your safety belt, see Safety Belts on could save your life. page 3‑15. Police records show that almost Drunk Driving 40 percent of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve { WARNING { WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these Assume that other road users deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is very recent years, more than drivers) are going to be careless dangerous. Your reflexes, 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness, and deaths have been associated with judgment can be affected by even what they might do and be ready. the use of alcohol, with about a small amount of alcohol. You In addition: 250,000 people injured. can have a serious — or even . Allow enough following fatal — collision if you drive after For persons under 21, it is against distance between you and the law in every U.S. state to drink the driver in front of you. drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been alcohol. There are good medical, . Focus on the task of driving. drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if psychological, and developmental (Continued) you are with a group, designate a reasons for these laws. driver who will not drink. The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. Driving and Operating 9-3

Medical research shows that alcohol Braking And, of course, actual stopping in a person's system can make distances vary greatly with the crash injuries worse, especially See Brake System Warning Light surface of the road, whether it is injuries to the brain, spinal cord, on page 5‑18. pavement or gravel; the condition of or heart. This means that when Braking action involves perception the road, whether it is wet, dry, anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding to or icy; tire tread; the condition of the drinking — driver or passenger — is push the brake pedal is perception brakes; the weight of the vehicle; in a crash, that person's chance of time. Actually doing it is and the amount of brake force being killed or permanently disabled reaction time. applied. is higher than if the person had not Avoid needless heavy braking. been drinking. Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second. But that is Some people drive in only an average. It might be less spurts — heavy acceleration Control of a Vehicle with one driver and as long as two followed by heavy braking — rather The following three systems help to or three seconds or more with than keeping pace with traffic. This control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition, is a mistake. The brakes might not driving — brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and have time to cool between hard accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do stops. The brakes will wear out driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But much faster with a lot of heavy ask more of those control systems even in three-fourths of a second, a braking. Keeping pace with the than the tires and road can provide. vehicle moving at 100 km/h traffic and allowing realistic following Meaning, you can lose control of the (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That distances eliminates a lot of vehicle. See StabiliTrak System on could be a lot of distance in an unnecessary braking. That means page 9‑27. emergency, so keeping enough better braking and longer brake life. space between the vehicle and Adding non-dealer/non-retailer others is important. accessories can affect vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 10‑3. 9-4 Driving and Operating

If the engine ever stops while the Variable Effort Steering Steering in Emergencies vehicle is being driven, brake The vehicle has a steering system There are times when steering can normally but do not pump the that continuously adjusts the effort be more effective than braking. For brakes. If the brakes are pumped, felt when steering at all vehicle example, you come over a hill and the pedal could get harder to push speeds. It provides ease when find a truck stopped in your lane, down. If the engine stops, there will parking, yet a firm, solid feel at or a car suddenly pulls out from still be some power brake assist but highway speeds. nowhere, or a child darts out from it will be used when the brake is between parked cars and stops right applied. Once the power assist is Steering Tips in front of you. These problems can used up, it can take longer to stop be avoided by braking if you can and the brake pedal will be harder It is important to take curves at a — stop in time. But sometimes you to push. reasonable speed. cannot stop in time because there is Traction in a curve depends on the Adding non-dealer/non-retailer no room. That is the time for condition of the tires and the road accessories can affect vehicle evasive action steering around surface, the angle at which the — performance. See Accessories and the problem. curve is banked, and vehicle speed. Modifications on page 10‑3. While in a curve, speed is the one The vehicle can perform very well in factor that can be controlled. emergencies like these. First apply Steering the brakes. See Braking on If there is a need to reduce speed, page 9 3. It is better to remove as Power Steering do it before entering the curve, while ‑ much speed as possible from a the front wheels are straight. If power steering assist is lost collision. Then steer around the because the engine stops or the Try to adjust the speed so you can problem, to the left or right power steering system is not drive through the curve. Maintain a depending on the space available. functioning, the vehicle can be reasonable, steady speed. Wait to steered but it will take more effort. accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. Driving and Operating 9-5

Off-Road Recovery tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go The vehicle's right wheels can drop straight down the roadway. off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems — brakes, steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. In any emergency, do not give up. If holding the steering wheel at the Keep trying to steer and constantly recommended 9 and 3 o'clock seek an escape route or area of positions, it can be turned a full less danger. 180 degrees very quickly without Skidding removing either hand. But you have If the level of the shoulder is only to act fast, steer quickly, and just as slightly below the pavement, In a skid, a driver can lose control of quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy. Ease the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid you have avoided the object. off the accelerator and then, if there most skids by taking reasonable is nothing in the way, steer so that care suited to existing conditions, The fact that such emergency the vehicle straddles the edge of the and by not overdriving those situations are always possible is a pavement. Turn the steering wheel conditions. But skids are always good reason to practice defensive 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about possible. driving at all times and wear safety one-eighth turn, until the right front belts properly. 9-6 Driving and Operating

The three types of skids correspond While driving on a surface with to the vehicle's three control reduced traction, try your best to { WARNING systems. In the braking skid, the avoid sudden steering, acceleration, wheels are not rolling. In the or braking, including reducing Wet brakes can cause crashes. steering or cornering skid, too much vehicle speed by shifting to a lower They might not work as well in a speed or steering in a curve causes gear. Any sudden changes could quick stop and could cause tires to slip and lose cornering force. cause the tires to slide. You might pulling to one side. You could And in the acceleration skid, too not realize the surface is slippery lose control of the vehicle. much throttle causes the driving until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to After driving through a large wheels to spin. recognize warning clues — such as puddle of water or a car/vehicle If the vehicle starts to slide, ease enough water, ice, or packed snow wash, lightly apply the brake your foot off the accelerator pedal on the road to make a mirrored pedal until the brakes work surface and slow down when you and quickly steer the way you want — normally. the vehicle to go. If you start have any doubt. Flowing or rushing water creates steering quickly enough, the vehicle Remember: Any Antilock Brake may straighten out. Always be ready System (ABS) helps avoid only the strong forces. Driving through for a second skid if it occurs. braking skid. flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this Of course, traction is reduced when Driving on Wet Roads happens, you and other vehicle water, snow, ice, gravel, or other occupants could drown. Do not material is on the road. For safety, Rain and wet roads can reduce ignore police warnings and be slow down and adjust your driving to vehicle traction and affect your very cautious about trying to drive these conditions. It is important to ability to stop and accelerate. through flowing water. slow down on slippery surfaces Always drive slower in these types because stopping distance is longer of driving conditions and avoid and vehicle control more limited. driving through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing water. Driving and Operating 9-7

Hydroplaning . Have good tires with proper Hill and Mountain Roads tread depth. See Tires on Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water page 10‑36. Driving on steep hills or through can build up under your vehicle's mountains is different than driving . Turn off cruise control. tires so they actually ride on the on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for water. This can happen if the road is driving in these conditions include: wet enough and you are going fast Highway Hypnosis enough. When your vehicle is . Keep the vehicle serviced and in Always be alert and pay attention to good shape. hydroplaning, it has little or no your surroundings while driving. contact with the road. If you become tired or sleepy, find a . Check all fluid levels and brakes, There is no hard and fast rule about safe place to park your vehicle tires, cooling system, and hydroplaning. The best advice is to and rest. transmission. slow down when the road is wet. Other driving tips include: . Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear. Other Rainy Weather Tips . Keep the vehicle well ventilated. Besides slowing down, other wet . Keep interior temperature cool. { WARNING weather driving tips include: . Keep your eyes moving — scan . Allow extra following distance. the road ahead and to the sides. If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they . Pass with caution. . Check the rearview mirror and would not work well. You would . Keep windshield wiping vehicle instruments often. then have poor braking or even equipment in good shape. none going down a hill. You could . Keep the windshield washer fluid crash. Shift down to let the engine reservoir filled. assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. 9-8 Driving and Operating

Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS) { WARNING on page 9‑25 improves vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice stability during hard stops on Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) Drive carefully when there is snow slippery roads, but apply the brakes or with the ignition off is sooner than when on dry pavement. dangerous. The brakes will have or ice between the tires and the to do all the work of slowing down road, creating less traction or grip. Allow greater following distance on and they could get so hot that Wet ice can occur at about 0°C any slippery road and watch for (32°F) when freezing rain begins to they would not work well. You slippery spots. Icy patches can fall, resulting in even less traction. occur on otherwise clear roads in would then have poor braking or Avoid driving on wet ice or in shaded areas. The surface of a even none going down a hill. You freezing rain until roads can be curve or an overpass can remain icy could crash. Always have the treated with salt or sand. when the surrounding roads are engine running and the vehicle in clear. Avoid sudden steering gear when going downhill. Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently so maneuvers and braking while on ice. . Stay in your own lane. Do not traction is not lost. Accelerating too swing wide or cut across the quickly causes the wheels to spin Turn off cruise control, if equipped, center of the road. Drive at and makes the surface under the on slippery surfaces. speeds that let you stay in your tires slick, so there is even less own lane. traction. . Top of hills: Be Try not to break the fragile traction. alert — something could be in If you accelerate too fast, the drive your lane (stalled car, accident). wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. . Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action. Driving and Operating 9-9

Blizzard Conditions WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about vehicle unless there is help nearby. . Clear away snow from around carbon monoxide, see Engine If possible, use the Roadside the base of your vehicle, Exhaust on page 9‑21. Assistance Program on page 13 6. ‑ especially any that is blocking To get help and keep everyone in Snow can trap exhaust gases the exhaust pipe. the vehicle safe: under your vehicle. This can . Check again from time to cause deadly CO (carbon . Turn on the hazard warning time to be sure snow does monoxide) gas to get inside. CO flashers. not collect there. could overcome you and kill you. . Tie a red cloth to an outside You cannot see it or smell it, so . Open a window about 5 cm mirror. (two inches) on the side of you might not know it is in your the vehicle that is away from vehicle. Clear away snow from { WARNING the wind to bring in fresh air. around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on exhaust. under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument cause exhaust gases to get panel. Run the engine for short periods inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the Climate Control only as needed to keep warm, but carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that be careful. cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the To save fuel, run the engine for only cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed short periods as needed to warm death. to the highest setting. See the vehicle and then shut the engine (Continued) Climate Control System in the off and close the window most of Index. the way to save heat. Repeat this (Continued) until help arrives but only when you 9-10 Driving and Operating feel really uncomfortable from the Release the accelerator pedal while cold. Moving about to keep warm { WARNING shifting, and press lightly on the also helps. accelerator pedal when the If the vehicle's tires spin at high transmission is in gear. Slowly If it takes some time for help to speed, they can explode, and you arrive, now and then when you run spinning the wheels in the forward or others could be injured. The and reverse directions causes a the engine, push the accelerator vehicle can overheat, causing an pedal slightly so the engine runs rocking motion that could free the engine compartment fire or other vehicle. If that does not get the faster than the idle speed. This damage. Spin the wheels as little keeps the battery charged to restart vehicle out after a few tries, it might as possible and avoid going the vehicle and to signal for help need to be towed out. If the vehicle above 55 km/h (35 mph) as with the headlamps. Do this as little does need to be towed out, see as possible to save fuel. shown on the speedometer. Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑82. For information about using tire Vehicle Load Limits If the Vehicle is Stuck chains on the vehicle, see Tire Slowly and cautiously spin the Chains on page 10‑55. It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can wheels to free the vehicle when Rocking the Vehicle to Get stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. carry. This weight is called the it Out vehicle capacity weight and If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to free a stuck Turn the steering wheel left and includes the weight of all vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's right to clear the area around the occupants, cargo, and all traction system in the Index. If stuck front wheels. Turn off any traction or nonfactory-installed options. too severely for the traction system stability system. Shift back and forth Two labels on your vehicle show to free the vehicle, turn the traction between R (Reverse) and a forward how much weight it may system off and use the rocking gear, spinning the wheels as little as properly carry, the Tire and method. possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop Loading Information label and spinning before shifting gears. the Certification/Tire label. Driving and Operating 9-11

Tire and Loading Information seating positions (A), and the { WARNING Label maximum vehicle capacity Do not load the vehicle any weight (B) in kilograms and heavier than the Gross pounds. Vehicle Weight Rating The Tire and Loading (GVWR), or either the Information label also shows the maximum front or rear Gross size of the original equipment Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). tires (C) and the recommended If you do, parts on the vehicle cold tire inflation pressures (D). can break, and it can change For more information on tires the way your vehicle handles. and inflation see Tires on These could cause you to lose page 10‑36 and Tire Pressure on control and crash. Also, page 10‑42 . Example Label overloading can shorten the There is also important loading life of the vehicle. A vehicle specific Tire and information on the vehicle Loading Information label is Certification/Tire label. It tells attached to the center pillar you the Gross Vehicle Weight (B-pillar) of your vehicle. With Rating (GVWR) and the Gross the driver's door open, you will Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for find the label attached below the the front and rear axle. See door lock post (striker). The tire “Certification/Tire Label” later in and loading information label this section. shows the number of occupant 9-12 Driving and Operating

Steps for Determining Correct the amount of available cargo Load Limit and luggage load capacity is 1. Locate the statement “The 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) combined weight of = 650 lbs). occupants and cargo should 5. Determine the combined never exceed XXX kg or weight of luggage and cargo XXX lbs” on your vehicle's being loaded on the vehicle. placard. That weight may not safely 2. Determine the combined exceed the available cargo weight of the driver and and luggage load capacity passengers that will be riding calculated in Step 4. Example 1 in your vehicle. 6. If your vehicle will be towing A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 3. Subtract the combined a trailer, the load from your Example 1 = 453 kg weight of the driver and trailer will be transferred to (1,000 lbs). passengers from XXX kg or your vehicle. Consult this XXX lbs. manual to determine how this B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ reduces the available cargo 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg 4. The resulting figure equals and luggage load capacity for (300 lbs). the available amount of cargo your vehicle. and luggage load capacity. C. Available Occupant and For example, if the “XXX” See Trailer Towing on page 9‑48 Cargo Weight = 317 kg amount equals 1400 lbs and for important information on (700 lbs). there will be five 150 lb towing a trailer, towing safety passengers in your vehicle, rules and trailering tips. Driving and Operating 9-13

seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label

Example 2 Example 3 A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs). B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example (750 lbs). (1,000 lbs). A vehicle specific Certification/ C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight = Tire label is attached to the rear 113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). edge of the driver's door. Refer to your vehicle's tire and The label shows the gross loading information label for weight capacity of your vehicle. specific information about your This is called the Gross Vehicle vehicle's capacity weight and Weight Rating (GVWR). The 9-14 Driving and Operating

GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, WARNING (Continued) { WARNING and cargo. (GVWR), or either the Things you put inside your The Certification/Tire label also maximum front or rear Gross vehicle can strike and injure tells you the maximum weights Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). people in a sudden stop or for the front and rear axles, If you do, parts on the vehicle turn, or in a crash. can break, and it can change called the Gross Axle Weight . Put things in the cargo Rating (GAWR). To find out the the way your vehicle handles. area of your vehicle. Try to actual loads on your front and These could cause you to lose spread the weight evenly. rear axles, you need to go to a control and crash. Also, weigh station and weigh your overloading can shorten the . Never stack heavier vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can life of the vehicle. things, like suitcases, help you with this. Be sure to inside the vehicle so that spread out your load equally on Notice : Overloading the some of them are above both sides of the centerline. vehicle may cause damage. the tops of the seats. Repairs would not be covered Never exceed the GVWR for . Do not leave an by the vehicle warranty. Do unsecured child restraint your vehicle or the GAWR for not overload the vehicle. either the front or rear axle. in your vehicle. If you put things inside your . When you carry something { WARNING vehicle — like suitcases, tools, inside the vehicle, secure packages, or anything else, they it whenever you can. Do not load the vehicle any will go as fast as the vehicle heavier than the Gross goes. If you have to stop or turn . Do not leave a seat folded Vehicle Weight Rating quickly, or if there is a crash, down unless you need to. (Continued) they will keep going. Driving and Operating 9-15

. Avoid making hard stops for Ignition Positions Starting and the first 322 km (200 miles) or Operating so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet New Vehicle Break-In broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean Notice: The vehicle does not premature wear and earlier need an elaborate break-in. But it replacement. Follow this will perform better in the long run breaking-in guideline every if you follow these guidelines: time you get new brake . If you have all-wheel drive, linings. keep your speed at 88 km/h . Do not tow a trailer during (55 mph) or less for the first break-in. See Driving 805 km (500 miles). Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 9 44 for the . Do not drive at any one ‑ The ignition switch has four different constant speed, fast or slow, trailer towing capabilities of positions. for the first 805 km your vehicle and more In order to shift out of P (Park), the (500 miles). Do not make information. ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ full-throttle starts. Avoid Following break-in, engine speed ACCESSORY and the brake pedal downshifting to brake or and load can be gradually must be applied. slow the vehicle. increased. 9-16 Driving and Operating

Notice: Using a tool to force the the ignition and steering wheel. Use Retained Accessory key to turn in the ignition could this position if the vehicle must be cause damage to the switch or pushed or towed. Power (RAP) break the key. Use the correct R (ON/RUN): This position can be These vehicle accessories can be key, make sure it is all the way in, used to operate the electrical used for up to 10 minutes after the and turn it only with your hand. accessories and to display some ignition key is turned off: If the key cannot be turned by instrument panel warning and . Audio System hand, see your dealer/retailer. indicator lights. The switch stays in . Power Windows ( (LOCK/OFF): This position locks this position when the engine is the ignition and transmission. The running. The transmission is also . Sunroof (if equipped) key can be removed in LOCK/OFF. unlocked in this position. If you Power to the windows and sunroof The shift lever must be in P (Park) leave the key in the ACC/ will work up to 10 minutes or until a to turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position door is opened. LOCK/OFF. with the engine off, the battery could be drained. You may not be able to The radio continues to work for The steering can bind with the start the vehicle if the battery is 10 minutes or until the driver's door wheels turned off center. If this allowed to drain for an extended is opened. happens, move the steering wheel period of time. For an additional 10 minutes of from right to left while turning the / operation, close all the doors and key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this (START): This is the position that starts the engine. When the turn the key to ON/RUN and then doesn't work, then the vehicle needs back to LOCK/OFF. service. engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will return to ON/RUN All these features will work when the ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is for driving. key is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ the position in which you can ACCESSORY positions. operate the electrical accessories or items plugged into the accessory power outlets. This position unlocks Driving and Operating 9-17

Starting the Engine The vehicle has a Notice: Cranking the engine for Computer-Controlled Cranking long periods of time, by returning Move the shift lever to P (Park) or System. This feature assists in the key to the START position N (Neutral). The engine will not start starting the engine and protects immediately after cranking has in any other position. To restart the components. If the ignition key is ended, can overheat and damage engine when the vehicle is already turned to the START position, the cranking motor, and drain the moving, use N (Neutral) only. and then released when the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds Notice: Do not try to shift to engine begins cranking, the between each try, to let the P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. engine will continue cranking for cranking motor cool down. If you do, you could damage the a few seconds or until the 2. If the engine does not start after transmission. Shift to P (Park) vehicle starts. If the engine does 5-10 seconds, especially in very only when the vehicle is stopped. not start and the key is held in cold weather (below 0°F or START, cranking will be stopped Starting Procedure −18°C), it could be flooded with after 15 seconds to prevent too much gasoline. Try pushing 1. With your foot off the accelerator cranking motor damage. To the accelerator pedal all the way pedal, turn the ignition to START. prevent gear damage, this to the floor and holding it there When the engine starts, let go of system also prevents cranking if as you hold the key in START the key. The idle speed will slow the engine is already running. for up to a maximum of down as the engine warms. Do Engine cranking can be stopped 15 seconds. Wait at least not race the engine immediately by turning the ignition switch to 15 seconds between each try, to after starting it. Operate the the ACC/ACCESSORY or allow the cranking motor to cool engine and transmission gently LOCK/OFF position. down. When the engine starts, to allow the oil to warm up and let go of the key and accelerator. lubricate all moving parts. 9-18 Driving and Operating

If the vehicle starts briefly but Engine Heater then stops again, repeat these { WARNING steps. This clears the extra The engine coolant heater can gasoline from the engine. Do not provide easier starting and better Plugging the cord into an race the engine immediately fuel economy during engine ungrounded outlet could cause an after starting it. Operate the warm-up in cold weather conditions electrical shock. Also, the wrong engine and transmission gently at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles kind of extension cord could until the oil warms up and with an engine coolant heater overheat and cause a fire. You lubricates all moving parts. should be plugged in at least four could be seriously injured. Plug hours before starting. Some models the cord into a properly grounded Notice: The engine is designed to may have an internal thermostat in three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. work with the electronics in the the cord which will prevent engine vehicle. If you add electrical parts If the cord will not reach, use a coolant heater operation at heavy-duty three-prong extension or accessories, you could change temperatures above 0°F (−18°C). the way the engine operates. cord rated for at least 15 amps. Before adding electrical To Use the Engine Coolant equipment, check with your Heater 4. Before starting the engine, be dealer/retailer. If you do not, the sure to unplug and store the 1. Turn off the engine. engine might not perform cord as it was before to keep it properly. Any resulting damage 2. Open the hood and unwrap the away from moving engine parts. would not be covered by the electrical cord. The cord is If you do not, it could be vehicle warranty. located on the driver side of the damaged. engine compartment. It is routed The length of time the heater should around the windshield washer remain plugged in depends on fluid reservoir. several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer 3. Plug the cord into a normal, in the area where you will be grounded 110-volt AC outlet. parking the vehicle for the best advice on this. Driving and Operating 9-19

Shifting Into Park 3. Turn the ignition key to you leave it. After you have moved LOCK/OFF. the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, { WARNING 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave the vehicle see if you can move the shift lever It can be dangerous to get out of with the ignition key in your away from P (Park) without first pushing the button. the vehicle if the shift lever is not hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). fully in P (Park) with the parking If you can, it means that the shift Leaving the Vehicle with the brake firmly set. The vehicle can lever was not fully locked in roll. If you have left the engine Engine Running P (Park). running, the vehicle can move Torque Lock suddenly. You or others could be { WARNING injured. To be sure the vehicle will Torque lock is when the weight of It can be dangerous to leave the not move, even when you are on the vehicle puts too much force on vehicle with the engine running. fairly level ground, use the steps the parking pawl in the The vehicle could move suddenly that follow. If you are pulling a transmission. This happens when if the shift lever is not fully in trailer, see Driving Characteristics parking on a hill and shifting the P (Park) with the parking brake transmission into P (Park) is not and Towing Tips on page 9 44. ‑ firmly set. And, if you leave the done properly and then it is difficult 1. Hold the brake pedal down and vehicle with the engine running, it to shift out of P (Park). To prevent set the parking brake. See could overheat and even catch torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park). To find Parking Brake on page 9‑26 for fire. You or others could be more information. injured. Do not leave the vehicle out how, see “Shifting Into Park” with the engine running. listed previously. 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) If torque lock does occur, your by holding in the button on the If you have to leave the vehicle with shift lever and pushing the shift vehicle may need to be pushed the engine running, be sure the uphill by another vehicle to relieve lever all the way toward the front vehicle is in P (Park) and the of the vehicle. the parking pawl pressure, so you parking brake is firmly set before can shift out of P (Park). 9-20 Driving and Operating

Shifting Out of Park If the vehicle has an uncharged Parking Over Things battery or a battery with low voltage, The vehicle is equipped with an try charging or jump starting the That Burn electronic shift lock release system. battery. See Jump Starting on The shift lock release is page 10‑78 for more information. { WARNING designed to: To shift out of P (Park): Things that can burn could touch . Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in 1. Apply the brake pedal. hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park P (Park) with the shift lever 2. Press the shift lever button. button fully released, and over papers, leaves, dry grass, 3. Move the shift lever to the or other things that can burn. . Prevent movement of the shift desired position. lever out of P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ If you still are unable to shift out of ACCESSORY and the regular P (Park): brake pedal is applied. 1. Fully release the shift lever The shift lock release is always button. functional except in the case of an 2. While holding down the brake uncharged or low voltage (less than pedal, press the shift lever 9 volt) battery. button again. 3. Move the shift lever to the desired position. If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park), see your dealer/ retailer. Driving and Operating 9-21

Running the Vehicle Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued) While Parked . There are holes or openings { WARNING It is better not to park with the in the vehicle body from engine running. But if you ever have damage or after-market Engine exhaust contains Carbon to, here are some things to know. Monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed. { WARNING can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is Idling a vehicle in an enclosed Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle: area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may . The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows with poor ventilation (parking completely down. enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired which cannot be seen or smelled. that may block underbody immediately. airflow or tail pipes). It can cause unconsciousness Never park the vehicle with the and even death. Never run the . The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed engine in an enclosed area that sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a has no fresh air ventilation. For . The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air more information, see Engine due to corrosion or damage. ventilation. Exhaust on page 9‑21. . The vehicle’s exhaust system has been modified, damaged or improperly repaired. (Continued) 9-22 Driving and Operating

{ WARNING Automatic { WARNING Transmission It can be dangerous to get out of It is dangerous to get out of the the vehicle if the automatic The automatic transmission has a vehicle if the shift lever is not fully transmission shift lever is not fully shift lever located on the console in P (Park) with the parking brake in P (Park) with the parking brake between the seats. firmly set. The vehicle can roll. firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do Do not leave the vehicle when the not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park on page 9 19. If you are pulling a Follow the proper steps to be sure ‑ P (Park): This position locks the trailer, see Driving Characteristics the vehicle will not move. See front wheels. It is the best position and Towing Tips on page 9‑44. Shifting Into Park on page 9‑19. to use when starting the engine If parking on a hill and pulling a because the vehicle cannot move trailer, see Driving Characteristics easily. and Towing Tips on page 9‑44. Driving and Operating 9-23

Make sure the shift lever is fully in To rock the vehicle back and forth to repairs would not be covered by P (Park) before starting the engine. get out of snow, ice or sand without the vehicle warranty. Be sure the The vehicle has an automatic damaging the transmission, see If engine is not running at high transmission shift lock control the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑10. speed when shifting the vehicle. system. You must fully apply the N (Neutral): In this position, the D (Drive): This position is for regular brake first and then press engine does not connect with the normal driving. It provides the best the shift lever button before shifting wheels. To restart the engine when fuel economy. If you need more from P (Park) when the ignition key the vehicle is already moving, use power for passing, and you are: is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out N (Neutral) only. Also, use of P (Park), ease pressure on the . Going less than 56 km/h N (Neutral) when the vehicle is (35 mph), push the accelerator shift lever, then push the shift lever being towed. all the way into P (Park) as you pedal about halfway down. maintain brake application. Then { WARNING . Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or press the shift lever button and more, push the accelerator all move the shift lever into another Shifting into a drive gear while the the way down. gear. See Shifting Out of Park on engine is running at high speed is page 9‑20. Notice: If the vehicle seems to dangerous. Unless your foot is accelerate slowly or not shift R (Reverse): Use this gear to firmly on the brake pedal, the gears when you go faster, and back up. vehicle could move very rapidly. you continue to drive the vehicle Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) You could lose control and hit that way, you could damage the while the vehicle is moving people or objects. Do not shift transmission. Have the vehicle forward could damage the into a drive gear while the engine serviced right away. You can transmission. The repairs would is running at high speed. drive in L (Low) when you are not be covered by the vehicle driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph) warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or and D (Drive) for higher speeds after the vehicle is stopped. N (Neutral) with the engine until then. running at high speed may damage the transmission. The 9-24 Driving and Operating

L (Low): This position gives you When you shift from D (Drive) to allowed, the lower gear range shift access to gear ranges. This L (Low), the transmission will shift to will not be completed. You must provides more engine braking but a pre-determined lower gear range . further slow the vehicle, then press lower fuel economy than D (Drive). The highest gear available for this the − (Minus) button to the desired You can use it on very steep hills, pre-determined range is displayed lower gear range. or in deep snow or mud. next to the L in the DIC. See Driver Automatic Engine Grade braking is Information Center (DIC) (With DIC not available when the ERS is Manual Mode Buttons) on page 5‑22 or Driver active. It is available in D (Drive) for Information Center (DIC) (Without Electronic Range Select both normal and Tow/Haul mode. DIC Buttons) on page 5‑28 for While using the ERS, cruise control (ERS) Mode more information. The number and the tow/haul mode can be used. ERS mode allows you to choose the displayed in the DIC is the highest See Tow/Haul Mode following. top-gear limit of the transmission gear that the transmission will be and the vehicle's speed while allowed to operate in. This means that all gears below that number are Tow/Haul Mode driving down hill or towing a trailer. _ The vehicle has an electronic shift available. For example, when (Tow/Haul): The vehicle may position indicator within the 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L, have a Tow/Haul mode. 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are instrument panel cluster. When The button is located on the automatically shifted by the vehicle. using the ERS Mode a number will instrument panel under the climate The transmission will not shift into display next to the L, indicating the controls. current gear that has been selected. 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is used or you shift back into D (Drive). Push the button to activate the To use this feature: system. Push it again to deactivate While in L (Low), the transmission the system. You can use this feature 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low). will prevent shifting to a lower gear to assist when towing or hauling a range if the engine speed is too 2. Press the plus/minus button heavy load. located on the shift lever, to high. You have a brief period of time increase or decrease the gear to slow the vehicle. If vehicle speed range available. is not reduced within the time Driving and Operating 9-25

When Tow/Haul is activated the Drive Systems Brakes Tow/Haul symbol will come on the instrument panel cluster. See “Tow/ Haul Mode” under Driving All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake Characteristics and Towing Tips on With this feature, engine power is System (ABS) page 9 44 for more information. ‑ always sent to all four wheels. It is This vehicle has the Antilock Brake Automatic Engine Grade fully automatic, and adjusts itself as System (ABS), an advanced needed for road conditions. Braking electronic braking system that helps When using a compact spare tire on prevent a braking skid. Automatic Engine Grade Braking an AWD vehicle, the system assists when driving on a downhill When the engine is started and the automatically detects the compact vehicle begins to drive away, ABS grade. It maintains vehicle speed by spare and disables AWD. To restore automatically implementing a shift checks itself. A momentary motor or AWD operation and prevent clicking noise might be heard while schedule that uses the engine and excessive wear on system, replace the transmission to slow the vehicle. this test is going on, and it might the compact spare with a full-size even be noticed that the brake The system will automatically tire as soon as possible. See command downshifts to reduce pedal moves a little. This is normal. Compact Spare Tire on page 10‑77 vehicle speed, until the brake pedal for more information. is no longer being pressed. While in the Electronic Range Select (ERS) mode, grade braking is deactivated, allowing the driver to select a range and limiting the highest gear available. Grade If there is a problem with ABS, this braking is available for normal warning light stays on. See Antilock driving and in Tow/Haul mode. Brake System (ABS) Warning Light See Automatic Transmission on on page 5‑19. page 9‑22. 9-26 Driving and Operating

If driving safely on a wet road and it close to the vehicle in front of you, Parking Brake becomes necessary to slam on the there will not be enough time to brakes and continue braking to apply the brakes if that vehicle avoid a sudden obstacle, a suddenly slows or stops. Always computer senses that the wheels leave enough room up ahead to are slowing down. If one of the stop, even with ABS. wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the Using ABS brakes at each wheel. Do not pump the brakes. Just hold ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal down firmly and let to each wheel, as required, faster ABS work. The ABS pump or motor than any driver could. This can help might be heard operating, and the the driver steer around the obstacle brake pedal might be felt to pulsate, while braking hard. but this is normal. As the brakes are applied, the Braking in Emergencies To set the parking brake, hold the computer keeps receiving updates regular brake pedal down, then ABS allows the driver to steer and push the parking brake pedal down. on wheel speed and controls brake at the same time. In many braking pressure accordingly. emergencies, steering can help If the ignition is on, the brake Remember: ABS does not change more than even the very best system warning light will come on. the time needed to get a foot up to braking. See Brake System Warning Light the brake pedal or always decrease on page 5‑18. stopping distance. If you get too Driving and Operating 9-27

Notice: Driving with the parking Brake Assist Ride Control Systems brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature This vehicle has a Brake Assist wear or damage to brake system feature designed to assist the driver StabiliTrak System parts. Make sure that the parking in stopping or decreasing vehicle The vehicle has the StabiliTrak brake is fully released and the speed in emergency driving system which combines antilock brake warning light is off before conditions. This feature uses the brake, traction and stability control driving. stability system hydraulic brake systems and helps the driver control module to supplement the To release the parking brake, hold maintain directional control of the power brake system under vehicle in most driving conditions. the regular brake pedal down, then conditions where the driver has push down momentarily on the quickly and forcefully applied the When you first start the vehicle and parking brake pedal until you feel brake pedal in an attempt to quickly begin to drive away, the system the pedal release. Slowly pull your stop or slow down the vehicle. The performs several diagnostic checks foot up off the park brake pedal. stability system hydraulic brake to ensure there are no problems. If the parking brake is not released control module increases brake The system may be heard or felt when you begin to drive, the brake pressure at each corner of the while it is working. This is normal system warning light will be on and vehicle until the ABS activates. and does not mean there is a a chime will sound warning you that Minor brake pedal pulsations or problem with the vehicle. The the parking brake is still on. pedal movement during this time is system should initialize before the If you are towing a trailer and are normal and the driver should vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph). parking on a hill, see Trailer Towing continue to apply the brake pedal as In some cases, it may take on page 9‑48. the driving situation dictates. The approximately 3.2 km (2 miles) of Brake Assist feature will driving before the system initializes. automatically disengage when the If the system fails to turn on or brake pedal is released or brake activate, the StabiliTrak light along pedal pressure is quickly with one of the following messages decreased. 9-28 Driving and Operating will be displayed on the Driver The system may be heard or felt when traction control is off, but will Information Center (DIC): while it is working; this is normal. not be able to use the engine speed TRACTION CONTROL OFF, management system. See “Traction SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL, Control Operation” next for more SERVICE STABILITRAK. If these information. conditions are observed, turn the When the traction control system vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and has been turned off, system noises then turn it back on again to reset may be heard and felt as a result of the system. If any of these the brake-traction control working. messages still appear on the Driver The traction control disable button is Information Center (DIC), the located on the instrument panel It is recommended to leave the vehicle should be taken in for below the climate controls. system on for normal driving service. For more information on the conditions, but it may be necessary The traction control part of DIC messages, see Driver to turn the system off if the vehicle StabiliTrak can be turned off by Information Center (DIC) (With DIC is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, pressing and releasing the traction Buttons) on page 5 22 or Driver and you want to “rock” the vehicle to ‑ control disable button. Information Center (DIC) (Without attempt to free it. It may also be DIC Buttons) on page 5‑28. Traction control can be turned on by necessary to turn off the system pressing and releasing the traction when driving in extreme off-road control disable button if not conditions where high wheel spin is automatically shut off for any other required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck reason. on page 9‑10. When the traction control system is turned off, the StabiliTrak light and the appropriate traction control off The StabiliTrak light will flash on the message will be displayed on the instrument panel cluster when the DIC to warn the driver. The vehicle system is both on and activated. will still have brake-traction control Driving and Operating 9-29

Traction Control Operation Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle If cruise control is being used when is allowed to spin excessively the system activates, the StabiliTrak The traction control system is part of while the StabiliTrak, ABS and light will flash and cruise control will the StabiliTrak system. Traction brake warning lights and any automatically disengage. Cruise control limits wheel spin by reducing relevant DIC messages are control may be reengaged when engine power to the wheels (engine displayed, the transfer case could road conditions allow. See Cruise speed management) and by be damaged. The repairs would Control on page 9 30. applying brakes to each individual ‑ not be covered by the vehicle wheel (brake-traction control) as StabiliTrak may also turn off warranty. Reduce engine power necessary. automatically if it determines that a and do not spin the wheel(s) problem exists with the system. The traction control system is excessively while these lights and If the problem does not clear itself enabled automatically when the messages are displayed. after restarting the vehicle, see your vehicle is started. It will activate and The traction control system may dealer/retailer for service. the StabiliTrak light will flash if it activate on dry or rough roads or senses that any of the wheels are under conditions such as heavy spinning or beginning to lose acceleration while turning or abrupt traction while driving. If traction upshifts/downshifts of the control is turned off, only the transmission. When this happens, a brake-traction control portion of reduction in acceleration may be traction control will work. The noticed, or a noise or vibration may engine speed management will be be heard. This is normal. disabled. In this mode, engine power is not reduced automatically and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This can cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly. 9-30 Driving and Operating

Cruise Control SET– : Press to set the speed or make the vehicle decelerate. With cruise control, a speed of [ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can control. be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise Setting Cruise Control control does not work at speeds Cruise control will not work if the below about 40 km/h (25 mph). parking brake is set, or if the master When the brakes are applied, the cylinder brake fluid level is low. cruise control is disengaged. The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster comes on { WARNING after the cruise control has been set The cruise control buttons are to the desired speed. Cruise control can be dangerous located on left side of the steering where you cannot drive safely at wheel. a steady speed. So, do not use T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise the cruise control on winding control on and off. The indicator roads or in heavy traffic. comes on when cruise control is on. Cruise control can be dangerous + RES (Resume/Accelerate): on slippery roads. On such roads, Press to make the vehicle fast changes in tire traction can accelerate or resume to a previously cause excessive wheel slip, and set speed. you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. Driving and Operating 9-31

Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h Reducing Speed While Using { WARNING (25 mph) or greater, press the +RES Cruise Control button on the steering wheel. The If you leave your cruise control on There are two ways to reduce the vehicle returns to the previously set vehicle speed while using cruise when you are not using cruise, speed and stays there. you might hit a button and go into control: cruise when you do not want to. Increasing Speed While Using . Press and hold the SET– button You could be startled and even Cruise Control on the steering wheel until the lose control. Keep the cruise There are two ways to increase the lower speed desired is reached, control switch off until you want to vehicle speed while using cruise then release it. use cruise control. control: . To slow down in very small . Press and hold the +RES button amounts, press the SET– button 1. Press the I button. on the steering wheel until the briefly. Each time this is done, 2. Get up to the speed desired. desired speed is reached, then the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h release it. (1 mph) slower. 3. Press and release the SET– button located on the . To increase vehicle speed in Passing Another Vehicle While steering wheel. small increments, press the Using Cruise Control +RES button briefly. Each time Use the accelerator pedal to 4. Take your foot off the this is done, the vehicle goes accelerator. increase vehicle speed. When you about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. take your foot off the pedal, the Resuming a Set Speed vehicle will slow down to the If the cruise control is set at a previously set cruise speed. desired speed and then the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged. But it does not need to be reset. 9-32 Driving and Operating

Using Cruise Control on Hills Object Detection { WARNING How well the cruise control will work Systems on hills depends upon the vehicle The Ultrasonic Rear Parking speed, load, and the steepness of Ultrasonic Parking Assist Assist (URPA) system does not the hills. When going up steep hills, replace driver vision. It cannot you might have to step on the For vehicles with the Ultrasonic detect: accelerator pedal to maintain the Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, . objects that are below the vehicle speed. When going it operates at speeds less than bumper, underneath the downhill, you might have to brake or 8 km/h (5 mph), and assists the vehicle, or if they are too shift to a lower gear to keep the driver with parking and avoiding close or far from the vehicle vehicle speed down. When the objects while in R (Reverse). The brakes are applied the cruise control sensors on the rear bumper are . children, pedestrians, is disengaged. used to detect the distance to an bicyclists, or pets. Ending Cruise Control object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the If you do not use proper care vehicle, and at least 25.4 cm (10 in) before and while backing; vehicle There are three ways to end cruise off the ground. control: damage, injury, or death could occur. Even with URPA, always . Step lightly on the brake pedal. check behind the vehicle before . Press the [ button. backing up. While backing, be sure to look for objects and check . Press the T button. the vehicle's mirrors. Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed memory is erased when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off. Driving and Operating 9-33

How the System Works When the System Does Not . A tow bar is attached to the vehicle. URPA comes on automatically when Seem to Work Properly . the shift lever is moved into If the URPA system does not The vehicle's bumper is R (Reverse). A single tone sounds activate due to a temporary damaged. Take the vehicle to to indicate the system is working. condition, the message PARK your dealer/retailer to repair the system. URPA operates only at speeds less ASSIST OFF displays on the DIC than 5 mph (8 km/h). when the shift lever is moved into . Other conditions may affect R (Reverse). This may occur under system performance, such as An obstacle is indicated by audible the following conditions: vibrations from a jackhammer or beeps. The interval between the the compression of air brakes on . The driver disables the system. beeps becomes shorter as the a very large truck. vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. . The ultrasonic sensors are not When the distance is less than clean. Keep the vehicle's rear If the system is still disabled, after 30 cm (12 in) the beeps are bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, driving forward at least 25 km/h continuous. ice and slush. For cleaning (15 mph), take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer. To be detected, objects must be at instructions, see Exterior Care least 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground on page 10‑86. and below liftgate level. Objects . A trailer was attached to the must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from vehicle, or a bicycle or an object the rear bumper. This distance may was hanging out of the liftgate be less during warmer or humid during the last drive cycle. Once weather. the attached object is removed, The system can be disabled through URPA will return to normal the Driver Information Center (DIC). operation. See “Park Assist” under Vehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑40 for more information. 9-34 Driving and Operating

Rear Vision rear view mirror. Once the driver WARNING (Continued) shifts out of R (Reverse), the video Camera (RVC) image automatically disappears The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Your judged distances using the from the inside rear view mirror. Camera system. Read this entire screen will differ from actual Turning the Rear Vision Camera section before using it. distances. System Off or On So if you do not use proper care { WARNING before backing up, you could hit a To turn off the rear vision camera vehicle, child, pedestrian, system, press and hold z , located The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) bicyclist, or pet, resulting in on the inside rearview mirror, until system does not replace driver vehicle damage, injury, or death. the left indicator light turns off. The vision. RVC does not: Even though the vehicle has the rear vision camera display is now disabled. . Detect objects that are RVC system, always check outside the camera's field of carefully before backing up by To turn the rear vision camera view, below the bumper, checking behind and around the system on again, press and hold z or underneath the vehicle. vehicle. until the left indicator light . illuminates. The rear vision camera Detect children, pedestrians, Vehicles Without Navigation bicyclists, or pets. system display is now enabled and System the display will appear in the mirror Do not back the vehicle by only normally. looking at the RVC screen, or use The rear vision camera system is designed to help the driver when the screen during longer, higher backing up by displaying a view of speed backing maneuvers or the area behind the vehicle. When where there could be cross-traffic. the key is in the ON/RUN position (Continued) and the driver shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse), the video image automatically appears on the inside Driving and Operating 9-35

Vehicles With Navigation 3. Select the Rear Camera Options The delay that is received after System screen button. The Rear Camera shifting out of R (Reverse) is Options screen displays. approximately 10 seconds. The The rear vision camera system is delay can be cancelled by designed to help the driver when performing one of the following: backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle. When . Pressing a hard key on the the driver shifts the vehicle into navigation system. R (Reverse), the video image . Shifting in to P (Park). automatically appears on the navigation screen. Once the driver . Reach a vehicle speed of shifts out of R (Reverse), the 5 mph (8 km/h). navigation screen will go back to the There is a message on the rear last screen that had been displayed, vision camera screen that states after a delay. “Check Surroundings for Safety”. Turning the Rear Vision Camera Adjusting the Brightness and System On or Off 4. Select the Video screen button. Contrast of the Screen To turn the rear vision camera When the Video screen button is To adjust the brightness and system on or off: highlighted the RVC system contrast of the screen, press the is on. 1. Shift into P (Park). MENU button while the rear vision camera image is on the display. Any 2. Press the MENU button to enter adjustments made will only affect the configure menu options, then the rear vision camera screen. press the MENU hard key to ] select Display or touch the (Brightness) : Touch the Display screen button. + (plus) or – (minus) screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness of the screen. 9-36 Driving and Operating

_ (Contrast) : Touch the + (plus) To turn the symbols on or off: Rear Vision Camera Error or – (minus) screen buttons to 1. Make sure that URPA has not Messages increase or decrease the contrast of been disabled. Service Rear Vision Camera the screen. 2. Shift into P (Park). System: This message can display Symbols when the system is not receiving 3. Press the MENU hard key to information it requires from other The navigation system may have a enter the configure menu vehicle systems. feature that lets the driver view options, then press the MENU symbols on the navigation screen hard key repeatedly until Display If any other problem occurs or if a while using the rear vision camera. is selected or touch the Display problem persists, see your dealer/ The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist screen button. retailer. (URPA) system must not be 4. Select the Rear Camera Options Rear Vision Camera Location disabled to use the caution symbols. screen button. The Rear Camera If URPA has been disabled and the Options screen will display. symbols have been turned on, the Rear Parking Assist Symbols 5. Touch the Symbols screen Unavailable error message may button. The screen button will be display. See Ultrasonic Parking highlighted when on. Assist on page 9‑32. The symbols appear when an object The camera is located in the rear has been detected by the URPA liftgate handle. system. The symbol may cover the object when viewing the navigation screen. Driving and Operating 9-37

The area displayed by the camera is When the System Does Not limited and does not display objects Seem To Work Properly that are close to either corner or under the bumper. The area The rear vision camera system displayed can vary depending on might not work properly or display a vehicle orientation or road clear image if: conditions. The distance of the . The RVC is turned off. See image that appears on the screen “Turning the Rear Camera differs from the actual distance. System On or Off” earlier in this The following illustration shows the section. field of view that the camera . It is dark. provides. . The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens. . Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water, and wipe it with a soft cloth.

A. View displayed by the camera. B. Corner of the rear bumper. 9-38 Driving and Operating

. The back of the vehicle is in an . A fast flash may indicate that the accident, the position and display has been on for the Fuel mounting angle of the camera maximum allowable time during Use of the recommended fuel is an can change or the camera can a reverse cycle, or the display important part of the proper be affected. Be sure to have the has reached an Over maintenance of this vehicle. To help camera and its position and Temperature limit. keep the engine clean and maintain mounting angle checked at your The fast flash conditions are optimum vehicle performance, we dealer/retailer. used to protect the video device recommend the use of gasoline . There are extreme temperature from high temperature advertised as TOP TIER Detergent changes. conditions. Once conditions Gasoline. The rear vision camera system return to normal the device will Look for the TOP TIER label on the display in the rearview mirror may reset and the green indicator will fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets turn off or not appear as expected stop flashing. enhanced detergency standards due to one of the following During any of these fault conditions, developed by auto companies. A list conditions. If this occurs the left the display will be blank and the of marketers providing TOP TIER indicator light on the mirror will indicator will continue to flash as Detergent Gasoline can be found at flash. long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) www.toptiergas.com. or until the conditions return to . A slow flash may indicate a loss of video signal, or no video normal. signal present during the reverse Pressing and holding z when the cycle. left indicator light is flashing will turn off the video display along with the left indicator light. Driving and Operating 9-39

Recommended Fuel California Fuel Use regular unleaded gasoline with Requirements a posted octane rating of 87 or If the vehicle is certified to meet higher. If the octane rating is less California Emissions Standards, it is than 87, an audible knocking noise, designed to operate on fuels that commonly referred to as spark meet California specifications. See knock, might be heard when driving. the underhood emission control If this occurs, use a gasoline rated label. If this fuel is not available in at 87 octane or higher as soon as states adopting California emissions possible. If heavy knocking is heard standards, the vehicle will operate when using gasoline rated at satisfactorily on fuels meeting 87 octane or higher, the engine federal specifications, but emission needs service. control system performance might be affected. The malfunction Gasoline Specifications indicator lamp could turn on and the At a minimum, gasoline should meet vehicle might fail a smog-check test. ASTM specification D 4814 in the See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or page 5‑16. If this occurs, return to 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines your authorized dealer/retailer for contain an octane-enhancing diagnosis. If it is determined that the additive called condition is caused by the type of methylcyclopentadienyl manganese fuel used, repairs might not be tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend covered by the vehicle warranty. against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See Fuel Additives on page 9‑40 for additional information. 9-40 Driving and Operating

Fuels in Foreign only the minimum amount of Gasolines containing oxygenates, additive required to meet U.S. such as ethers and ethanol, and Countries Environmental Protection Agency reformulated gasolines might be If you plan on driving in another regulations. To help keep fuel available in your area. We country outside the United States or injectors and intake valves clean, recommend that you use these Canada, the proper fuel might be or if the vehicle experiences gasolines, if they comply with the hard to find. Never use leaded problems due to dirty injectors or specifications described earlier. gasoline or any other fuel not valves, look for gasoline that is However, E85 (85% ethanol) and recommended in the previous text advertised as TOP TIER Detergent other fuels containing more than on fuel. Costly repairs caused by Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER 10% ethanol must not be used in use of improper fuel would not be label on the fuel pump to ensure vehicles that were not designed for covered by the vehicle warranty. gasoline meets enhanced those fuels. detergency standards developed by To check the fuel availability, ask an Notice: This vehicle was not the auto companies. A list of auto club, or contact a major oil designed for fuel that contains marketers providing TOP TIER company that does business in the methanol. Do not use fuel Detergent Gasoline can be found at country where you will be driving. containing methanol. It can www.toptiergas.com. corrode metal parts in the fuel Fuel Additives For customers who do not use TOP system and also damage plastic TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, and rubber parts. That damage To provide cleaner air, all gasolines one bottle of GM Fuel System would not be covered under the in the United States are now Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel vehicle warranty. required to contain additives that tank at every engine oil change, can help prevent engine and fuel system help clean deposits from fuel deposits from forming, allowing the injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel emission control system to work System Treatment PLUS is the only properly. In most cases, nothing gasoline additive recommended by should have to be added to the fuel. General Motors. It is available at However, some gasolines contain your dealer/retailer. Driving and Operating 9-41

Some gasolines that are not Filling the Tank reformulated for low emissions can WARNING (Continued) contain an octane-enhancing additive called { WARNING leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle. This is methylcyclopentadienyl manganese Fuel vapor burns violently and a tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant against the law in some places. fuel fire can cause bad injuries. where you buy gasoline whether the Do not re-enter the vehicle while To help avoid injuries to you and fuel contains MMT. We recommend pumping fuel. Keep children away against the use of such gasolines. others, read and follow all the from the fuel pump; never let Fuels containing MMT can reduce instructions on the fuel pump children pump fuel. the life of spark plugs and the island. Turn off the engine when performance of the emission control refueling. Do not smoke near fuel The tethered fuel cap is located system could be affected. The or when refueling the vehicle. Do behind a hinged fuel door on the malfunction indicator lamp might not use cellular phones. Keep driver side of the vehicle. turn on. If this occurs, return to your sparks, flames, and smoking To open the fuel door, push the dealer/retailer for service. materials away from fuel. Do not rearward center edge in and release (Continued) and it will open. 9-42 Driving and Operating

allow fuel to evaporate into the { WARNING atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5‑16. Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then { WARNING something ignites it, you could be If a fire starts while you are badly burned. This spray can refueling, do not remove the happen if the tank is nearly full, nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by and is more likely in hot weather. shutting off the pump or by Open the fuel cap slowly and wait notifying the station attendant. for any hiss noise to stop. Then Leave the area immediately. To remove the fuel cap, turn it unscrew the cap all the way. slowly counterclockwise. The fuel Notice: If a new fuel cap is cap has a spring in it; if the cap is Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not needed, be sure to get the right released too soon, it will spring back top off or overfill the tank and wait a type of cap from your dealer/ to the right. few seconds after you have finished retailer. The wrong type fuel cap pumping before removing the might not fit properly, might While refueling, hang the tethered nozzle. Clean fuel from painted cause the malfunction indicator fuel cap from the hook on the surfaces as soon as possible. See lamp to light, and could damage fuel door. Exterior Care on page 10‑86. the fuel tank and emissions When replacing the fuel cap, turn it system. See Malfunction Indicator clockwise until it clicks. Make sure Lamp on page 5‑16. the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would Driving and Operating 9-43

Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing Container . Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing { WARNING with the inside of the fill Information opening before operating the Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be Only use towing equipment that has while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is been designed for the vehicle. electricity discharge from the complete. Contact your dealer/retailer or container can ignite the fuel towing retailer for assistance with . Do not smoke while vapor. You can be badly burned preparing the vehicle for towing a pumping fuel. trailer. and the vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you . Do not use a cellular phone See the following trailer towing and others: while pumping fuel. information in this section: . Dispense fuel only into . For information on driving while approved containers. towing a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips. . Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a . For maximum vehicle and trailer vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, weights, see Trailer Towing. or on any surface other than . For information on equipment to the ground. tow a trailer, see Towing (Continued) Equipment. 9-44 Driving and Operating

For information on towing a disabled Pulling A Trailer vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on WARNING (Continued) Here are some important points: page 10‑82. For information on towing the vehicle behind another have been followed. Ask your . There are many laws, including vehicle — such as a motorhome, dealer/retailer for advice and speed limit restrictions that apply see Recreational Vehicle Towing on information about towing a trailer to trailering. Check for legal page 10‑82. with the vehicle. requirements with state or provincial police. The vehicle can tow a trailer when Driving Characteristics . equipped with the proper trailer Consider using sway control. and Towing Tips towing equipment. For trailering See Towing Equipment on capacity, see Trailer Towing on page 9‑51. { WARNING page 9‑48. Trailering changes . Do not tow a trailer at all during handling, acceleration, braking, the first 800 km (500 miles) the The driver can lose control when durability and fuel economy. With new vehicle is driven. The pulling a trailer if the correct the added weight, the engine, engine, axle or other parts could equipment is not used or the transmission, wheel assemblies and be damaged. vehicle is not driven properly. For tires are forced to work harder and . During the first 800 km under greater loads. The trailer also example, if the trailer is too (500 miles) that a trailer is heavy, the brakes may not work adds wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements. For safe towed, do not drive over 80 km/h well — or even at all. The driver (50 mph) and do not make starts and passengers could be trailering, correctly use the proper trailering equipment. at full throttle. This reduces wear seriously injured. The vehicle may on the vehicle. also be damaged; the resulting The following information has . The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). repairs would not be covered by important trailering tips and rules for Use a lower gear if the the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer your safety and that of your transmission shifts too often. only if all the steps in this section passengers. Read this section carefully before pulling a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in (Continued) this section. Driving and Operating 9-45

. Obey speed limit restrictions During the trip, check regularly to be . Improve control of vehicle speed when towing a trailer. sure that the load is secure, and the while requiring less throttle pedal activity. . The vehicle is designed primarily lamps and trailer brakes are working as a passenger and load properly. . Increase the charging system carrying vehicle. If a trailer is Towing with a Stability Control voltage to assist in recharging a towed, the vehicle will require battery installed in a trailer. more frequent maintenance due System to the additional load. When towing, the sound of the stability control system might be Driving with a Trailer heard. The system is reacting to the Towing a trailer requires experience. vehicle movement caused by the Get familiar with handling and trailer, which mainly occurs during braking with the added trailer cornering. This is normal when weight. The vehicle is now longer towing heavier trailers. Press this button located on the and not as responsive as the console to turn on and turn off the vehicle is by itself. Tow/Haul Mode Tow/Haul mode. Check all trailer hitch parts and Tow/Haul assists when pulling a The Tow/Haul light on the attachments, safety chains, heavy trailer or a large or heavy instrument panel comes on to electrical connectors, lamps, tires load. The purpose of the Tow/Haul indicate that Tow/Haul mode has and mirror adjustments. If the trailer mode is to: been selected. . has electric brakes, start the vehicle Reduce the frequency and Tow/Haul may be turned off by and trailer moving and then apply improve the predictability of pressing the button again, at which the trailer brake controller by hand transmission shifts. time the indicator light on the to be sure the brakes are working. . Provide the same solid shift feel instrument panel will turn off. The as when the vehicle is unloaded. vehicle will automatically turn off Tow/Haul every time it is started. 9-46 Driving and Operating

Tow/Haul is designed to be most Following Distance Making Turns effective when the vehicle and Stay at least twice as far behind the Notice: Making very sharp turns trailer combined weight is at least vehicle ahead as you would when while trailering could cause the 75 percent of the vehicle's Gross driving the vehicle without a trailer. trailer to come in contact with the Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). This can help to avoid situations vehicle. The vehicle could be See Trailer Towing on page 9 48. ‑ that require heavy braking and damaged. Avoid making very Tow/Haul is most useful when sudden turns. sharp turns while trailering. pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load under the following Passing When turning with a trailer, make driving conditions: wider turns than normal so the More passing distance is needed trailer will not strike soft shoulders, . Travelling through rolling terrain. when towing a trailer. Because the curbs, road signs, trees or other . Travelling in stop and go traffic. rig is longer, it is necessary to go objects. Use the turn signal well in farther beyond the passed vehicle advance and avoid jerky or sudden . Travelling in busy parking lots before returning to the lane. where improved low speed maneuvers. control of the vehicle is desired. Backing Up Turn Signals When Towing a Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul Hold the bottom of the steering Trailer when lightly loaded or with no trailer wheel with one hand. To move the The turn signal indicators on the will not cause damage but there is trailer to the left, move that hand to instrument panel flash whenever no benefit. Such a selection when the left. To move the trailer to the signaling a turn or lane change. unloaded may result in unpleasant right, move your hand to the right. Properly hooked up, the trailer engine and transmission driving Always back up slowly and, lamps also flash, telling other characteristics and reduced fuel if possible, have someone drivers the vehicle is turning, economy. guide you. changing lanes or stopping. Driving and Operating 9-47

When towing a trailer, the arrows on avoid this, let the engine run while If parking the rig on a hill: the instrument panel flash for turns parked, preferably on level ground, 1. Press the brake pedal, but do even if the bulbs on the trailer are with the transmission in P (Park) for not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn burned out. Check occasionally to a few minutes before turning the the wheels into the curb if facing be sure the trailer bulbs are still engine off. If the overheat warning downhill or into traffic if facing working. comes on, see Engine Overheating uphill. on page 10‑18. Driving On Grades 2. Have someone place chocks On a long uphill grade, shift down under the trailer wheels. Reduce speed and shift to a lower and reduce the vehicle speed to gear before starting down a long or around 88 km/h (55 mph) to reduce 3. When the wheel chocks are in steep downgrade. If the the possibility of the engine and the place, release the brake pedal transmission is not shifted down, the transmission overheating. until the chocks absorb the load. brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then longer work well. apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park). The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). { WARNING Use a lower gear if the transmission 5. Release the brake pedal. shifts too often. Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be When towing at high altitude on dangerous. If something goes steep uphill grades, engine coolant wrong, the rig could start to move. will boil at a lower temperature than People can be injured, and both at normal altitudes. If the engine is the vehicle and the trailer can be turned off immediately after towing damaged. When possible, always at high altitude on steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs park the rig on a flat surface. similar to engine overheating. To 9-48 Driving and Operating

Leaving After Parking on a Hill Check periodically to see that all Weight of the Trailer hitch nuts and bolts are tight. 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal How heavy can a trailer safely be? while you: Engine Cooling When Trailer Speed, altitude, road grades, . Start the engine. Towing outside temperature, special equipment, and the amount of . Shift into a gear. The cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating tongue weight the vehicle can carry . Release the parking brake. conditions. See Engine Overheating must be considered. See “Weight of 2. Let up on the brake pedal. on page 10‑18. the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for more information. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. Trailer Towing Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the Three important considerations 4. Stop and have someone pick up tow vehicle and it has all the have to do with weight: and store the chocks. required trailering equipment. The . Maintenance When Trailer The weight of the trailer weight of additional optional Towing . The weight of the trailer tongue equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted The vehicle needs service more . The total weight on the vehicle's from the maximum trailer weight. often when pulling a trailer. See this tires manual's Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake system. Inspect these before and during the trip. Driving and Operating 9-49

Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options. Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR Front-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg) Front-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,250 lbs (4 649 kg) All-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg) All-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,450 lbs (4 740 kg) *The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for our Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the will also reduce the trailer weight the trailering information or advice. See curb weight of the vehicle, any vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, Customer Assistance Offices on cargo carried in it, and the people the tongue load must be added to page 13‑3 for more information. who will be riding in the vehicle. the GVW because the vehicle will If there are a lot of options, be carrying that weight, too. See Weight of the Trailer Tongue equipment, passengers or cargo in Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10 The tongue load (A) of any trailer is the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue an important weight to measure weight the vehicle can carry, which because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle. The Gross 9-50 Driving and Operating

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or applied well behind the rear axle, the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle the effect on the rear axle is greater Weight Rating). The effect of than just the weight itself, as much additional weight may reduce the as 1.5 times as much. The weight at trailering capacity more than the the rear axle could be 386 kg total of the additional weight. (850 lbs) X 1.5 = 578 kg (1,275 lbs). Consider the following example: Since the rear axle already weighs 1 225 kg (2,700 lbs), adding 578 kg A vehicle model base weight is (1,275 lbs) brings the total to 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs); 1 270 kg 1 803 kg (3,975 lbs). This is very (2,800 lbs) at the front axle and close to, but within the limit for 1 225 kg (2,700 lbs) at the rear axle. RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set It has a GVWR of 3 266 kg If a weight-carrying hitch or a to trailer up to 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs). (7,200 lbs), a RGAWR of 1 814 kg weight-distributing hitch is being (4,000 lbs) and a GCWR (Gross If the vehicle has many options and used, the trailer tongue (A) should Combination Weight Rating) of there is a front seat passenger and weigh 10-15 percent of the total 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs). The trailer two rear seat passengers with some loaded trailer weight (B). rating should be: luggage and gear in the vehicle as After loading the trailer, weigh the well. 136 kg (300 lbs) could be trailer and then the tongue, added to the front axle weight and separately, to see if the weights are 181 kg (400 lbs) to the rear axle proper. If they are not, adjustments weight. The vehicle now weighs: might be made by moving some items around in the trailer. Trailering may be limited by the vehicle's ability to carry tongue Expect tongue weight to be at least weight. Tongue weight cannot cause 10 percent of trailer weight (386 kg the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (850 lbs)) and because the weight is Driving and Operating 9-51

Weight is still below 3 266 kg It is important that the vehicle Towing Equipment (7,200 lbs) and you might think 318 does not exceed any of its additional kilograms (700 lbs) should ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Hitches be subtracted from the trailering Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue It is important to have the correct capacity to stay within GCWR limits. Weight. The only way to be sure it is hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large The maximum trailer would only be not exceeding any of these ratings trucks going by and rough roads are 3 538 kg (7,800 lbs). You may go is to weigh the vehicle and trailer. a few reasons why the right hitch is further and think the tongue weight needed. should be limited to less than 454 kg Total Weight on the Vehicle's (1,000 lbs) to avoid exceeding Tires . The rear bumper on the vehicle GVWR. But the effect on the rear Inflate the vehicle's tires to the is not intended for hitches. Do axle must still be considered. upper limit for cold tires. These not attach rental hitches or other Because the rear axle now weighs numbers can be found on the bumper-type hitches to it. Use 1 406 kg (3,100 lbs), 408 kg (900 lbs) Certification label or see Vehicle only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper. can be put on the rear axle without Load Limits on page 9‑10 for more exceeding RGAWR. The effect of information. Do not go over the . Will any holes be made in the tongue weight is about 1.5 times the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the body of the vehicle when the actual weight. Dividing the 408 kg GAWR, including the weight of the trailer hitch is installed? If there (900 lbs) by 1.5 leaves only 272 kg trailer tongue. If using a weight are, then be sure to seal the (600 lbs) of tongue weight that can distributing hitch, do not go over the holes when the hitch is removed. be handled. Since tongue weight is rear axle limit before applying the If the holes are not sealed, dirt, usually at least 10 percent of total weight distribution spring bars. water, and deadly carbon loaded trailer weight, expect that the monoxide (CO) from the exhaust largest trailer the vehicle can may get into the vehicle. See properly handle is 2 722 kg Engine Exhaust on page 9‑21. (6,000 lbs). 9-52 Driving and Operating

Weight-Distributing Hitches and Safety Chains Trailer Wiring Harness Weight Carrying Hitches Always attach chains between the Basic Trailer Wiring vehicle and the trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of The trailer wiring harness, with a the trailer to help prevent the tongue seven-pin connector, is located at from contacting the road if it the rear of the vehicle and is tied to becomes separated from the hitch. the vehicle's frame. The harness Always leave just enough slack so connector can be plugged into a the rig can turn. Never allow safety seven-pin universal heavy-duty chains to drag on the ground. trailer connector available through your dealer/retailer. Trailer Brakes The seven-wire harness contains A loaded trailer that weighs more the following trailer circuits: than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to . Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal A. Body-to-Ground Distance have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the . Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn B. Front of Vehicle trailer. Be sure to read and follow Signal When using a weight-distributing the instructions for the trailer brakes . Brown: Taillamps so they are installed, adjusted and hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so . Black: Ground that the distance (A) remains the maintained properly. . same both before and after coupling Because the vehicle has antilock Light Green: Back-up Lamps the trailer to the tow vehicle. brakes, do not try to tap into the . Red/Black: Battery Feed vehicle's hydraulic brake system. . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake* If you do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all. *The fuse for this circuit is installed in the underhood electrical center, but the wires are not connected. Driving and Operating 9-53

They should be connected by your Electric Trailer Brake Control Conversions and dealer/retailer or a qualified service Wiring Provisions center. These wiring provisions for an Add-Ons If the back-up lamp circuit is not electric trailer brake controller are functional, contact your dealer/ included with the vehicle as part of Add-On Electrical retailer. the trailer wiring package. The Equipment instrument panel contains blunt cut If a remote (non-vehicle) battery is Notice: Do not add anything being charged, press the Tow/Haul wires behind the steering column for the electric trailer brake controller. electrical to the vehicle unless mode switch located on the center you check with your dealer/ console near the climate controls. The harness contains the following wires: retailer first. Some electrical This will boost the vehicle system equipment can damage the voltage and properly charge the . Red/Black: Power Supply vehicle and the damage would battery. If the trailer is too light for . White: Brake Switch Signal not be covered by the vehicle's Tow/Haul mode, turn on the warranty. Some add-on electrical headlamps (Non-HID only) as a . Gray: Illumination equipment can keep other second way to boost the vehicle . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal components from working as system and charge the battery. they should. . Black: Ground Add-on equipment can drain the The electric trailer brake controller vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is should be installed by your dealer/ not operating. retailer or a qualified service center. The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3‑44 and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3‑45. 9-54 Driving and Operating

2 NOTES Vehicle Care 10-1

Overheated Engine Electrical System Vehicle Care Protection High Voltage Devices and Operating Mode ...... 10-20 Wiring ...... 10-29 General Information Power Steering Fluid ...... 10-20 Electrical System Washer Fluid ...... 10-21 Overload ...... 10-29 General Information ...... 10-2 Brakes ...... 10-22 Fuses and Circuit California Proposition Brake Fluid ...... 10-23 Breakers ...... 10-30 65 Warning ...... 10-3 Battery ...... 10-24 Engine Compartment Fuse California Perchlorate Starter Switch Check ...... 10-25 Block ...... 10-30 Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Automatic Transmission Shift Instrument Panel Fuse Accessories and Lock Control System Block ...... 10-33 Modifications ...... 10-3 Check ...... 10-25 Vehicle Checks Ignition Transmission Lock Wheels and Tires Doing Your Own Check ...... 10-25 Tires ...... 10-36 Service Work ...... 10-4 Park Brake and P (Park) Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 10-36 Hood ...... 10-5 Mechanism Check ...... 10-26 Tire Designations ...... 10-38 Engine Compartment Wiper Blade Tire Terminology and Definitions ...... 10-39 Overview ...... 10-6 Replacement ...... 10-26 Tire Pressure ...... 10-42 Engine Cover ...... 10-7 Headlamp Aiming Tire Pressure Monitor Engine Oil ...... 10-8 Headlamp Aiming ...... 10-27 System ...... 10-43 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Tire Pressure Monitor Automatic Transmission Bulb Replacement Operation ...... 10-44 Fluid ...... 10-11 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-27 Tire Inspection ...... 10-48 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12 Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-27 Tire Rotation ...... 10-48 Cooling System ...... 10-14 Taillamps, Turn Signal, When It Is Time for New Engine Coolant ...... 10-14 Sidemarker, and Tires ...... 10-49 Engine Overheating ...... 10-18 Stoplamps ...... 10-28 Buying New Tires ...... 10-50 Replacement Bulbs ...... 10-29 10-2 Vehicle Care

Different Size Tires and Jump Starting General Information Wheels ...... 10-51 Jump Starting ...... 10-78 Uniform Tire Quality For service and parts needs, visit Grading ...... 10-52 Towing your dealer/retailer. You will receive Wheel Alignment and Tire Towing the Vehicle ...... 10-82 genuine GM parts and GM-trained Balance ...... 10-53 Recreational Vehicle and supported service people. Towing ...... 10-82 Wheel Replacement ...... 10-54 Genuine GM parts have one of Tire Chains ...... 10-55 Appearance Care these marks: If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 10-56 Exterior Care ...... 10-86 Tire Sealant and Interior Care ...... 10-89 Compressor Kit ...... 10-58 Floor Mats ...... 10-92 Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 10-65 Tire Changing ...... 10-66 Secondary Latch System . . . 10-75 Compact Spare Tire ...... 10-77 Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition California Perchlorate Accessories and 65 Warning Materials Requirements Modifications Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive Adding non-dealer/non-retailer one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag accessories to the vehicle can affect known to the State of California to initiators, seat belt pretensioners, vehicle performance and safety, cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in including such things as airbags, other reproductive harm. Engine remote keyless transmitters, may braking, stability, ride and handling, exhaust, many parts and systems, contain perchlorate materials. emissions systems, aerodynamics, many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary. durability, and electronic systems wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see like antilock brakes, traction control, emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ and stability control. Some of these perchlorate. accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including control module modifications, are not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts. 10-4 Vehicle Care

GM Accessories are designed to Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service complement and function with other work, use the proper service systems on the vehicle. Your GM manual. It tells you much more dealer/retailer can accessorize the Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle vehicle using genuine GM Service Work than this manual can. To order the Accessories. When you go to your proper service manual, see Service GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM { WARNING Publications Ordering Information on Accessories, you will know that page 13‑13. GM-trained and supported service You can be injured and the This vehicle has an airbag system. technicians will perform the work vehicle could be damaged if you Before attempting to do your own using genuine GM Accessories. try to do service work on a vehicle service work, see Airbag System Also, see Adding Equipment to the without knowing enough about it. Check on page 3‑46. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on . Be sure you have sufficient Keep a record with all parts receipts page 3‑45. knowledge, experience, the and list the mileage and the date of proper replacement parts, any service work performed. See and tools before attempting Maintenance Records on any vehicle page 11‑10. maintenance task. . Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other fasteners. English and metric fasteners can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are used, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. Vehicle Care 10-5

Hood 2. At the front of the vehicle, pull Pull the hood down to close. Lower up on the center of the hood, the hood until the lifting pressure of To open the hood, do the following: and push the secondary hood the strut is reduced. Then allow the release to the right. hood to fall and latch into place 3. After you have partially lifted the under its own weight. Check to hood, gas struts will make sure the hood is closed. If the automatically take over to lift and hood does not fully latch, gently hold the hood in the fully open push the hood down at the front and position. center of the hood until it is completely latched. 1. Pull the hood release handle Before closing the hood, be sure all with this symbol on it. It is filler caps are on properly. located under the instrument panel on the driver's side of the vehicle. 10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Radiator Pressure Cap. See H. Engine Cover on page 10‑7. Engine Cover Cooling System on page 10‑14. I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. “Checking Engine Oil” under See Cooling System on Engine Oil on page 10‑8. page 10‑14. J. Automatic Transmission Fluid C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. Dipstick. See “Checking the See Jump Starting on Fluid Level” under Automatic page 10‑78. Transmission Fluid on D. Engine Compartment Fuse page 10‑11. Block on page 10‑30. K. Brake Master Cylinder E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” See Jump Starting on under Brakes on page 10‑22. page 10‑78. L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on A. Oil Fill Cap F. Power Steering Reservoir and page 10‑12. Cap (under engine cover). See M. Windshield Washer Fluid B. Engine Cover Power Steering Fluid on Reservoir. See “Adding Washer To remove: page 10 20. Fluid under Washer Fluid on ‑ ” 1. Remove the oil fill cap (A). G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See When page 10‑21. “ 2. Raise the engine cover (B) to to Add Engine Oil under Engine ” release from the retainers. Oil on page 10‑8. 3. Lift and remove the engine cover. 4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall engine cover. 10-8 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must See Engine Compartment Overview be on level ground. on page 10‑6 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. The engine oil dipstick handle is a If the oil is below the cross-hatched yellow loop. See Engine area at the tip of the dipstick, add at Add enough oil to put the level Compartment Overview on least one quart/liter of the somewhere in the proper operating recommended oil. This section range in the cross-hatched area. page 10‑6 for the location of the engine oil dipstick. explains what kind of oil to use. For Push the dipstick all the way back in engine oil crankcase capacity, see when through. 1. Turn off the engine and give the Capacities and Specifications on oil several minutes to drain back page 12‑2. into the oil pan. If this is not done, the oil dipstick might not Notice: Do not add too much oil. show the actual level. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it cross-hatched area that shows with a paper towel or cloth, then the proper operating range, the push it back in all the way. engine could be damaged. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. Vehicle Care 10-9

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use . GM6094M Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Look for three things: Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute . SAE 5W-30 Certified For Gasoline Engines SAE 5W-30 is best for the starburst symbol. Failure to use vehicle. These numbers on an the recommended oil can result oil container show its viscosity, in engine damage not covered by or thickness. Do not use other the vehicle warranty. viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. Cold Temperature Operation . American Petroleum Institute If in an area of extreme cold, where (API) starburst symbol the temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required specification, GM6094M. See “What Oils meeting these requirements Kind of Engine Oil to Use” for more should have the starburst information. symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). 10-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Additives / Engine When the system has calculated How to Reset the Engine Oil Oil Flushes that oil life has been diminished, it Life System indicates that an oil change is Do not add anything to the oil. The necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE The Engine Oil Life System recommended oils with the starburst OIL SOON message comes on. calculates when to change the symbol that meet GM Standard Change the oil as soon as possible engine oil and filter based on GM6094M are all that is needed for within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). vehicle use. Whenever the oil is good performance and engine It is possible that, if driving under changed, reset the system so it can protection. the best conditions, the oil life calculate when the next oil change Engine oil system flushes are not system might not indicate that an oil is required. If a situation occurs recommended and could cause change is necessary for over a year. where the oil is changed prior to a engine damage not covered by the However, the engine oil and filter CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON vehicle warranty. must be changed at least once a message being turned on, reset the year and at this time the system system. Engine Oil Life System must be reset. Your dealer/retailer If the vehicle does not have Driver has trained service people who will Information Center (DIC) buttons: When to Change Engine Oil perform this work using genuine 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, parts and reset the system. It is also This vehicle has a computer system with the engine off. The vehicle important to check the oil regularly that indicates when to change the must be in P (Park) to access and keep it at the proper level. engine oil and filter. This is based this display. Press the trip on engine revolutions and engine If the system is ever reset odometer reset stem until OIL temperature, and not on mileage. accidentally, the oil must be LIFE REMAINING displays. Based on driving conditions, the changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) 2. Press and hold the trip odometer mileage at which an oil change is since the last oil change. reset stem until OIL LIFE indicated can vary considerably. For Remember to reset the oil life REMAINING shows 100%. the oil life system to work properly, system whenever the oil is changed. Three chimes sound and the the system must be reset every time CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON the oil is changed. message goes off. Vehicle Care 10-11

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. What to Do with Used Oil Automatic Transmission If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Used engine oil contains certain Fluid SOON message comes back on elements that can be unhealthy for It is not necessary to check the when the vehicle is started, the your skin and could even cause transmission fluid level. engine oil life system has not cancer. Do not let used oil stay on A transmission fluid leak is the only reset. Repeat the procedure. your skin for very long. Clean your reason for fluid loss. If a leak skin and nails with soap and water, If the vehicle has Driver Information occurs, take the vehicle to the or a good hand cleaner. Wash or Center (DIC) buttons: dealer/retailer and have it repaired properly dispose of clothing or rags as soon as possible. 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, containing used engine oil. See the with the engine off. manufacturer's warnings about the Change the fluid at the intervals 2. Press the vehicle information use and disposal of oil products. listed in Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2, and be sure to use the button until OIL LIFE Used oil can be a threat to the ‑ transmission fluid listed in REMAINING displays. environment. If you change your Recommended Fluids and own oil, be sure to drain all the oil 3. Press and hold the set/reset Lubricants on page 11‑7. button until 100% is displayed. from the filter before disposal. Never Three chimes sound and the dispose of oil by putting it in the Notice: Use of the incorrect CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON trash, pouring it on the ground, into automatic transmission fluid may message goes off. sewers, or into streams or bodies of damage the vehicle, and the water. Recycle it by taking it to a damages may not be covered by 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. place that collects used oil. the vehicle's warranty. Always If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON use the automatic transmission message comes back on when the fluid listed in Recommended vehicle is started, the engine oil life Fluids and Lubricants on system has not reset. Repeat the page 11‑7. procedure. 10-12 Vehicle Care

The transmission fluid will not reach See Engine Compartment Overview To inspect or replace the engine air the end of the dipstick unless the on page 10‑6 for the location of the cleaner/filter: transmission is at operating engine air cleaner/filter. 1. Remove the engine cover. See temperature. If you need to check Engine Cover on page 10‑7. the transmission fluid level, please How to Inspect the Engine Air take the vehicle to your dealer/ Cleaner/Filter retailer. To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the vehicle Engine Air Cleaner/Filter and lightly shake the filter (away from vehicle) to release loose dust When to Inspect the Engine Air and dirt. If the filter remains caked Cleaner/Filter with dirt, a new filter is required. Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more information. A. Ventilation Tube If you are driving in dusty/dirty B. Sensor conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. 2. Disconnect the cover fitting from the ventilation tube (A). 3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the sensor (B). Vehicle Care 10-13

6. Remove the housing cover (C) with outlet duct. { WARNING 7. Remove the filter (D) and any Operating the engine with the air loose debris that may be found cleaner/filter off can cause you or in the base (E). others to be burned. The air 8. Inspect or replace the filter (D). cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine 9. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 to reinstall the housing cover and backfires. If it is not there and the reconnect the electrical engine backfires, you could be connector to the sensor. burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on the A. Clamp 10. Reinstall the engine cover. See engine with the air cleaner/ Engine Cover on page 10‑7. B. Screws filter off. C. Housing Cover Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is D. Filter off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt E. Base can easily get into the engine, 4. Loosen the outlet duct which will damage it. Always clamp (A). have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving. 5. Loosen the six housing cover (C) screws (B). 10-14 Vehicle Care

Cooling System Notice: Using coolant other than { WARNING DEX-COOL® can cause premature The cooling system allows the engine, heater core, or radiator engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan corrosion. In addition, the engine working temperature. under the hood can start up even coolant could require changing when the engine is not running sooner, at 50 000 km and can cause injury. Keep (30,000 miles) or 24 months, hands, clothing, and tools away whichever occurs first. Any from any underhood electric fan. repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant { WARNING in the vehicle. Heater and radiator hoses, and Engine Coolant other engine parts, can be very The cooling system in the vehicle is hot. Do not touch them. If you do, ® you can be burned. filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. The coolant is designed to A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank Do not run the engine if there is a remain in the vehicle for five years leak. If you run the engine, it or 240 000 km (150,000 miles), B. Radiator Pressure Cap could lose all coolant. That could whichever occurs first. C. Engine Cooling Fans cause an engine fire, and you The following explains the cooling could be burned. Get any leak system and how to check and add fixed before you drive the vehicle. coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page 10‑18. Vehicle Care 10-15

What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or drinkable water and DEX-COOL additives are used in the vehicle's { WARNING coolant. If using this mixture, cooling system, the vehicle could nothing else needs to be added. be damaged. Use only the proper Adding only plain water to the This mixture: mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system can be . Gives freezing protection down dangerous. Plain water, or some to −37°C (−34°F), outside cooling system. See other liquid such as alcohol, can temperature. Recommended Fluids and boil before the proper coolant Lubricants on page 11‑7 for . Gives boiling protection up to more information. mixture will. The vehicle's coolant 129°C (265°F), engine warning system is set for the temperature. Checking Coolant proper coolant mixture. With plain . The vehicle must be on a level water or the wrong mixture, the Protects against rust and surface when checking the coolant engine could get too hot but you corrosion. level. would not get the overheat . Will not damage aluminum parts. Check to see if coolant is visible in warning. The engine could catch . Helps keep the proper engine the coolant recovery tank. If the fire and you or others could be temperature. burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of coolant inside the coolant recovery clean, drinkable water and Notice: If an improper coolant tank is boiling, do not do anything DEX-COOL® coolant. mixture is used, the engine could else until it cools down. If coolant is overheat and be badly damaged. visible but the coolant level is not at The repair cost would not be or above the FULL COLD mark, add covered by the vehicle warranty. a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Too much water in the mixture water and DEX-COOL coolant at the can freeze and crack the engine, coolant recovery tank, but be sure radiator, heater core, and other parts. 10-16 Vehicle Care the cooling system is cool before How to Add Coolant to the How to Add Coolant to the this is done. See Cooling System on Recovery Tank Radiator page 10‑14 for more information. { WARNING { WARNING

You can be burned if you spill An electric engine cooling fan coolant on hot engine parts. under the hood can start up even Coolant contains ethylene glycol when the engine is not running and it will burn if the engine parts and can cause injury. Keep are hot enough. Do not spill hands, clothing, and tools away The coolant recovery tank cap has coolant on a hot engine. from any underhood electric fan. this symbol on it. When the engine is cold, the coolant Notice: This vehicle has a level should be at or above the specific coolant fill procedure. { WARNING FULL COLD line marked on the Failure to follow this procedure recovery tank. could cause the engine to Steam and scalding liquids from a When the engine is hot, the level overheat and be severely hot cooling system can blow out damaged. could be higher than the FULL and burn you badly. They are COLD line. If the coolant is below If coolant is needed, add the proper under pressure, and if you turn the FULL COLD line when the DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the the surge tank pressure engine is hot, there could be a leak coolant recovery tank. cap — even a little — they can in the cooling system. come out at high speed. Never If the coolant is low, add the coolant turn the cap when the cooling or take the vehicle to a dealer/ system, including the surge tank retailer for service. pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the (Continued) Vehicle Care 10-17

2. Remove the radiator pressure WARNING (Continued) cap when the cooling system, including the upper radiator cooling system and surge tank hose, is no longer hot. pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full If coolant is needed, add the proper turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for mixture directly to the radiator, but that to stop. A hiss means there be sure the cooling system is cool is still some pressure left in the before this is done. system.

6. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL COLD mark. 7. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank but leave the radiator pressure cap off. 3. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it. 4. Fill the radiator to the base of the filler neck with the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture. 5. When coolant begins to flow out 1. Detach fasteners and lift off the of the filler neck, reinstall the panel that covers the pressure cap. Be sure to secure radiator cap. it tightly. 10-18 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the pressure cap is not If you do decide to lift the hood , tightly installed, coolant loss and make sure the vehicle is parked on possible engine damage may a level surface. occur. Be sure the cap is properly Then check to see if the engine and tightly secured. cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans Engine Overheating should be running. If they are not, The vehicle has several indicators do not continue to run the engine to warn of engine overheating. and have the vehicle serviced. There is an engine coolant Notice: Engine damage from temperature gage on the instrument running the engine without coolant is not covered by the 8. Start the engine and let it run panel cluster. See Engine Coolant warranty. until the upper radiator hose Temperature Gage on page 5‑12. feels warm. Any time during this The vehicle may also display an Notice: If the engine catches fire procedure, watch out for the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE while driving with no coolant, the engine cooling fan(s). ENGINE and ENGINE vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be 9. If the coolant level inside the OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE covered by the vehicle warranty. radiator filler neck is low, add message in the Driver Information See Overheated Engine more of the proper DEX-COOL Center (DIC). See Warning Lights, Protection Operating Mode on coolant mixture through the filler Gages, and Indicators on page 10 20 for information on neck until the level is back up to page 5‑10. ‑ driving to a safe place in an the base of the filler neck. You may decide not to lift the hood emergency. Replace the pressure cap. Be when this warning appears, but sure to secure it tightly. instead get service help right away. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 13‑6. Vehicle Care 10-19

If Steam Is Coming From The If the overheat warning is displayed Engine Compartment WARNING (Continued) with no sign of steam: See Overheated Engine 1. Turn the air conditioning off. { WARNING Protection Operating Mode on 2. Turn the heater on to the highest page 10‑20 for information on Steam from an overheated engine temperature and to the highest driving to a safe place in an fan speed. Open the windows as can burn you badly, even if you emergency. necessary. just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear 3. If in a traffic jam, shift to If No Steam Is Coming From N (Neutral), otherwise, shift to steam coming from it. Turn it off The Engine Compartment and get everyone away from the the highest gear while vehicle until it cools down. Wait If an engine overheat warning is driving — D (Drive) or L (Low). until there is no sign of steam or displayed but no steam can be seen If the temperature overheat gage is coolant before you open or heard, the problem may not be no longer in the overheat zone or an the hood. too serious. Sometimes the engine overheat warning no longer can get a little too hot when the displays, the vehicle can be driven. If you keep driving when the vehicle: Continue to drive the vehicle slow vehicles engine is overheated, . Climbs a long hill on a hot day. for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe the liquids in it can catch fire. You vehicle distance from the car in front . Stops after high-speed driving. or others could be badly burned. of you. If the warning does not come Stop the engine if it overheats, . Idles for long periods in traffic. back on, continue to drive normally. and get out of the vehicle until the . Tows a trailer. engine is cool. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle (Continued) right away. If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while parked. If the warning is still 10-20 Vehicle Care displayed, turn off the engine until it engine oil will be severely noise. A fluid loss in this system cools down. Also, see “Overheated degraded. Repair the cause of could indicate a problem. Have the Engine Protection Operating Mode” coolant loss, change the oil and system inspected and repaired. next in this section. reset the oil life system. See How to Check Power Steering Engine Oil on page 10‑8. Overheated Engine Fluid Protection Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid: Operating Mode 1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down. This emergency operating mode lets the vehicle be driven to a safe place 2. Remove the engine cover. See in an emergency situation. If an Engine Cover on page 10‑7. overheated engine condition exists, 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the an overheat protection mode which reservoir clean. alternates firing groups of cylinders The power steering fluid reservoir is helps prevent engine damage. In located under the engine cover on 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the this mode, there is a significant loss the passenger side of the vehicle. dipstick with a clean rag. in power and engine performance. See Engine Compartment Overview 5. Replace the cap and completely The temperature gage indicates an on page 10‑6 for reservoir location. tighten it. overheat condition exists. Driving 6. Remove the cap again and look extended distances and/or towing a When to Check Power Steering at the fluid level on the dipstick. trailer in the overheat protection Fluid mode should be avoided. It is not necessary to regularly The fluid level should be somewhere between MAX and MIN Notice: After driving in the check power steering fluid unless line on the dipstick in room overheated engine protection you suspect there is a leak in the temperature. If the fluid is on or operating mode, to avoid engine system or you hear an unusual below MIN line, you should add fluid damage, allow the engine to cool close to MAX Line. before attempting any repair. The Vehicle Care 10-21

What to Use Adding Washer Fluid . Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. To determine what kind of fluid to When the windshield washer fluid Water can cause the solution use, see Recommended Fluids and reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID to freeze and damage your Lubricants on page 11‑7. Always LOW ADD FLUID message will be washer fluid tank and other use the proper fluid. displayed on the Driver Information parts of the washer system. Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid Center (DIC). See Washer Fluid Also, water does not clean as may damage the vehicle and the Messages on page 5‑39 for more well as washer fluid. information. damages may not be covered by . Fill the washer fluid tank only the vehicle's warranty. Always three-quarters full when it is use the correct fluid listed in very cold. This allows for Recommended Fluids and fluid expansion if freezing Lubricants on page 11‑7. occurs, which could damage the tank if it is Washer Fluid completely full. What to Use Open the cap with the washer . Do not use engine coolant symbol on it. Add washer fluid until (antifreeze) in your When adding windshield washer the tank is full. See Engine windshield washer. It can fluid, be sure to read the Compartment Overview on damage the vehicle's manufacturer's instructions before page 10‑6 for reservoir location. windshield washer system use. If the vehicle will be operating and paint. in an area where the temperature Notice: may fall below freezing, use a fluid . When using concentrated that has sufficient protection against washer fluid, follow the freezing. manufacturer's instructions for adding water. 10-22 Vehicle Care

Brakes Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment can cause a brake squeal when the Every time the brakes are applied, This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brakes are first applied or lightly with or without the vehicle moving, brake pads have built-in wear applied. This does not mean the brakes adjust for wear. indicators that make a high-pitched something is wrong with the brakes. warning sound when the brake pads Replacing Brake System Parts are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed specifications in Capacities and { WARNING and tested with top-quality brake Specifications on page 12‑2. parts. When parts of the braking The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts. not work well. That could lead to If this is not done, the brakes might Brake Pedal Travel an accident. When the brake not work properly. For example, wear warning sound is heard, See your dealer/retailer if the brake installing disc brake pads that are wrong for the vehicle, can change have the vehicle serviced. pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase the balance between the front and Notice: Continuing to drive with in pedal travel. This could be a sign rear brakes — for the worse. The worn-out brake pads could result that brake service might be braking performance expected can in costly brake repair. required. change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed. Vehicle Care 10-23

Brake Fluid . A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause { WARNING a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a If too much brake fluid is added, it leak means that sooner or later can spill on the engine and burn, the brakes will not work well. if the engine is hot enough. You Do not top off the brake fluid. or others could be burned, and Adding fluid does not correct a leak. the vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is The brake master cylinder reservoir If fluid is added when the linings are done on the brake hydraulic is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as worn, there will be too much fluid indicated on the reservoir cap. See when new brake linings are system. Engine Compartment Overview on installed. Add or remove brake fluid, When the brake fluid falls to a low page 10 6 for the location of the as necessary, only when work is ‑ level, the brake warning light comes reservoir. done on the brake hydraulic system. on. See Brake System Warning There are only two reasons why the Light on page 5‑18. brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down: What to Add . The brake fluid level goes down Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid because of normal brake lining from a sealed container. See wear. When new linings are Recommended Fluids and installed, the fluid level goes Lubricants on page 11‑7. back up. 10-24 Vehicle Care

Always clean the brake fluid . If brake fluid is spilled on Vehicle Storage reservoir cap and the area around the vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can the cap before removing it. This { WARNING helps keep dirt from entering the be damaged. Be careful not reservoir. to spill brake fluid on the Batteries have acid that can burn vehicle. If you do, wash it off you and gas that can explode. immediately. { WARNING You can be badly hurt if you are Battery not careful. See Jump Starting on With the wrong kind of fluid in the page 10‑78 for tips on working brake hydraulic system, the Refer to the replacement number on around a battery without brakes might not work well. This the original battery label when a getting hurt. could cause a crash. Always use new battery is needed. the proper brake fluid. Infrequent Usage: Remove the { DANGER black, negative (−) cable from the Notice: battery to keep the battery from . Using the wrong fluid can Battery posts, terminals, and running down. badly damage brake related accessories contain lead Extended Storage: Remove the hydraulic system parts. For and lead compounds, chemicals black, negative (−) cable from the example, just a few drops of known to the State of California to battery or use a battery trickle mineral-based oil, such as cause cancer and reproductive charger. engine oil, in the brake harm. Wash hands after handling. hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. Vehicle Care 10-25

Starter Switch Check Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN, but do not Shift Lock Control start the engine. Without { WARNING System Check applying the regular brake, try to When you are doing this move the shift lever out of P (Park) with normal effort. If the inspection, the vehicle could { WARNING shift lever moves out of P (Park), move suddenly. If the vehicle When you are doing this contact your dealer/retailer for moves, you or others could be inspection, the vehicle could service. injured. move suddenly. If the vehicle 1. Before starting this check, be moves, you or others could be Ignition Transmission sure there is enough room injured. Lock Check around the vehicle. 1. Before starting this check, be While parked, and with the parking 2. Firmly apply both the parking sure there is enough room brake set, try to turn the ignition to brake and the regular brake. around the vehicle. It should be LOCK/OFF in each shift lever See Parking Brake on parked on a level surface. position. page 9‑26. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. . The ignition should turn to Do not use the accelerator See Parking Brake on LOCK/OFF only when the shift pedal, and be ready to turn off page 9‑26. lever is in P (Park). the engine immediately if it . The ignition key should come starts. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle out only in LOCK/OFF. 3. Try to start the engine in each begins to move. Contact your dealer/retailer if gear. The vehicle should start service is required. only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer/ retailer for service. 10-26 Vehicle Care

Park Brake and P (Park) . To check the P (Park) Replacement blades come in mechanism's holding ability: different types and are removed in Mechanism Check With the engine running, shift to different ways. To replace the wiper P (Park). Then release the blade assembly: { WARNING parking brake followed by the regular brake. 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm When you are doing this check, away from the windshield. Contact your dealer/retailer if the vehicle could begin to move. service is required. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Wiper Blade Replacement Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to Windshield wiper blades should be roll. Be ready to apply the regular inspected for wear or cracking. See brake at once should the vehicle Scheduled Maintenance on begin to move. page 11‑2 for more information.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. 2. Press the button in the middle of . To check the parking brake's the wiper arm connector and pull holding ability: With the engine the wiper blade away from the running and the transmission in arm connector. N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake 3. Install the new wiper blade and pedal. Do this until the vehicle is make sure the wiper blade locks held by the parking brake only. into place. Vehicle Care 10-27

For the proper size and type see Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 11‑9. Headlamp aim has been preset at For the proper type of replacement the factory and should need no bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on Backglass Wiper Blade further adjustment. page 10‑29. To replace the backglass wiper However, if your vehicle is damaged For any bulb changing procedure blade: in a crash, the headlamp aim may not listed in this section, contact 1. Pull the wiper blade assembly be affected. Aim adjustment to the your dealer/retailer. away from the backglass. low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming drivers flash Halogen Bulbs The backglass wiper blade will their high-beam headlamps at you not lock in a vertical position so (for vertical aim). care should be used when { WARNING pulling it away from the vehicle. If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is recommended that Halogen bulbs have pressurized 2. Rotate the wiper blade you take the vehicle to your dealer/ gas inside and can burst if you assembly, hold the wiper arm in retailer for service. drop or scratch the bulb. You or position, and push the blade others could be injured. Be sure away from the wiper arm. to read and follow the instructions 3. Replace the wiper blade. on the bulb package. 4. Return the wiper arm and blade assembly to the rest position on the glass. 10-28 Vehicle Care

Taillamps, Turn Signal, To replace one of these bulbs: Sidemarker, and 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate Stoplamps on page 2‑9. 2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehicle has one.

4. Remove the two nuts holding the taillamp assembly in place. 5. Pull out the taillamp assembly. 6. Turn the bulb socket A. Sidemarker Lamp counterclockwise and pull it straight out to remove it from the B. Taillamp 3. Remove the two taillamp nut taillamp assembly. covers. 7. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket. 8. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket until it connects. Vehicle Care 10-29

9. Push the taillamp assembly back Electrical System Electrical System into its original location. Overload When reinstalling the taillamp High Voltage Devices and assembly, make sure the pin on The vehicle has fuses and circuit the taillamp assembly lines up Wiring breakers to protect against an and is inserted correctly into the electrical system overload. opening of the vehicle. { WARNING When the current electrical load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens 10. Reinstall the two nuts that hold Exposure to high voltage can the taillamp assembly in place. and closes, protecting the circuit cause shock, burns, and even until the current load returns to 11. Reinstall the two taillamp nut death. The high voltage systems normal or the problem is fixed. This covers. in your vehicle can only be greatly reduces the chance of circuit serviced by technicians with overload and fire caused by Replacement Bulbs special training. electrical problems. Bulb High voltage devices are Exterior Lamp Fuses and circuit breakers protect Number identified by labels. Do not the following in the vehicle: Rear remove, open, take apart, . Headlamp Wiring 194 Sidemarker Lamp or modify these devices. High voltage cable or wiring has . Windshield Wiper Motor Rear Turn Signal 7443 orange covering. Do not probe, . Power Windows and other and Taillamps (W21/5W) tamper with, cut, or modify high Power Accessories For replacement bulbs not listed voltage cable or wiring. here, contact your dealer/retailer. 10-30 Vehicle Care

Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit An electrical overload may cause Breakers the lamps to go on and off, or in The wiring circuits in your vehicle some cases to remain off. Have the are protected from short circuits by headlamp wiring checked right away a combination of fuses, circuit if the lamps go on and off or breakers and fusible thermal links. remain off. This greatly reduces the chance of Windshield Wipers fires caused by electrical problems. If the wiper motor overheats due to Look at the silver-colored band heavy snow or ice, the windshield inside the fuse. If the band is broken wipers will stop until the motor cools or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure and will then restart. you replace a bad fuse with a new Lift the cover for access to the fuse/ one of the identical size and rating. relay block. Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload Fuses of the same amperage can Notice: Spilling liquid on any due to heavy snow or ice, may be temporarily borrowed from electrical components on the cause wiper linkage damage. another fuse location, if a fuse goes vehicle may damage it. Always Always clear ice and heavy snow out. Replace the fuse as soon as keep the covers on any electrical from the windshield before using the you can. component. windshield wipers. To remove fuses, hold the end of If the overload is caused by an Engine Compartment the fuse between your thumb and electrical problem and not snow or Fuse Block index finger and pull straight out. ice, be sure to get it fixed. The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. Vehicle Care 10-31

Fuses Usage Air Conditioning A/C CLUTCH Clutch Antilock Braking ABS MTR System (ABS) Motor Adaptive Forward AFS Lighting System AIRBAG Airbag System AUX POWER Auxiliary Power AUX Auxiliary VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump All-Wheel-Drive AWD System BATT 1 Battery 1 BATT 2 Battery 2 BATT 3 Battery 3 Engine Control ECM Module Engine Control ECM 1 Module 1 EMISSION 1 Emission 1 10-32 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage EMISSION 2 Emission 2 Trailer Left Right LT TRLR RT PRK Stoplamp and Turn Parking Lamp EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils STOP/TRN Signal Trailer Right FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 RT TRLR ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils Stoplamp and Turn STOP/TRN FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Signal Powertrain Control PCM IGN FOG LAMP Fog Lamps Module Ignition Regulated Voltage RVC SNSR Control Sensor Fuel System PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate FSCM Control Module S/ROOF/ PWR Sunroof Power Outlet SUNSHADE HORN Horn OUTLET SERVICE Service Repair Heated Outside REAR HTD MIR Rear Camera Rearview Mirror CAMERA SPARE Spare Heating, Ventilation Rear Accessory Stop Lamps Stop Lamps RR APO and Air Power Outlet (China Only) (China Only) HVAC BLWR Conditioning RR DEFOG Rear Defogger STRTR Starter Blower Rear Climate Transmission Left High-Beam RR HVAC TCM LT HI BEAM Control System Control Module Headlamp Right High-Beam TRANS Transmission Left Low-Beam RT HI BEAM LT LO BEAM Headlamp Headlamp TRLR Trailer Back-up Right Low-Beam BCK/UP Lamps LT PRK Left Parking Lamp RT LO BEAM Headlamp TRLR BRK Trailer Brake Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses Usage Relays Usage Relays Usage TRLR Trailer Parking High Intensity TRLR Trailer Back-up PRK LAMP Lamps HID/ Discharge (HID) BCK/UP Lamps LO BEAM Low-Beam TRLR PWR Trailer Power WPR Windshield Wiper Headlamps Windshield Wiper/ Windshield Wiper WPR/WSW HORN Horn WPR HI Washer High Speed IGN Ignition Main Relays Usage Trailer Left Instrument Panel Fuse LT TRLR A/C Stoplamp and Turn Block Air Conditioning STOP/TRN CMPRSR Signal Lamp Compressor Clutch The instrument panel fuse block is CLTCH PRK LAMP Park Lamp located under the instrument panel on the passenger side of the AUX Auxiliary PWR/TRN Powertrain VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump vehicle. Pull down on the cover to Rear Window access the fuse block. RR DEFOG CRNK Switched Power Defogger FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 Trailer Right RT TRLR Stoplamp and Turn FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 STOP/TRN Signal Lamp FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3 Stop Lamps Stop Lamps FOG LAMP Fog Lamps (China Only) (China Only) High-Beam HI BEAM Headlamps 10-34 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage AIRBAG Airbag Heating, Ventilation HVAC and Air AMP Amplifier Conditioning BCK/ Back-up Lamp/ INADV/ Inadvertent UP/STOP Stoplamp PWR/LED Power LED Body Control BCM INFOTMNT Infotainment Module Driver Side Turn CNSTR/ LT/TRN/SIG Canister Vent Signal VENT Memory Seat CTSY Courtesy MSM Module DR/LCK Door Locks Power Mirrors, PDM Daytime Running Liftgate Release DRL Lamps PWR MODE Power Mode GMC HID Only/ PWR/MIR Power Mirrors DRL 2 Rear Fog Lamps-China Only RDO Radio DSPLY Display REAR WPR Rear Wiper Front Windshield Passenger Side FRT/WSW RT/TRN/SIG Washer Turn Signal Fuse Side HTD/ Heated/Cooling SPARE Spare COOL SEAT Seats STR/WHL/ Steering Wheel ILLUM Illumination Vehicle Care 10-35

Relays Usage Relays Usage LT/ Driver Side Power Power Unlock UNLCK PWR/SEAT Seat Relay Relay RT/ Passenger Side Daytime Running DRL2 PWR/SEAT Power Seat Relay Lamps 2 Relay Power Windows Driver Side Unlock PWR/WNDW LT/UNLCK Relay Relay PWR/ Power Steering Daytime Running DRL COLUMN Column Relay Lamps Relay L/GATE Liftgate Relay SPARE Spare LCK Power Lock Relay Front Windshield FRT/WSW Washer Relay Rear Window REAR/WSW Washer Relay

Relay Side 10-36 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall Labeling Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) Useful information about a tire is Tires . Underinflated tires pose the molded into its sidewall. The same danger as overloaded examples below show a typical Your new vehicle comes with tires. The resulting accident high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. passenger vehicle tire and a leading tire manufacturer. If you Check all tires frequently to compact spare tire sidewall. ever have questions about your maintain the recommended tire warranty and where to pressure. Tire pressure obtain service, see your vehicle should be checked when your Warranty booklet for details. For tires are cold. See Tire additional information refer to Pressure on page 10‑42. the tire manufacturer. . Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured or { WARNING broken by a sudden impact — such as when you Poorly maintained and improperly hit a pothole. Keep tires at used tires are dangerous. the recommended pressure.

. . Worn, old tires can cause Overloading your tires can Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example cause overheating as a result accidents. If your tread is of too much flexing. You badly worn, or if your tires (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a could have an air-out and a have been damaged, combination of letters and serious accident. See Vehicle replace them. numbers used to define a Load Limits on page 9‑10. particular tire's width, height, (Continued) aspect ratio, construction type, Vehicle Care 10-37 and service description. See the Tire Identification Number (TIN). “Tire Size” illustration later in this The TIN shows the section for more detail. manufacturer and plant code, (B) TPC Spec (Tire tire size, and date the tire was Performance Criteria manufactured. The TIN is Specification): Original molded onto both sides of the equipment tires designed to tire, although only one side may GM's specific tire performance have the date of manufacture. criteria have a TPC specification (E) Tire Ply Material: The type code molded onto the sidewall. of cord and number of plies in GM's TPC specifications meet or the sidewall and under the tread. Compact Spare Tire Example exceed all federal safety (F) Uniform Tire Quality guidelines. Grading (UTQG): Tire (A) Tire Ply Material: The type (C) DOT (Department of manufacturers are required to of cord and number of plies in Transportation): The grade tires based on three the sidewall and under the tread. Department of Transportation performance factors: treadwear, (B) Temporary Use Only: The (DOT) code indicates that the traction, and temperature compact spare tire or temporary tire is in compliance with the resistance. For more information use tire has a tread life of U.S. Department of see Uniform Tire Quality approximately 5 000 km Transportation Motor Vehicle Grading on page 10‑52 . (3,000 miles) and should not be Safety Standards. (G) Maximum Cold Inflation driven at speeds over 105 km/h (D) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load that (65 mph). The compact spare (TIN): The letters and numbers can be carried and the tire is for emergency use when a following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to regular road tire has lost air and of Transportation) code is the support that load. gone flat. 10-38 Vehicle Care

If your vehicle has a compact (E) Tire Inflation: The Tire Designations spare tire, see Compact Spare temporary use tire or compact Tire on page 10‑77 and If a Tire spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size Goes Flat on page 10‑56 . 420 kPa (60 psi). For more The following illustration shows (C) Tire Identification Number information on tire pressure and an example of a typical (TIN): The letters and numbers inflation see Tire Pressure on passenger vehicle tire size. following the DOT (Department page 10‑42 . of Transportation) code is the (F) Tire Size : A combination of Tire Identification Number (TIN). letters and numbers define a The TIN shows the tire's width, height, aspect ratio, manufacturer and plant code, construction type, and service tire size, and date the tire was description. The letter T as the manufactured. The TIN is first character in the tire size (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: molded onto both sides of the means the tire is for temporary The United States version of a tire, although only one side may use only. metric tire sizing system. The have the date of manufacture. (G) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in (D) Maximum Cold Inflation Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger Load Limit: Maximum load that Specification): Original vehicle tire engineered to can be carried and the equipment tires designed to standards set by the U.S. Tire maximum pressure needed to GM's specific tire performance and Rim Association. support that load. criteria have a TPC specification (B) Tire Width: The three-digit code molded onto the sidewall. number indicates the tire section GM's TPC specifications meet or width in millimeters from exceed all federal safety sidewall to sidewall. guidelines. Vehicle Care 10-39

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit certified to carry. The speed Belt: A rubber coated layer of number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a cords that is located between height-to-width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load. the plies and the tread. Cords For example, if the tire size may be made from steel or other aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and reinforcing materials. item C of the illustration, it would Definitions Bead: The tire bead contains mean that the tire's sidewall is steel wires wrapped by steel 60 percent as high as it is wide. Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing cords that hold the tire onto (D) Construction Code: A outward on each square inch of the rim. letter code is used to indicate the tire. Air pressure is Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire the type of ply construction in expressed in psi (pounds per in which the plies are laid at the tire. The letter R means square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). alternate angles less than radial ply construction; the Accessory Weight: This 90 degrees to the centerline of letter D means diagonal or bias the tread. ply construction; and the letter B means the combined weight of means belted-bias ply optional accessories. Some Cold Tire Pressure: The construction. examples of optional amount of air pressure in a tire, accessories are, automatic measured in psi (pounds per (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of transmission, power steering, square inch) or kPa (kilopascal) the wheel in inches. power brakes, power windows, before a tire has built up heat (F) Service Description: These power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure characters represent the load conditioning. on page 10‑42 . index and speed rating of the Aspect Ratio: The relationship tire. The load index represents of a tire's height to its width. the load carry capacity a tire is 10-40 Vehicle Care

Curb Weight: The weight of a GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure: motor vehicle with standard and Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to optional equipment including the Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated. maximum capacity of fuel, oil, page 9‑10 . The maximum air pressure is and coolant, but without GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight molded onto the sidewall. passengers and cargo. Rating for the rear axle. See Maximum Load Rating: The DOT Markings: A code molded Vehicle Load Limits on load rating for a tire at the into the sidewall of a tire page 9‑10 . maximum permissible inflation signifying that the tire is in Intended Outboard Sidewall: pressure for that tire. compliance with the U.S. The side of an asymmetrical tire, Maximum Loaded Vehicle Department of Transportation that must always face outward Weight: The sum of curb (DOT) motor vehicle safety when mounted on a vehicle. weight, accessory weight, standards. The DOT code Kilopascal (kPa): The metric vehicle capacity weight, and includes the Tire Identification production options weight. Number (TIN), an alphanumeric unit for air pressure. designator which can also Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A Normal Occupant Weight: The identify the tire manufacturer, tire used on light duty trucks and number of occupants a vehicle production plant, brand, and some multipurpose passenger is designed to seat multiplied by date of production. vehicles. 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10 . GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Load Index: An assigned Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution: on page 9‑10 . that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions. carrying capacity of a tire. Vehicle Care 10-41

Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic of a tire when only 1.6 mm side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that (1/16 inch) of tread remains. has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at See When It Is Time for New outward when mounted on a 90 degrees to the centerline of Tires on page 10‑49 . vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire Grading Standards): A tire white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads information system that provides manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated. consumers with ratings for a model name molding that is tire's traction, temperature, and higher or deeper than the same Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. treadwear. Ratings are moldings on the other sidewall determined by tire of the tire. Speed Rating: An manufacturers using Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A alphanumeric code assigned to government testing procedures. tire used on passenger cars and a tire indicating the maximum The ratings are molded into the some light duty trucks and speed at which a tire can sidewall of the tire. See Uniform multipurpose vehicles. operate. Tire Quality Grading on Recommended Inflation Traction: The friction between page 10‑52 . Pressure: Vehicle the tire and the road surface. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The manufacturer's recommended The amount of grip provided. number of designated seating tire inflation pressure as shown Tread: The portion of a tire that positions multiplied by on the tire placard. See Tire comes into contact with 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated Pressure on page 10‑42 and the road. cargo load. See Vehicle Load Vehicle Load Limits on Limits on page 9‑10 . page 9 10 . Treadwear Indicators: Narrow ‑ bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread 10-42 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Notice: Do not let anyone tell A vehicle specific Tire and Tire: Load on an individual tire you that under-inflation or Loading Information label is due to curb weight, accessory over-inflation is all right. It is attached to your vehicle. This weight, occupant weight, and not. If your tires do not have label shows your vehicle's cargo weight. enough air (under-inflation), original equipment tires and the Vehicle Placard: A label you can get the following: correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold. permanently attached to a . Too much flexing vehicle showing the vehicle's The recommended cold tire . Too much heat capacity weight and the original inflation pressure, shown on the equipment tire size and . Tire overloading label, is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support recommended inflation pressure. . Premature or your vehicle's maximum load See “Tire and Loading irregular wear carrying capacity. Information Label” under Vehicle . Poor handling Load Limits on page 9‑10 . For additional information . Reduced fuel economy regarding how much weight your Tire Pressure If your tires have too much air vehicle can carry, and an Tires need the correct amount of (over-inflation), you can get example of the Tire and Loading air pressure to operate the following: Information label, see Vehicle effectively. Load Limits on page 9‑10 . How . Unusual wear you load your vehicle affects . Poor handling vehicle handling and ride comfort. Never load your vehicle . Rough ride with more weight than it was . Needless damage from designed to carry. road hazards Vehicle Care 10-43

When to Check Remove the valve cap from the Tire Pressure Monitor Check your tires once a month tire valve stem. Press the tire System or more. Do not forget to check gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the The Tire Pressure Monitor System the compact spare tire, if the (TPMS) uses radio and sensor vehicle has one. The compact cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended technology to check tire pressure spare should be at 60 psi levels. The TPMS sensors monitor (420 kPa). For additional pressure on the Tire and the air pressure in your vehicle's information regarding the Loading Information label, no tires and transmit tire pressure compact spare tire, see further adjustment is necessary. readings to a receiver located in the Compact Spare Tire on If the inflation pressure is low, vehicle. add air until you reach the page 10‑77 . Each tire, including the spare (if recommended amount. provided), should be checked How to Check If you overfill the tire, release air monthly when cold and inflated to Use a good quality pocket-type by pushing on the metal stem in the inflation pressure recommended gage to check tire pressure. You the center of the tire valve. by the vehicle manufacturer on the cannot tell if your tires are Re-check the tire pressure with vehicle placard or tire inflation properly inflated simply by pressure label. (If your vehicle has the tire gage. tires of a different size than the size looking at them. Radial tires may Be sure to put the valve caps indicated on the vehicle placard or look properly inflated even when back on the valve stems. They tire inflation pressure label, you they are under-inflated. Check help prevent leaks by keeping should determine the proper tire the tire's inflation pressure when out dirt and moisture. inflation pressure for those tires.) the tires are cold. Cold means As an added safety feature, your your vehicle has been sitting for vehicle has been equipped with a at least three hours or driven no tire pressure monitoring system more than 1.6 km (1 mile). (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire 10-44 Vehicle Care pressure telltale when one or more The TPMS malfunction indicator is Federal Communications of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure Commission (FCC) and under-inflated. telltale. When the system detects a Industry and Science Canada Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then See Radio Frequency Statement on pressure telltale illuminates, you page 13‑17 for information regarding should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon Part 15 of the Federal soon as possible, and inflate them Communications Commission (FCC) to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry significantly under-inflated tire and Science Canada. causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is lead to tire failure. Under-inflation illuminated, the system may not be Tire Pressure Monitor also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS Operation vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety This vehicle may have a Tire ability. of reasons, including the installation Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). Please note that the TPMS is not a of replacement or alternate tires or The TPMS is designed to warn the substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent driver when a low tire pressure maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly. condition exists. TPMS sensors are responsibility to maintain correct tire Always check the TPMS malfunction mounted onto each tire and wheel pressure, even if under-inflation has telltale after replacing one or more assembly, excluding the spare tire not reached the level to trigger tires or wheels on your vehicle to and wheel assembly, if the vehicle illumination of the TPMS low tire ensure that the replacement or has one. The TPMS sensors pressure telltale. alternate tires and wheels allow the monitor the air pressure in the TPMS to continue to function vehicle's tires and transmits the tire Your vehicle has also been properly. pressure readings to a receiver equipped with a TPMS malfunction located in the vehicle. indicator to indicate when the See Tire Pressure Monitor system is not operating properly. Operation on page 10‑44 for additional information. Vehicle Care 10-45

Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you on page 5‑37 and Tire Messages about a low tire pressure condition on page 5‑37. but it does not replace normal tire The low tire pressure warning light maintenance. See Tire Inspection may come on in cool weather when on page 10‑48, Tire Rotation on the vehicle is first started, and then page 10‑48 and Tires on When a low tire pressure condition turn off as you start to drive. This page 10‑36. is detected, the TPMS illuminates could be an early indicator that the Notice: Using non-approved tire the low tire pressure warning light air pressure in the tire(s) are getting sealants could damage the Tire located on the instrument panel low and need to be inflated to the Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) cluster. proper pressure. sensors. TPMS sensor damage At the same time a message to A Tire and Loading Information caused by using an incorrect tire check the pressure in a specific tire label, attached to your vehicle, sealant is not covered by the appears on the Driver Information shows the size of your vehicle's vehicle warranty. Always use the Center (DIC) display. The low tire original equipment tires and the GM approved tire sealant pressure warning light and the DIC correct inflation pressure for your available through your dealer/ warning message come on at each vehicle's tires when they are cold. retailer. ignition cycle until the tires are See Vehicle Load Limits on Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits inflated to the correct inflation page 9‑10, for an example of the use a GM approved liquid tire pressure. Using the DIC, tire Tire and Loading Information label sealant. Using non-approved tire pressure levels can be viewed by and its location on your vehicle. sealants could damage the TPMS the driver. For additional information Also see Tire Pressure on sensors. See Tire Sealant and and details about the DIC operation page 10‑42. Compressor Kit on page 10‑58 for and displays see Driver Information information regarding the inflator kit Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on materials and instructions. page 5‑22 or Driver Information 10-46 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light and . The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or Message process was started but not being near facilities using radio completed or not completed wave frequencies similar to the The TPMS will not function properly successfully after rotating the TPMS could cause the TPMS if one or more of the TPMS sensors vehicle's tires. The DIC message sensors to malfunction. are missing or inoperable. When the and TPMS malfunction light If the TPMS is not functioning it system detects a malfunction, the should go off once the TPMS low tire warning light flashes for cannot detect or signal a low tire sensor matching process is condition. See your dealer/retailer about one minute and then stays on performed successfully. See for the remainder of the ignition for service if the TPMS malfunction “TPMS Sensor Matching light and DIC message comes on cycle. A DIC warning message is Process” later in this section. also displayed. The low tire warning and stays on. . light and DIC warning message One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The DIC TPMS Sensor Matching come on at each ignition cycle until Process the problem is corrected. Some of message and the TPMS the conditions that can cause the malfunction light should go off Each TPMS sensor has a unique malfunction light and DIC message when the TPMS sensors are identification code. Any time you to come on are: installed and the sensor rotate your vehicle's tires or replace matching process is performed one or more of the TPMS sensors, . One of the road tires has been successfully. See your dealer/ the identification codes will need to replaced with the spare tire, retailer for service. be matched to the new tire/wheel if your vehicle has one. The . Replacement tires or wheels do position. The sensors are matched spare tire does not have a to the tire/wheel positions in the TPMS sensor. The TPMS not match your vehicle's original equipment tires or wheels. Tires following order: driver side front tire, malfunction light and DIC passenger side front tire, passenger message should go off once you and wheels other than those recommended for your vehicle side rear tire, and driver side rear re-install the road tire containing tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. the TPMS sensor. could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. See Buying See your dealer/retailer for service. New Tires on page 10‑50. Vehicle Care 10-47

The TPMS sensors can also be 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry 7. Proceed to the passenger side matched to each tire/wheel position (RKE) transmitter's LOCK and rear tire, and repeat the by increasing or decreasing the UNLOCK buttons at the same procedure in Step 5. tire's air pressure. If increasing the time for approximately 8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire's air pressure, do not exceed five seconds. The horn sounds tire, and repeat the procedure in the maximum inflation pressure twice to signal the receiver is in Step 5. The horn sounds two indicated on the tire's sidewall. relearn mode and TIRE times to indicate the sensor To decrease air-pressure out of a LEARNING ACTIVE message identification code has been tire you can use the pointed end of displays on the DIC screen. matched to the driver side rear the valve cap, a pencil-style air 4. Start with the driver side tire, and the TPMS sensor pressure gage, or a key. front tire. matching process is no longer You have two minutes to match the 5. Remove the valve cap from the active. The TIRE LEARNING first tire/wheel position, and valve cap stem. Activate the ACTIVE message on the DIC five minutes overall to match all four TPMS sensor by increasing or display screen goes off. tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer decreasing the tire's air pressure 9. Turn the ignition switch to than two minutes, to match the first for five seconds, or until a horn LOCK/OFF. tire and wheel, or more than chirp sounds. The horn chirp, 10. Set all four tires to the five minutes to match all four tire which may take up to recommended air pressure and wheel positions the matching 30 seconds to sound, confirms level as indicated on the Tire process stops and you need to that the sensor identification and Loading Information label. start over. code has been matched to this tire and wheel position. 11. Put the valve caps back on the The TPMS sensor matching process valve stems. is outlined below: 6. Proceed to the passenger side 1. Set the parking brake. front tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 5. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/ RUN with the engine off. 10-48 Vehicle Care

Tire Inspection Any time you notice unusual If the vehicle has a compact wear, rotate the tires as soon as spare tire, do not include it in the We recommend that you possible and check wheel tire rotation. regularly inspect your vehicle's alignment. Also check for tires, including the spare tire, After the tires have been damaged tires or wheels. See rotated, adjust the front and rear if the vehicle has one, for signs When It Is Time for New Tires on of wear or damage. See When It inflation pressures as shown on page 10‑49 and Wheel Is Time for New Tires on the Tire and Loading Information Replacement on page 10‑54 . page 10‑49 for more information. label. See Tire Pressure on page 10‑42 and Vehicle Load Tire Rotation Limits on page 9‑10 . Tires should be rotated every Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to System. See Tire Pressure 13 000 km). See Scheduled Monitor Operation on page 10‑44 . Maintenance on page 11‑2 . Make certain that all wheel nuts The purpose of a regular tire are properly tightened. See rotation is to achieve a uniform “Wheel Nut Torque” under wear for all tires on the vehicle. Capacities and Specifications on This will ensure that the vehicle page 12‑2 . continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new. When rotating the vehicle's tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here. Vehicle Care 10-49

When It Is Time for New The vehicle needs new tires if any { WARNING Tires of the following statements are true: . You can see the indicators at Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Various factors, such as parts to which it is fastened, can three or more places around maintenance, temperatures, driving the tire. make wheel nuts become loose speeds, vehicle loading, and road after time. The wheel could come conditions influence when you need . You can see cord or fabric off and cause an accident. When new tires. showing through the tire's changing a wheel, remove any rubber. rust or dirt from places where the . The tread or sidewall is cracked, wheel attaches to the vehicle. In cut, or snagged deep enough to an emergency, use a cloth or a show cord or fabric. paper towel to do this; but be sure . to use a scraper or wire brush The tire has a bump, bulge, later, if needed, to get all the rust or split. or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat . The tire has a puncture, cut, on page 10‑56. or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size Make sure the spare tire, if the or location of the damage. vehicle has one, is stored The rubber in tires degrades over securely. Push, pull, and then try time. This is also true for the spare to rotate or turn the tire. If it One way to tell when it is time for tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it moves, tighten the cable. See new tires is to check the treadwear is not being used. Multiple Tire Changing on page 10‑66 . indicators, which appear when the conditions affect how fast this aging tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or takes place, including temperatures, less of tread remaining. loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With proper 10-50 Vehicle Care care and maintenance tires typically GM's exclusive TPC Spec See Tire Inspection on page 10‑48 wear out before they degrade due to system considers over a dozen and Tire Rotation on page 10‑48 age. If you are unsure about the critical specifications that impact for information on proper tire need to replace the tires as they get the overall performance of your rotation. older, consult the tire manufacturer vehicle, including brake system for more information. performance, ride and handling, { WARNING Buying New Tires traction control, and tire pressure monitoring Mixing tires could cause you GM has developed and matched performance. GM's TPC Spec to lose control while driving. specific tires for your vehicle. number is molded onto the tire's If you mix tires of different The original equipment tires sidewall near the tire size. If the sizes, brands, or types (radial installed on your vehicle, when it tires have an all-season tread and bias-belted tires), the was new, were designed to meet design, the TPC Spec number vehicle may not handle General Motors Tire will be followed by an MS for properly, and you could have Performance Criteria mud and snow. See Tire a crash. Using tires of different Specification (TPC Spec) Sidewall Labeling on page 10‑36 sizes, brands, or types may system rating. If you need for additional information. also cause damage to your replacement tires, GM strongly vehicle. Be sure to use the GM recommends replacing tires recommends that you get tires correct size, brand, and type in sets of four. This is because with the same TPC Spec rating. of tires on all wheels. It is all uniform tread depth on all tires This way, your vehicle will right to drive with your will help keep your vehicle continue to have tires that are compact spare temporarily, as performing most like it did when designed to give the same it was developed for use on the tires were new. Replacing performance and vehicle safety, your vehicle. See Compact less than a full set of tires can during normal use, as the Spare Tire on page 10‑77 . affect the braking and handling original tires. performance of your vehicle. Vehicle Care 10-51

rated tires may give a Additionally, if your vehicle has { WARNING low-pressure warning that is electronic systems such as anti-lock higher or lower than the proper brakes, rollover airbags, traction If you use bias-ply tires on the control, and electronic stability vehicle, the wheel rim flanges warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire control, the performance of these could develop cracks after systems can be affected. many miles of driving. A tire Pressure Monitor System on page 10 43 . and/or wheel could fail ‑ { WARNING suddenly, causing a crash. Your vehicle's original Use only radial-ply tires with equipment tires are listed on the If you add different sized wheels, the wheels on the vehicle. Tire and Loading Information your vehicle may not provide an Label. See Vehicle Load Limits acceptable level of performance If you must replace your on page 9‑10 , for more and safety if tires not vehicle's tires with those that do information about the Tire and recommended for those wheels not have a TPC Spec number, Loading Information Label and are selected. You may increase make sure they are the same its location on your vehicle. the chance that you will crash and size, load range, speed rating, suffer serious injury. Only use GM and construction type (radial and specific wheel and tire systems Different Size Tires and developed for your vehicle, and bias-belted tires) as your Wheels vehicle's original tires. have them properly installed by a If you add wheels or tires that are a GM certified technician. Vehicles that have a tire different size than your original pressure monitoring system equipment wheels and tires, this See Buying New Tires on could give an inaccurate could affect the way your vehicle page 10‑50 and Accessories and low-pressure warning if non-TPC performs, including its braking, ride Modifications on page 10‑3 for Spec rated tires are installed on and handling characteristics, additional information. your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec stability, and resistance to rollover. 10-52 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire Quality most passenger car tires. The Treadwear Grading Uniform Tire Quality Grading The treadwear grade is a (UTQG) system does not apply Quality grades can be found comparative rating based on the to deep tread, winter-type snow wear rate of the tire when tested where applicable on the tire tires, space-saver, or temporary sidewall between tread shoulder under controlled conditions on a use spare tires, tires with specified government test and maximum section width. For nominal rim diameters of example: course. For example, a tire 25 to 30 cm (10 to 12 inches), graded 150 would wear one and Treadwear 200 Traction AA or to some limited-production a half (1.5) times as well on the Temperature A tires. government course as a tire The following information relates While the tires available on graded 100. The relative to the system developed by the General Motors passenger cars performance of tires depends United States National Highway and light trucks may vary with upon the actual conditions of Traffic Safety Administration respect to these grades, they their use, however, and may (NHTSA), which grades tires by must also conform to federal depart significantly from the treadwear, traction, and safety requirements and norm due to variations in driving temperature performance. This additional General Motors Tire habits, service practices, and applies only to vehicles sold in Performance Criteria (TPC) differences in road the United States. The grades standards. characteristics and climate. are molded on the sidewalls of Vehicle Care 10-53

Traction – AA, A, B, C and reduce tire life, and Wheel Alignment and Tire The traction grades, from excessive temperature can lead Balance highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of The tires and wheels on the vehicle and C. Those grades represent were aligned and balanced carefully the tire's ability to stop on wet performance which all passenger car tires must meet at the factory to give the longest tire pavement as measured under life and best overall performance. controlled conditions on under the Federal Motor Vehicle Adjustments to wheel alignment and specified government test Safety Standard No. 109. tire balancing will not be necessary surfaces of asphalt and Grades B and A represent on a regular basis. However, if there concrete. A tire marked C may higher levels of performance on is unusual tire wear or the vehicle have poor traction performance. the laboratory test wheel than pulls to one side or the other, the the minimum required by law. alignment should be checked. If the Temperature – A, B, C It should be noted that the vehicle vibrates when driving on a temperature grade for this tire is smooth road, the tires and wheels The temperature grades are A might need to be rebalanced. See (the highest), B, and C, established for a tire that is properly inflated and not your dealer/retailer for proper representing the tire's resistance diagnosis. to the generation of heat and its overloaded. Excessive speed, ability to dissipate heat when underinflation, or excessive tested under controlled loading, either separately or in conditions on a specified indoor combination, can cause heat laboratory test wheel. Sustained buildup and possible tire failure. high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate 10-54 Vehicle Care

Wheel Replacement If you need to replace any of the Notice: The wrong wheel can wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, also cause problems with bearing Replace any wheel that is bent, or Tire Pressure Monitor System life, brake cooling, speedometer cracked, or badly rusted or (TPMS) sensors, replace them only or odometer calibration, corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming with new GM original equipment headlamp aim, bumper height, loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and parts. This way, you will be sure to vehicle ground clearance, and tire wheel nuts should be replaced. have the right wheel, wheel bolts, or tire chain clearance to the If the wheel leaks air, replace it wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for body and chassis. (except some aluminum wheels, the vehicle. which can sometimes be repaired). See If a Tire Goes Flat on See your dealer/retailer if any of { page 10‑56 for more information. these conditions exist. WARNING Your dealer/retailer will know the Using the wrong replacement kind of wheel you need. wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel Each new wheel should have the nuts on your vehicle can be same load-carrying capacity, dangerous. It could affect the diameter, width, offset, and be braking and handling of your mounted the same way as the one it vehicle, make your tires lose air replaces. and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement. Vehicle Care 10-55

Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING { WARNING manufacturer's instructions. To help avoid damage to the vehicle, Putting a used wheel on the Do not use tire chains. There is drive slowly, readjust or remove vehicle is dangerous. You cannot not enough clearance. Tire chains the device if it is contacting the know how it has been used or used on a vehicle without the vehicle, and do not spin the how far it has been driven. proper amount of clearance can vehicle's wheels. If you do find It could fail suddenly and cause a cause damage to the brakes, traction devices that will fit, install crash. If you have to replace a suspension or other vehicle parts. them on the front tires. wheel, use a new GM original The area damaged by the tire equipment wheel. chains could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on the vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that (Continued) 10-56 Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes Flat A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and WARNING (Continued) It is unusual for a tire to blowout may require the same correction while you are driving, especially if you would use in a skid. In any rear training. If a jack is provided with you maintain your vehicle's tires blowout remove your foot from the the vehicle, it is designed only for properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle changing a flat tire. If it is used for much more likely to leak out slowly. under control by steering the way anything else, you or others could But if you should ever have a you want the vehicle to go. It may be badly injured or killed if the blowout, here are a few tips about be very bumpy and noisy, but you vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack what to expect and what to do: can still steer. Gently brake to a is provided with the vehicle, only If a front tire fails, the flat tire stop, well off the road if possible. use it for changing a flat tire. creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off { WARNING If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire the accelerator pedal and grip the and wheel damage by driving slowly steering wheel firmly. Steer to Lifting a vehicle and getting under to a level place. Turn on the hazard maintain lane position, and then it to do maintenance or repairs is warning flashers. See Hazard gently brake to a stop well out of the dangerous without the Warning Flashers on page 6‑3. traffic lane. appropriate safety equipment and (Continued) Vehicle Care 10-57

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), { WARNING WARNING (Continued) use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement Changing a tire can be 3. Turn off the engine and do of wheel blocks (A). dangerous. The vehicle can slip not restart while the vehicle off the jack and roll over or fall on is raised. you or other people. You and they 4. Do not allow passengers to could be badly injured or even remain in the vehicle. killed. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent To be certain the vehicle will not the vehicle from moving: move, put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from 1. Set the parking brake firmly. the one being changed. That 2. Put an automatic would be the tire on the other transmission shift lever in side, at the opposite end of the P (Park), or shift a manual vehicle. transmission to 1 (First) or R (Reverse). This vehicle may come with a jack A. Wheel Block (Continued) and spare tire or a tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jacking B. Flat Tire equipment to change a spare tire The following information explains safely, follow the instructions below. how to repair or change a tire. Then see Tire Changing on page 10‑66. To use the tire sealant and compressor kit, see Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 10‑58. 10-58 Vehicle Care

Tire Sealant and If this vehicle has a tire sealant and { WARNING compressor kit, there may not be a Compressor Kit spare tire, tire changing equipment, Over-inflating a tire could cause and on some vehicles there may not { WARNING the tire to rupture and you or be a place to store a tire. others could be injured. Be sure Idling a vehicle in an enclosed to read and follow the tire sealant The tire sealant and compressor area with poor ventilation is and compressor kit instructions can be used to temporarily seal dangerous. Engine exhaust may and inflate the tire to its punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire. It can also enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust recommended pressure. Do not be used to inflate an under contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) exceed the recommended inflated tire. which cannot be seen or smelled. pressure. It can cause unconsciousness If the tire has been separated from and even death. Never run the the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, engine in an enclosed area that { WARNING or has a large puncture, the tire is has no fresh air ventilation. For too severely damaged for the tire more information, see Engine Storing the tire sealant and sealant and compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside Assistance Exhaust on page 9‑21. compressor kit or other equipment in the passenger Program on page 13‑6. compartment of the vehicle could Read and follow all of the tire cause injury. In a sudden stop or sealant and compressor kit collision, loose equipment could instructions. strike someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location. Vehicle Care 10-59

This vehicle may have one of the Tire Sealant following tire sealant and Read and follow the safe handling compressor kits. The kit includes: instructions on the label adhered to the sealant canister. Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are available at your local dealer/ retailer. See “Removal and A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or Installation of the Sealant Canister” Air Only) following. B. On/Off Button There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After usage, the sealant C. Pressure Gage canister and sealant/air hose D. Pressure Deflation Button assembly must be replaced. See (If equipped) “Removal and Installation of the E. Tire Sealant Canister Sealant Canister” following. F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) G. Air Only Hose (Black) H. Power Plug 10-60 Vehicle Care

Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a Punctured Tire Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster. Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑56. Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire. 1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location. See Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 10‑65. Vehicle Care 10-61

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle on the Tire and Loading and the power plug (H). must be running while using the Information label. See Tire 3. Place the kit on the ground. air compressor. Pressure on page 10‑42. Make sure the tire valve stem is 8. Turn the selector switch (A) The pressure gage (C) may positioned close to the ground counterclockwise to the Sealant read higher than the actual tire so the hose will reach it. + Air position. pressure while the compressor 9. Press the on/off (B) button to is on. Turn the compressor off 4. Remove the valve stem cap from to get an accurate pressure the flat tire by turning it turn the tire sealant and compressor kit on. reading. The compressor may counterclockwise. be turned on/off until the 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) The compressor will inject correct pressure is reached. sealant and air into the tire. onto the tire valve stem. Turn it Notice: If the recommended clockwise until it is tight. The pressure gage (C) will pressure cannot be reached after 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the initially show a high pressure approximately 25 minutes, the accessory power outlet in the while the compressor pushes the vehicle should not be driven vehicle. Unplug all items from sealant into the tire. Once the farther. The tire is too severely other accessory power outlets. sealant is completely dispersed damaged and the tire sealant and See Power Outlets on into the tire, the pressure will compressor kit cannot inflate the quickly drop and start to rise page 5‑9. tire. Remove the power plug from again as the tire inflates with the accessory power outlet and If the vehicle has an accessory air only. unscrew the inflating hose from power outlet, do not use the the tire valve. See Roadside cigarette lighter. 10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation Assistance Program on If the vehicle only has a cigarette pressure using the pressure page 13‑6. lighter, use the cigarette lighter. gage (C). The recommended Do not pinch the power plug inflation pressure can be found cord in the door or window. 10-62 Vehicle Care

11. Press the on/off button (B) to 19. Stop at a safe location and turn the tire sealant and check the tire pressure. Refer compressor kit off. to Steps 1 through 11 under The tire is not sealed and will “Using the Tire Sealant and continue to leak air until the Compressor Kit without vehicle is driven and the Sealant to Inflate a Tire sealant is distributed in the tire, 16. If the flat tire was able to inflate (Not Punctured).” therefore, Steps 12 through to the recommended inflation If the tire pressure has fallen 18 must be done immediately pressure, remove the more than 10 psi (68 kPa) after Step 11. maximum speed label from the below the recommended sealant canister (E) and place inflation pressure, stop driving Be careful while handling the it in a highly visible location. tire sealant and compressor kit the vehicle. The tire is too The label is a reminder not to severely damaged and the tire as it could be warm after exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until usage. sealant cannot seal the tire. the damaged tire is repaired or See Roadside Assistance replaced. 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from Program on page 13‑6. the accessory power outlet in 17. Return the equipment to its the vehicle. If the tire pressure has not original storage location in the dropped more than 10 psi 13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) vehicle. (68 kPa) from the counterclockwise to remove it 18. Immediately drive the vehicle recommended inflation from the tire valve stem. 5 miles (8 km) to distribute the pressure, inflate the tire to the 14. Replace the tire valve sealant in the tire. recommended inflation stem cap. pressure. 15. Replace the sealant/air 20. Wipe off any sealant from the hose (F), and the power wheel, tire, and vehicle. plug (H) back in their original location. Vehicle Care 10-63

21. Dispose of the used sealant canister (E) and sealant/air hose (F) assembly at a local dealer/retailer or in accordance with local state codes and practices. 22. Replace it with a new canister available from your dealer/ retailer. 23. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant and compressor kit, take the Always do a safety check first. See vehicle to an authorized dealer/ If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10 56. retailer within a 100 miles ‑ (161 km) of driving to have the 1. Remove the tire sealant and tire repaired or replaced. compressor kit from its storage location. See Storing the Tire Using the Tire Sealant and Sealant and Compressor Kit on Compressor Kit without page 10‑65. Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not 2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) Punctured) and the power plug (H). To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only and not sealant: 10-64 Vehicle Care

3. Place the kit on the ground. 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle The pressure gage (C) may Make sure the tire valve stem is must be running while using the read higher than the actual tire positioned close to the ground air compressor. pressure while the compressor so the hose will reach it. 8. Turn the selector switch (A) is on. Turn the compressor off to get an accurate reading. The 4. Remove the tire valve stem cap clockwise to the Air Only position. compressor may be turned on/ from the flat tire by turning it off until the correct pressure is counterclockwise. 9. Press the on/off (B) button to reached. turn the compressor on. 5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto If you inflate the tire higher the tire valve stem by turning it The compressor will inflate the than the recommended clockwise until it is tight. tire with air only. pressure you can adjust the 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the 10. Inflate the tire to the excess pressure by pressing accessory power outlet in the recommended inflation the pressure deflation vehicle. Unplug all items from pressure using the pressure button (D), if equipped, until the other accessory power outlets. gage (C). The recommended proper pressure reading is See Power Outlets on inflation pressure can be found reached. This option is only page 5‑9. on the Tire and Loading functional when using the air only hose (G). If the vehicle has an accessory Information label. See Tire power outlet, do not use the Pressure on page 10‑42. cigarette lighter. If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the cigarette lighter. Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window. Vehicle Care 10-65

11. Press the on/off button (B) to Removal and Installation of the turn the tire sealant and Sealant Canister compressor kit off. To remove the sealant canister: Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit 1. Unwrap the sealant hose. as it could be warm after 2. Press the canister release usage. button. 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from 3. Pull up and remove the canister. the accessory power outlet in 4. Replace with a new canister the vehicle. which is available from your 13. Disconnect the air only dealer/retailer. hose (G) from the tire valve The tire sealant and compressor kit 5. Push the new canister into stem, by turning it has an accessory adapter located in place. counterclockwise, and replace a compartment on the bottom of its the tire valve stem cap. housing that may be used to inflate Storing the Tire Sealant 14. Replace the air only hose (G) air mattresses, balls, etc. and the power plug (H) and and Compressor Kit cord back in its original The tire sealant and compressor kit location. is located in the storage 15. Place the equipment in the compartment on the driver side, at original storage location in the the rear of the vehicle. vehicle. 10-66 Vehicle Care

Tire Changing Removing Tools The tools needed to remove the spare tire are located in the storage compartment on the driver side, at the rear of the vehicle. 1. Open the jack storage compartment by pulling on the latch tab, located toward the rear of the vehicle, and pulling the 1. Press down on the latch tab and cover off. A. Tool Bag pull the cover off to access the B. Wing Bolt storage compartment. C. Jack 2. Press the two tabs on the quick release buckle to release the tire 2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by sealant and compressor kit turning it counterclockwise strap. 3. Push the jack (C) up out of the 3. Remove the sealant and holding bracket. compressor kit from its tray. 4. Turn the jack on its side, with the To store the tire sealant and bottom facing toward you. compressor kit, reverse the steps. 5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom first. Vehicle Care 10-67

2. Open the carpet cutout that is located through the hole of the storage compartment. 3. Attach the lug wrench into the hoist shaft. 4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. The tools you will be using include A. Rear Convenience Center the jack (A) and lug wrench (B). B. Lug Wrench Removing the Spare Tire C. Storage Compartment Cap Hole The compact spare tire is located D. Hoist Shaft under the vehicle, in front of the rear E. Compact Spare Tire bumper. See Compact Spare Tire on page 10‑77 for more information F. Retainer about the compact spare. G. Hoist Shaft Assembly 1. Open the storage compartment door of the convenience center that is nearest the liftgate and remove the cap on the bottom of the storage compartment. 10-68 Vehicle Care

6. Turn the wrench clockwise to Do the following to check the cable: raise the cable back up after 1. Check under the vehicle to see if removing the spare tire. the cable is visible. Do not store a full-size or a flat 2. If it is not visible, see Secondary road tire under the vehicle. See Latch System on page 10‑75. “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” later in this section. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the lug To continue changing the flat tire, wrench clockwise until you hear see “Removing the Flat Tire and two clicks or feel it skip twice. Installing the Spare Tire” later in this You cannot over-tighten the section. cable. 3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns. 4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the cable all the way and then loosen it at least two times. If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue with Step 5 under “Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles with the Rear Convenience Center)” listed previously. 5. Tilt the retainer and slip it If the spare tire will not lower, the through the wheel opening to secondary latch could be engaged. remove the spare tire from the cable. Vehicle Care 10-69

5. If you still cannot lower the spare If the vehicle has aluminum Notice: If this vehicle has wheel tire to the ground, see wheels, remove the wheel nut locks and an impact wrench is Secondary Latch System on caps using the wheel wrench. used to remove the wheel nuts, page 10‑75. the lock nut or wheel lock key could be damaged. Do not use an Removing the Flat Tire and impact wrench to remove the Installing the Spare Tire wheel nuts if this vehicle has 1. Do a safety check before wheel locks. proceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑56 for more information. 2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench. They will not come off. Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry 4. To identify the appropriate along the edge of the cover until 3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do jacking location, find the it comes off. Be careful; the not remove them — using the triangle (A) about 12 inches edges may be sharp. Do not try lug wrench. For wheels with a (30.5 cm) from the front tire to remove the cover with your wheel lock key, use the wheel or (B) about 10.5 inches (27 cm) bare hands. lock key between the lock nut from the rear tire. and lug wrench. The key is Store the wheel cover securely The triangle is located near each supplied in the front passenger wheel on the vehicle's exterior. in the rear of the vehicle until door pocket. you have the flat tire repaired or replaced. 10-70 Vehicle Care

Notice: If a jack is used to raise the vehicle without positioning it { WARNING correctly, the vehicle could be damaged. When raising the Raising your vehicle with the jack vehicle on a jack, avoid contact improperly positioned can with the rear axle control arms. damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help 5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put avoid personal injury and vehicle the compact spare tire near you. damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location { WARNING before raising the vehicle. Getting under a vehicle when it is 6. Attach the lug wrench to the 7. Place the jack under the vehicle jacked up is dangerous. If the jack, and turn the wrench as identified in Step 4. Raise the vehicle slips off the jack, you clockwise to raise the jack head vehicle by turning the lug wrench could be badly injured or killed. 3 inches (7.6 cm). clockwise in the jack. Raise the Never get under a vehicle when it vehicle far enough off the is supported only by a jack. ground so that there is enough room for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well. 8. Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire. Vehicle Care 10-71

{ WARNING { WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Never use oil or grease on bolts parts to which it is fastened, can or nuts because the nuts might make wheel nuts become loose come loose. The vehicle's wheel after time. The wheel could come could fall off, causing a crash. off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any 10. Remove any rust or dirt from rust or dirt from places where the the wheel bolts, mounting wheel attaches to the vehicle. In surfaces, and spare wheel. an emergency, use a cloth or a 11. Place the spare tire on the 9. Remove the plastic spare tire paper towel to do this; but be sure wheel mounting surface. heat shield by pulling the rubber to use a scraper or wire brush 12. Put the nuts on by hand by latch. Store the plastic spare tire later, if needed, to get all the rust turning them clockwise until the heat shield. See “Storing a Flat or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat wheel is held against the or Spare Tire and Tools” later in on page 10‑56. mounting surface. Make sure this section for more information. the rounded end is toward the wheel. 10-72 Vehicle Care

13. Lower the vehicle by attaching the proper sequence and to the Storing the Spare Tire the lug wrench to the jack and proper torque specification. See turning the wrench Capacities and Specifications on { WARNING counterclockwise. Lower the page 12‑2 for the wheel nut jack completely. torque specification. The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be stored with the { WARNING valve stem pointing down. If the spare tire is stored with the valve Wheel nuts that are improperly or stem pointing upwards, the incorrectly tightened can cause secondary latch will not work the wheels to become loose or properly and the spare tire could come off. The wheel nuts should loosen and suddenly fall from the be tightened with a torque wrench vehicle. If this happened when to the proper torque specification the vehicle was being driven, the after replacing. Follow the torque tire might contact a person or specification supplied by the another vehicle, causing injury aftermarket manufacturer when and damage to itself. Be sure the using accessory locking wheel underbody-mounted spare tire is nuts. See Capacities and 14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence, as stored with the valve stem Specifications on page 12‑2 for pointing down. original equipment wheel nut shown. torque specifications. Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle's compact spare. Notice: Improperly tightened If you try to put a wheel cover on wheel nuts can lead to brake the compact spare, the cover or pulsation and rotor damage. To the spare could be damaged. avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in Vehicle Care 10-73

4. When the compact spare tire is { WARNING almost in the stored position, turn the tire so the valve is Storing a jack, a tire, or other toward the rear of the vehicle. equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could This position helps when cause injury. In a sudden stop or checking the air pressure in the collision, loose equipment could compact spare tire. strike someone. Store all these in 5. Raise the tire fully against the the proper place. underside of the vehicle. Continue turning the lug wrench To store the spare tire: until you feel more than two 1. Lay the compact spare tire near clicks. This indicates that the 6. Make sure the tire is stored the rear of the vehicle with the compact spare tire is secure and securely. Push, pull (A), and then valve stem down. the cable is tight. The spare tire try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire hoist cannot be overtightened. moves, use the lug wrench to 2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire tighten the cable. heat shield on the compact spare tire. Storing the Flat Tire 3. Slide the cable retainer through 1. Remove the cable package from the center of the wheel and start the jack storage area. to raise the compact spare tire. 2. Remove the small center cap by Make sure the retainer is fully tapping the back of the cap with seated across the underside of the extension of the shaft, if the the wheel. vehicle has aluminum wheels. 10-74 Vehicle Care

3. Put the flat tire in the rear storage area with the valve stem pointing toward the rear of the vehicle.

5. Hook the cable onto the outside 8. Make sure the metal tube is portion of the liftgate hinges (B). centered at the striker. Push the 6. Hook the other end of the cable tube toward the front of the onto the outside portion of the vehicle. 4. Pull the cable (A) through the liftgate hinge on the other side of 9. Close the liftgate and make sure door striker (E), the center of the the vehicle. it is latched properly. wheel (D), and the plastic spare 7. Pull on the cable to make sure it tire heat shield (C), as shown. is secure. Vehicle Care 10-75

Storing the Tools 3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by Secondary Latch System turning clockwise. This vehicle has an underbody 4. To replace the cover, line up the mounted tire hoist assembly that tab at the front of the cover with has a secondary latch system. It is the notch in the cover opening. designed to stop the compact spare Push the cover in place and tire from suddenly falling off the make sure that the rear clips are vehicle if the cable holding the in the slots and push the cover spare tire is damaged. For the closed. secondary latch to work, the tire Store the center cap or the plastic must be stowed with the valve stem bolt-on wheel covers until a full size pointing down. See Tire Changing tire is put back on the vehicle. When on page 10‑66 for instructions on you replace the compact spare with storing the spare tire correctly. A. Tool Bag a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers or the center cap. { WARNING B. Wing Bolt Hand-tighten them over the wheel C. Jack nuts, using the lug wrench. Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions. Failure to Put back all tools as they were read and follow the instructions stored in the jack storage compartment and put the could damage the hoist assembly compartment cover back on. and you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the 1. Ensure that the bottom of the instructions listed next. jack is facing toward you. 2. Turn the jack (C) on its side and place down on the holding bracket. 10-76 Vehicle Care

To release the spare tire from the 5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise to secondary latch: raise the jack until it lifts the secondary latch spring. { WARNING 6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward Someone standing too close and is held firmly in place. This during the procedure could be lets you know that the secondary injured by the jack. If the spare latch has released and the spare tire does not slide off the jack tire is balancing on the jack. completely, make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from under the spare. All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown 2. Turn the lug wrench 1. If the cable is not visible, start counterclockwise until this procedure at Step 3. approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed. 3. Attach the lug wrench to the jack and raise the jack at least 10 turns. 4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. 7. Lower the jack by turning the lug Position the center lift point of wrench counterclockwise. Keep the jack under the center of the lowering the jack until the spare spare tire. tire slides off the jack. Vehicle Care 10-77

Have the hoist shaft assembly After installing the compact spare inspected as soon as you can. You on the vehicle, stop as soon as will not be able to store a spare tire possible and make sure the spare using the hoist assembly until it has tire is correctly inflated. The been repaired or replaced. compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph Compact Spare Tire (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can { WARNING finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your Driving with more than one convenience. Of course, it is best to compact spare tire at a time could replace the spare with a full-size tire 8. Disconnect the lug wrench from result in loss of braking and as soon as possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good the jack and carefully remove handling. This could lead to a shape in case it is needed again. the jack. Use one hand to push crash and you or others could be against the spare tire while firmly injured. Use only one compact Notice: When the compact spare pulling the jack out from under spare tire at a time. is installed, do not take the the spare tire with the vehicle through an automatic car other hand. The compact spare tire, if the wash with guide rails. The 9. Tilt the retainer and slip it vehicle has one, was fully inflated compact spare can get caught on through the wheel opening when when the vehicle was new, however, the rails which can damage the the spare tire has been it can lose air after a time. Check tire, wheel and other parts of the completely lowered. the inflation pressure regularly. vehicle. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). 10. Turn the lug wrench clockwise Do not use the compact spare on to raise the cable back up if the other vehicles. cable is hanging. 10-78 Vehicle Care

And do not mix the compact spare Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps tire or wheel with other wheels or could result in costly damage to tires. They will not fit. Keep the If the vehicle's battery has run the vehicle that would not be spare tire and its wheel together. down, you may want to use another covered by the warranty. vehicle and some jumper cables to The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system Trying to start the vehicle by start your vehicle. Be sure to use will be automatically disabled when pushing or pulling it will not the following steps to do it safely. you use the compact spare. To work, and it could damage the restore the AWD and prevent vehicle. { WARNING excessive wear on the clutch in your 1. Check the other vehicle. It must AWD, replace the compact spare Batteries can hurt you. They can have a 12-volt battery with a tire with a full-size tire as soon as negative ground system. possible. be dangerous because: Notice: If the other vehicle's Notice: Tire chains will not fit the . They contain acid that can burn you. system is not a 12-volt system compact spare. Using them can with a negative ground, both damage the vehicle and can . They contain gas that can vehicles can be damaged. Only damage the chains too. Do not explode or ignite. use vehicles with 12-volt systems use tire chains on the compact . They contain enough with negative grounds to jump spare. electricity to burn you. start your vehicle. If you do not follow these steps 2. Get the vehicles close enough exactly, some or all of these so the jumper cables can reach, things can hurt you. but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you do not want. You Vehicle Care 10-79

would not be able to start your 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicle, and the bad grounding vehicles. Unplug unnecessary { WARNING could damage the electrical accessories plugged into the systems. cigarette lighter or the accessory Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. To avoid the possibility of the power outlets. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not People have been hurt doing this, vehicles rolling, set the parking and some have been blinded. brake firmly on both vehicles needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. Use a flashlight if you need more involved in the jump start light. procedure. Put an automatic And it could save the radio! transmission in P (Park) or a 4. Open the hoods and locate the Be sure the batteries have manual transmission in Neutral positive (+) and negative (−) enough water. You do not need to before setting the parking brake. terminal locations on the other add water to the ACDelco® If one of the vehicles is a vehicle. Your vehicle has a battery (or batteries) installed in four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure remote positive (+) and a remote your new vehicle. But if a battery the transfer case is not in negative (−) jump starting has filler caps, be sure the right Neutral. terminal. See Engine amount of fluid is there. If it is low, Notice: If you leave the radio or Compartment Overview on add water to take care of that other accessories on during the page 10‑6 for more information first. If you do not, explosive gas jump starting procedure, they on the terminal locations. could be present. could be damaged. The repairs Battery fluid contains acid that would not be covered by the can burn you. Do not get it on warranty. Always turn off the you. If you accidentally get it in radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle. your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. 10-80 Vehicle Care

Do not connect positive (+) to 7. Do not let the other end touch { WARNING negative (−) or you will get a metal. Connect it to the short that would damage the positive (+) terminal of the good Fans or other moving engine battery and maybe other parts battery. Use a remote parts can injure you badly. Keep too. And do not connect the positive (+) terminal if the vehicle your hands away from moving negative (−) cable to the has one. parts once the engine is running. negative (−) terminal on the dead 8. Now connect the black battery because this can cause negative (−) cable to the 5. Check that the jumper cables do sparks. not have loose or missing negative (−) terminal of the good insulation. If they do, you could battery. Use a remote get a shock. The vehicles could negative (−) terminal if the be damaged too. vehicle has one. Before you connect the cables, Do not let the other end touch here are some basic things you anything until the next step. The should know. Positive (+) will go other end of the negative (−) to positive (+) or to a remote cable does not go to the dead positive (+) terminal if the vehicle battery. It goes to a heavy, has one. Negative (−) will go to a unpainted metal engine part, heavy, unpainted metal engine or to a remote negative (−) part or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the terminal if the vehicle has one. dead battery. 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Vehicle Care 10-81

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service. Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be 9. Connect the other end of the Jumper Cable Removal covered by the vehicle warranty. negative (−) cable at least Always connect and remove the A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 18 inches (45 cm) away from the jumper cables in the correct Part or Remote Negative (−) dead battery, but not near order, making sure that the Terminal engine parts that move. cables do not touch each other or B. Good Battery or Remote The electrical connection is just other metal. Positive (+) and Remote as good there, and the chance Negative (−) Terminals of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal for this purpose. 10-82 Vehicle Care

To disconnect the jumper cables Towing Recreational Vehicle from both vehicles, do the following: Towing 1. Disconnect the black Towing the Vehicle negative (−) cable from the Recreational vehicle towing means vehicle that had the dead To avoid damage, the disabled towing the vehicle behind another battery. vehicle should be towed with all four vehicle – such as behind a wheels off the ground. Consult your motorhome. The two most common 2. Disconnect the black dealer/retailer or a professional types of recreational vehicle towing negative (−) cable from the towing service if the disabled are known as dinghy towing and vehicle with the good battery. vehicle must be towed. dolly towing. Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) To tow the vehicle behind another wheels on the ground. Dolly towing cable from the vehicle with the vehicle for recreational is towing the vehicle with two good battery. purposes such as behind a — wheels on the ground and two motorhome, see Recreational 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) wheels up on a device known as a Vehicle Towing following. cable from the other vehicle. dolly. Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing: . What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's recommendations. Vehicle Care 10-83

. What is the distance that will be Dinghy Towing For vehicles being dinghy towed, travelled? Some vehicles have the vehicle should be run at the restrictions on how far and how beginning of each day and at each long they can tow. RV fuel stop for about five minutes. . Is the proper towing equipment This will ensure proper lubrication of going to be used? See your transmission components. Re-install dealer/retailer or trailering the fuse to start the vehicle. professional for additional advice To tow the vehicle from the front and equipment with all four wheels on the ground: recommendations. 1. Position the vehicle to be towed, . Is the vehicle ready to be shift the transmission to towed? Just as preparing the P (Park), and turn the ignition to vehicle for a long trip, make sure LOCK/OFF. the vehicle is prepared to be towed. If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, it 2. Secure the vehicle to the towing can be dinghy towed from the front. vehicle. These vehicles may also be towed 3. Set the parking brake. by putting the front wheels on a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this 4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ section. ACCESSORY. If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, it 5. Shift the transmission to can be dinghy towed from the front. N (Neutral). These vehicles can also be towed by placing them on a platform trailer with all four wheels off of the ground. These vehicles cannot be towed using a dolly. 10-84 Vehicle Care

6. To prevent the battery from Once the destination is reached: Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive draining while the vehicle is 1. Set the parking brake. Vehicles) being towed, remove the 50 amp BATT1 fuse from the underhood 2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse fuse block and store in a safe to the underhood fuse block. location. See Engine 3. Shift the transmission to Compartment Fuse Block on P (Park), turn the ignition to page 10‑30. LOCK/OFF and remove the key 7. Release the parking brake. from the ignition. Notice: If the vehicle is towed 4. Disconnect the vehicle from the without performing each of the towing vehicle. steps listed under “Dinghy Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with Towing,” the automatic the front drive wheels on the transmission could be damaged. ground if one of the front tires is Be sure to follow all steps of the a compact spare tire. Towing with All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be dinghy towing procedure prior to two different tire sizes on the and after towing the vehicle. towed with two wheels on the front of the vehicle can cause ground. To properly tow these Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is severe damage to the vehicles, they should be placed on exceeded while towing the transmission. a platform trailer with all four wheels vehicle, it could be damaged. off of the ground or dinghy towed Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) from the front. while towing the vehicle. Vehicle Care 10-85

Dolly Towing 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a (Front-Wheel-Drive straight-ahead position with a Vehicles Only) clamping device designed for towing. 5. Remove the key from the ignition. 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. 7. Release the parking brake. Towing the Vehicle From the Rear Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed from the rear. To tow a front-wheel-drive vehicle from the front with two wheels on Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. the ground: 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park). 3. Set the parking brake. 10-86 Vehicle Care

Appearance Care Notice: Machine compounding or Protecting Exterior Bright Metal aggressive polishing on a Parts Exterior Care basecoat/clearcoat paint finish Bright metal parts should be may damage it. Use only cleaned regularly to keep their Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ non-abrasive waxes and polishes luster. Wash with water or use Lenses that are made for a basecoat/ chrome polish on chrome or clearcoat paint finish on the stainless steel trim, if necessary. Use only lukewarm or cold water, a vehicle. soft cloth and a car washing soap to Use special care with aluminum Foreign materials such as calcium clean exterior lamps and lenses. trim. To avoid damaging protective chloride and other salts, ice melting Follow instructions under Washing trim, never use auto or chrome “ agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, the Vehicle” later in this section. polish, steam or caustic soap to bird droppings, chemicals from clean aluminum. A coating of wax, Finish Care industrial chimneys, etc., can rubbed to high polish, is damage the vehicle's finish if they Occasional waxing or mild polishing recommended for all bright metal remain on painted surfaces. Wash parts. of the vehicle by hand may be the vehicle as soon as possible. necessary to remove residue from If necessary, use non-abrasive Washing the Vehicle the paint finish. Approved cleaning cleaners that are marked safe for To preserve the vehicle's finish, products can be obtained from your painted surfaces to remove foreign keep it clean by washing it often. dealer/retailer. matter. Do not wash the vehicle in direct If the vehicle has a basecoat/ Exterior painted surfaces are sunlight and use a car clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat subject to aging, weather and washing soap. gives more depth and gloss to the chemical fallout that can take their colored basecoat. Always use toll over a period of years. To keep waxes and polishes that are the paint finish looking new, keep non-abrasive and made for a the vehicle garaged or covered basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. whenever possible. Vehicle Care 10-87

Notice: Certain cleaners contain Dry the finish with a soft, clean frequent application may be chemicals that can damage the chamois or an all-cotton towel to required. See Recommended Fluids emblems or nameplates on the avoid surface scratches and water and Lubricants on page 11‑7. vehicle. Check the cleaning spotting. product label. If it states that it Wheels and Trim — Aluminum High pressure car washes could or Chrome should not be used on plastic cause water to enter the vehicle. parts, do not use it on the vehicle Avoid using high pressure washes The vehicle may have either or damage may occur and it closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. would not be covered by the surface of the vehicle. Use of power warranty. Keep the wheels clean using a soft washers exceeding 8,274 kPa clean cloth with mild soap and Do not use cleaning agents that are (1,200 psi) can result in damage or water. Rinse with clean water. After petroleum based or that contain removal of paint and decals. rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft acid or abrasives, as they can Notice: Conveyor systems on clean towel. A wax may then be damage the paint, metal or plastic some automatic car washes could applied. on the vehicle. Approved cleaning damage the vehicle. There may products can be obtained from your Notice: Chrome wheels and other not be enough clearance for the chrome trim may be damaged if dealer/retailer. Follow all undercarriage. Check with the car manufacturer directions regarding the vehicle is not washed after wash manager before using the driving on roads that have been correct product usage, necessary automatic car wash. safety precautions and appropriate sprayed with magnesium, calcium disposal of any vehicle care Weatherstrips or sodium chloride. These product. chlorides are used on roads for Silicone grease on weatherstrips will conditions such as ice and dust. Rinse the vehicle well, before make them last longer, seal better, Always wash the vehicle's washing and after to remove all and not stick or squeak. Apply chrome with soap and water after cleaning agents completely. If they silicone grease with a clean cloth. exposure. are allowed to dry on the surface, During very cold, damp weather they could stain. 10-88 Vehicle Care

Notice: Using strong soaps, Use chrome polish only on blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and chemicals, abrasive polishes, chrome-plated wheels, but avoid a buildup of vehicle wash/wax cleaners, brushes, or cleaners any painted surface of the wheel, treatments may cause wiper that contain acid on aluminum or and buff off immediately after streaking. Replace the wiper blades chrome-plated wheels, could application. if they are worn or damaged. damage the surface of the Notice: Driving the vehicle Wipers can be damaged by: wheel(s). The repairs would not through an automatic car wash . Extreme dusty conditions be covered by the vehicle that has silicone carbide tire warranty. Use only approved cleaning brushes, could damage . Sand and salt cleaners on aluminum or the aluminum or chrome-plated . Heat and sun chrome-plated wheels. wheels. The repairs would not be The surface of these wheels is covered by the vehicle warranty. . Snow and ice, without proper similar to the painted surface of the Never drive a vehicle that has removal vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, aluminum or chrome-plated Tires chemicals, abrasive polishes, wheels through an automatic car abrasive cleaners, cleaners with wash that uses silicone carbide Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes tire cleaning brushes. clean the tires. on them because the surface could Windshield and Wiper Blades Notice: Using petroleum-based be damaged. Do not use chrome tire dressing products on the polish on aluminum wheels. Clean the outside of the windshield vehicle may damage the paint Notice: Using chrome polish on with glass cleaner. finish and/or tires. When applying aluminum wheels could damage Clean the rubber blades using a lint a tire dressing, always wipe off the wheels. The repairs would not free cloth or paper towel soaked any overspray from all painted be covered by the vehicle with windshield washer fluid or a surfaces on the vehicle. warranty. Use chrome polish on mild detergent. Wash the windshield chrome wheels only. thoroughly when cleaning the Vehicle Care 10-89

Sheet Metal Damage Underbody Maintenance discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint If the vehicle is damaged and Chemicals used for ice and snow surface. requires sheet metal repair or removal and dust control can collect replacement, make sure the body on the underbody. If these are not repair shop applies anti-corrosion removed, corrosion and rust can Interior Care material to parts repaired or develop on the underbody parts The vehicle's interior will continue to replaced to restore corrosion such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, look its best if it is cleaned often. protection. and exhaust system even though Dust and dirt can accumulate on the Original manufacturer replacement they have corrosion protection. upholstery and cause damage to parts will provide the corrosion At least every spring, flush these the carpet, fabric, leather, and protection while maintaining the materials from the underbody with plastic surfaces. Stains should be vehicle warranty. plain water. Clean any areas where removed quickly as extreme heat mud and debris can collect. Dirt could cause them to set rapidly. Finish Damage packed in close areas of the frame Lighter colored interiors may require Any stone chips, fractures or deep should be loosened before being more frequent cleaning. scratches in the finish should be flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an Newspapers and garments that can repaired right away. Bare metal will underbody car washing system can transfer color to home furnishings corrode quickly and may develop do this. can also transfer color to the into major repair expense. vehicle's interior. Chemical Paint Spotting Minor chips and scratches can be Remove dust from small buttons repaired with touch-up materials Some weather and atmospheric and knobs with a small brush with conditions can create a chemical available from your dealer/retailer. soft bristles. Larger areas of finish damage can fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on Your dealer/retailer has products for be corrected in your dealer's/ cleaning the vehicle's interior. When retailer's body and paint shop. the vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped cleaning the vehicle's interior, only use cleaners specifically designed 10-90 Vehicle Care for the surfaces that are being Do not clean the interior using the . Damage to the vehicle's interior cleaned. Permanent damage can following cleaners or techniques: may result from the use of many result from using cleaners on organic solvents such as naptha, . Never use a knife or any other alcohol, etc. surfaces for which they were not sharp object to remove a soil intended. Apply the cleaner directly from any interior surface. Fabric/Carpet to the cleaning cloth to prevent over-spray. Remove any accidental . Never use a stiff brush. It can Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft over-spray from other surfaces cause damage to the vehicle's brush attachment to remove dust immediately. interior surfaces. and loose dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may Notice: Using abrasive cleaners . Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively with a cleaning only be used on floor carpet and when cleaning glass surfaces on carpeted floor mats. For soils, the vehicle, could scratch the cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage the interior and does always try to remove them first with glass and/or cause damage to the plain water or club soda. Before rear window defogger. When not improve the effectiveness of soil removal. cleaning, gently remove as much of cleaning the glass on the vehicle, the soil as possible using one of the use only a soft cloth and glass . Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. following techniques: cleaner. Avoid laundry detergents or . For liquids: gently blot the Cleaners can contain solvents that dishwashing soaps with degreasers. Using too much remaining soil with a paper can become concentrated in the towel. Allow the soil to absorb vehicle's interior. Before using soap will leave a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt. into the paper towel until no cleaners, read and adhere to all more can be removed. safety instructions on the label. For liquid cleaners, about While cleaning the vehicle's interior, 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of . For solid dry soils: remove as maintain adequate ventilation by water is a good guide. much as possible and then vacuum. opening the vehicle's doors and . Do not heavily saturate the windows. upholstery while cleaning. Vehicle Care 10-91

To clean: A paper towel can be used to blot Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white excess moisture from the fabric or Other Plastic Surfaces carpet after the cleaning process. cloth with water or club soda. To remove dust, a soft cloth 2. Remove excess moisture. Leather dampened with water can be used. If a more thorough cleaning is To remove dust, a soft cloth 3. Start on the outside edge of the necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with water can be used. soil and gently rub toward the dampened with a mild soap solution If a more thorough cleaning is center. Continue cleaning, using can be used to gently remove dust necessary, a soft cloth dampened a clean area of the cloth each and dirt. Never use spot lifters or with a mild soap solution can be time it becomes soiled. removers on plastic surfaces. Many used. Allow the leather to dry commercial cleaners and coatings 4. Continue to gently rub the naturally. Do not use heat, steam, that are sold to preserve and protect soiled area. or spot lifters or spot removers, soft plastic surfaces may 5. If the soil is not completely or shoe polish on leather. Many permanently change the removed, use a mild soap commercial leather cleaners and appearance and feel of the interior solution and repeat the cleaning coatings that are sold to preserve and are not recommended. Do not process with plain water. and protect leather may use silicone or wax-based products, permanently change the If any of the soil remains, a or those containing organic solvents appearance and feel of the leather commercial fabric cleaner or spot to clean the vehicle's interior and are not recommended. Do not lifter may be necessary. Test a small because they can alter the use silicone or wax-based products, hidden area for colorfastness before appearance by increasing the gloss or those containing organic solvents using a commercial upholstery in a non-uniform manner. to clean the vehicle's interior cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally because they can alter the cleaned area gives any impression appearance by increasing the gloss that a ring formation may result, in a non-uniform manner. clean the entire surface. 10-92 Vehicle Care

Some commercial products may Floor Mats If the floor mat has a knob retainer, increase gloss on the instrument a grommet in the floor mat attaches panel. The increase in gloss may If the floor mat has a snap retainer, to a knob on the floor of the vehicle cause annoying reflections in the a grommet in the driver side floor to secure the floor mat. To remove windshield and even make it difficult mat attaches to a hook on the floor the floor mat, turn the knob till it is to see through the windshield under of the vehicle to secure the floor aligned with the slot in the floor mat certain conditions. mat. To remove the floor mat, pull grommet and pull the floor mat up. the mat towards the rear of the To reinstall, center the slot in the Care of Safety Belts vehicle until the grommet can be floor mat grommet with the knob on Keep belts clean and dry. removed from the hook. the floor and set the mat in place. Then turn the knob until it is { WARNING perpendicular to the slot in the grommet to lock the mat in place. Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Service and Maintenance 11-1

General Information Please read the information under Service and Scheduled Maintenance. To keep Maintenance Notice: Maintenance intervals, the vehicle in good condition, see checks, inspections, your dealer/retailer. recommended fluids, and The maintenance schedule is for lubricants are necessary to keep General Information vehicles that: General Information ...... 11-1 this vehicle in good working condition. Damage caused by . carry passengers and cargo Scheduled Maintenance failure to follow scheduled within recommended limits on Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 maintenance might not be the Tire and Loading Information covered by the vehicle warranty. label. See Vehicle Load Limits Recommended Fluids, on page 9‑10. Lubricants, and Parts Proper vehicle maintenance helps to . Recommended Fluids and keep the vehicle in good working are driven on reasonable road Lubricants ...... 11-7 condition, improves fuel economy, surfaces within legal driving Maintenance Replacement and reduces vehicle emissions for limits. Parts ...... 11-9 better air quality. . use the recommended fuel. See Recommended Fuel on Maintenance Records Because of all the different ways people use vehicles, maintenance page 9‑39. Maintenance Records ...... 11-10 needs vary. The vehicle might need more frequent checks and services. 11-2 Service and Maintenance

The proper replacement parts, Scheduled { WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Maintenance Performing maintenance work can Lubricants on page 11‑7 and be dangerous. Some jobs can Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Engine Oil cause serious injury. Perform page 11‑9. We recommend the use Soon Message Displays maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your dealer/ Change engine oil and filter. have the required know-how and retailer. See Engine Oil on page 10‑8. the proper tools and equipment. An Emission Control Service. If in doubt, see your dealer/ Rotation of New Tires retailer to have a qualified To maintain ride, handling, and When the Change Engine Oil Soon technician do the work. See performance of the vehicle, it is message displays, service is Doing Your Own Service Work on important that the first rotation required for the vehicle as soon as possible, within the next 1 000 km/ page 10‑4. service for new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km 600 miles. If driving under the best At your General Motors dealer/ (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire conditions, the engine oil life system retailer, you can be certain that you Rotation on page 10‑48. might not indicate the need for will receive the highest level of vehicle service for more than a year. service available. Your dealer/ The engine oil and filter must be retailer has specially trained service changed at least once a year and technicians, uses genuine GM the oil life system must be reset. replacement parts, as well as, up to Your dealer/retailer has trained date tools and equipment to ensure service technicians who will perform fast and accurate diagnostics. this work and reset the system. Service and Maintenance 11-3

If the engine oil life system is reset Maintenance I . Brake system inspection accidentally, service the vehicle (or every 12 months, whichever . Change engine oil and filter. within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since occurs first). See Engine Oil on page 10 8. the last service. Reset the oil life ‑ An Emission Control Service. Maintenance II system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on . Engine coolant level check. See . Perform all services described in page 10‑10. Engine Coolant on page 10‑14. Maintenance I. When the Change Engine Oil Soon . Windshield washer fluid level . Steering and suspension message displays, certain services, check. See Washer Fluid on inspection. Visual inspection for checks, and inspections are page 10‑21. damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear. required. The services described . Tire inflation check. See Tire for Maintenance I should be Pressure on page 10‑42. . Engine cooling system performed at every engine oil inspection. Visual inspection . Tire wear inspection. See Tire change. The services described of hoses, pipes, fittings, and Inspection on page 10 48. for Maintenance II should be ‑ clamps and replacement, performed when: . Rotate tires. See Tire Rotation if needed. . on page 10 48. Maintenance I was performed ‑ . Windshield wiper blade the last time the engine oil was . Fluids visual leak check inspection for wear, cracking, changed. (or every 12 months, whichever or contamination and windshield . It has been 10 months or more occurs first). A leak in any and wiper blade cleaning, since the Change Engine Oil system must be repaired and the if contaminated. See Exterior Soon message has displayed or fluid level checked. Care on page 10‑86. Worn or since the last service. . Engine air cleaner filter damaged wiper blade inspection (vehicles driven in replacement. See Wiper Blade dusty conditions only). See Replacement on page 10‑26. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑12. 11-4 Service and Maintenance

. Body hinges and latches, key Additional Required Services . See Ignition Transmission Lock lock cylinders, hood latch Check on page 10‑25. assemblies, secondary latches, At Each Fuel Stop . See Park Brake and P (Park) pivots, spring anchor and . Engine oil level check. See Mechanism Check on release pawl, hood and door Engine Oil on page 10‑8. page 10‑26. hinges, rear folding seats, and liftgate hinges lubrication. See . Engine coolant level check. See . Engine cooling system and Recommended Fluids and Engine Coolant on page 10‑14. pressure cap pressure check. Lubricants on page 11‑7. . Windshield washer fluid level Radiator and air conditioning More frequent lubrication check. See Washer Fluid on condenser outside cleaning. See may be required when vehicle page 10‑21. Cooling System on page 10‑14. is exposed to a corrosive . Exhaust system and nearby heat Once a Month environment. Applying silicone shields inspection for loose or grease on weatherstrips with a . Tire inflation check. See Tire damaged components. clean cloth makes them last Pressure on page 10‑42. longer, seal better, and not stick . Accelerator pedal check for . or squeak. Tire wear inspection. See Tire damage, high effort, or binding. Inspection on page 10‑48. Replace if needed. . Restraint system component check. See Safety System Once a Year . If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit, check the Check on page 3‑30. . See Starter Switch Check on sealant expiration date printed . page 10‑25. Engine air cleaner filter on the instruction label of the kit. inspection. See Engine Air . See Automatic Transmission See Tire Sealant and Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑12. Shift Lock Control System Compressor Kit on page 10‑58. Check on page 10‑25. Service and Maintenance 11-5

First Engine Oil Change After is used to clean mud and dirt High pressure water can Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles from the underbody, care should overcome the seals and be taken to not directly spray contaminate the transfer case . Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks. the transfer case output seals. fluid. Contaminated fluid will High pressure water can decrease the life of the transfer First Engine Oil Change After overcome the seals and case and should be replaced. Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will First Engine Oil Change After . Engine air cleaner filter Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles replacement. See Engine Air decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced. . Engine cooling system drain, Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑12. flush, and refill, cooling system . Automatic transmission fluid First Engine Oil Change After and cap pressure check, and change (severe service) for Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles cleaning of outside of radiator vehicles mainly driven in heavy . Automatic transmission fluid and air conditioning condenser city traffic in hot weather, in hilly change (normal service). See (or every 5 years, whichever or mountainous terrain, when Automatic Transmission Fluid on occurs first). See Cooling frequently towing a trailer, page 10‑11. System on page 10‑14. An or used for taxi, police, . Emission Control Service. or delivery service. See Spark plug replacement and . Automatic Transmission Fluid on spark plug wires inspection. Engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service. inspection for fraying, excessive page 10‑11. cracks, or obvious damage and . All-wheel drive only: Transfer . All-wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid change (normal replacement, if needed. An case fluid change (severe Emission Control Service. service) for vehicles mainly service). During any driven when frequently towing a maintenance, if a power washer trailer, or used for taxi, police, is used to clean mud and dirt or delivery service. During any from the underbody, care should maintenance, if a power washer be taken to not directly spray the transfer case output seals. 11-6 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Service Maintenance I II Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. • • Engine coolant level check. • • Windshield washer fluid level check. • • Tire inflation pressures check. • • Tire wear inspection. • • Rotate tires. • • Fluids visual leak check. • • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • • Brake system inspection. • • Steering and suspension inspection. • Engine cooling system inspection. • Windshield wiper blades inspection. • Body components lubrication. • Restraint system components check. • Automatic transmission fluid level check. • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). • Service and Maintenance 11-7

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst Engine Oil symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil on page 10‑8. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant. Engine Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 10‑14. DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, in Hydraulic Brake System Canada 88862807). Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent. GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in Hydraulic Power Steering System Canada 89021186). Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. 11-8 Service and Maintenance

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Carrier Assembly Differential (Rear — SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Drive Module) and Transfer Case Canada 89021678). (Power Transfer Unit) Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Key Lock Cylinders Canada 10953474). Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category Release Pawl LB or GC-LB. Hood and Door Hinges and Rear Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Folding Seat Canada 10953474). Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) Weatherstrip Conditioning or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887). Service and Maintenance 11-9

Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C Engine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107 Wiper Blades Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 15254805 — Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 15254804 — Rear – 30.0 cm (11.6 in) 25920067 — 11-10 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Records After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Service and Maintenance 11-11

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading 11-12 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine, Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement Number (VIN) ...... 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications” Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications Label ...... 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's engine code. Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications ...... 12-2 Service Parts Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3 Identification Label This legal identifier is in the front This label, on the inside of the glove corner of the instrument panel, on box, has the following information: the left side of the vehicle. It can be seen through the windshield from . Vehicle Identification outside. The VIN also appears on Number (VIN) the Vehicle Certification and Service . Model designation Parts labels and certificates of title and registration. . Paint information . Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle. 12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more information. Capacities Application Metric English For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Cooling System 10.8 L 11.4 qt Engine Oil with Filter 5.2 L 5.5 qt Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill) 5.0 L 5.3 qt Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft *See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑11 for information on checking fluid level. All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling. Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing 3.6L V6 Engine 12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES Customer Information 13-1

Reporting Safety Defects Customer Information Customer Reporting Safety Defects to Information the United States Government ...... 13-14 Customer Satisfaction Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are Customer Satisfaction Government ...... 13-14 important to your dealer and to Procedure ...... 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns General Motors ...... 13-15 Customer Assistance with the sales transaction or the Offices ...... 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be Customer Assistance for Text resolved by the dealer's sales or Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4 Privacy Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes, Online Owner Center ...... 13-5 however, despite the best intentions GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy ...... 13-15 Event Data Recorders ...... 13-15 of all concerned, misunderstandings Program ...... 13-6 can occur. If your concern has not Roadside Assistance Navigation System ...... 13-16 Radio Frequency been resolved to your satisfaction, Program ...... 13-6 the following steps should be taken: Scheduling Service Identification (RFID) ...... 13-16 Appointments ...... 13-8 Radio Frequency STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Courtesy Transportation Statement ...... 13-17 with a member of dealership Program ...... 13-9 management. Normally, concerns Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10 can be quickly resolved at that level. Service Publications If the matter has already been Ordering Information ...... 13-13 reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager. 13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO : If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, case will generally be heard within member of dealership management, remember that your concern will 40 days. If you do not agree with the it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's decision given in your case, you resolved by the dealership without facility. That is why we suggest may reject it and proceed with any further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. other venue for relief available Chevrolet Customer Assistance to you. STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your You may contact the BBB Auto Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making Line Program using the toll-free Canada Customer Communication sure you are completely satisfied telephone number or write them at Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However, the following address: or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied BBB Auto Line Program We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Council of Better Business toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, Bureaus, Inc. inquiry prompt attention. Have the you can file with the Better Business 4200 Wilson Boulevard following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to Suite 800 give the Customer Assistance enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838 Representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 . Vehicle Identification Number out of court program administered www.dr.bbb.org/goauto (VIN). This is available from by the Council of Better Business the vehicle registration or title, Bureaus to settle automotive This program is available in all or the plate at the top left of the disputes regarding vehicle repairs or 50 states and the District of instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle Columbia. Eligibility is limited by through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may vehicle age, mileage, and other be required to resort to this informal factors. General Motors reserves . Dealership name and location. dispute resolution program prior to the right to change eligibility . Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the limitations and/or discontinue its present mileage. program is free of charge and your participation in this program. Customer Information 13-3

STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), Offices addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or Chevrolet encourages customers procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, call the General Motors Customer to call the toll-free number for General Motors of Canada Limited Communication Centre, assistance. However, if a customer wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-3777 (English), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French), the letter should be addressed to: Mediation/Arbitration Program. or write to: General Motors of Canada Limited United States — Customer The Mediation/Arbitration Program Assistance has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication of owner disputes involving Centre Chevrolet Motor Division factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Customer Assistance claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Center the review of the facts involved by 1908 Colonel Sam Drive P.O. Box 33170 an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Detroit, MI 48232-5170 may include an informal hearing Chevrolet.com before the arbiter. The program is Your inquiry should be accompanied designed so that the entire dispute by the Vehicle Identification 1-800-222-1020 settlement process, from the time Number (VIN). 1-800-833-2438 (For Text you file your complaint to the final Telephone devices (TTYs)) decision, should be completed in Roadside Assistance: about 70 days. We believe our 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872) impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge. 13-4 Customer Information

From Puerto Rico: Overseas — Customer Customer Assistance for 1-800-496-9992 (English) Assistance Text Telephone (TTY) 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Please contact the local General Users From U.S. Virgin Islands: Motors Business Unit. To assist customers who are deaf, 1-800-496-9994 Mexico, Central America and hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Caribbean Islands/Countries and who use Text Telephones Canada Customer — (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY Assistance Virgin Islands) — Customer equipment available at its Customer General Motors of Canada Limited Assistance Assistance Center. Any TTY user Customer Communication Centre, in the U.S. can communicate CA1-163-005 General Motors de Mexico, S. de with Chevrolet by dialing: 1908 Colonel Sam Drive R.L. de C.V. 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Customer Assistance Center (TTY users in Canada can dial gmcanada.com Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 1-800-263-3830.) Col. Lomas de Bezares 1-800-263-3777 (English) C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. 1-800-263-7854 (French) 1-800-263-3830 (For Text 01-800-508-0000 Telephone devices (TTYs)) Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800 Customer Information 13-5

Online Owner Center Other Helpful Links: Here are a few of the valuable Chevrolet − www.chevrolet.com tools and services you will have Online Owner Center (U.S.) — access to: Chevrolet Merchandise www.gmownercenter.com/ — . www.chevymall.com My Showroom: Find and save chevrolet information on vehicles and Information and services Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ current offers in your area. helpcenter customized for your specific . My Dealers/Retailers: Save vehicle — all in one convenient . FAQ details such as address and place. . Contact Us phone number for each of your . Digital owner manual, warranty preferred GM dealers/retailers. My GM Canada information, and more . My Driveway: Access quick links (Canada) www.gm.ca . Online service and maintenance — to parts and service estimates, records My GM Canada is a check trade-in values, password-protected section of or schedule a service . Find Chevrolet dealers for www.gm.ca where you can save appointment by adding the service nationwide information on GM vehicles, get vehicles you own to your . Exclusive privileges and offers personalized offers, and use handy driveway profile. tools and forms with greater ease. . Recall notices for your specific . My Preferences: Manage your vehicle profile and use tools and forms ® with greater ease. . OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within www.gm.ca. 13-6 Customer Information

GM Mobility Roadside Assistance . Model, year, color, and license plate number of the vehicle Reimbursement Program Program . Odometer reading, Vehicle For U.S. purchased vehicles, Identification Number (VIN), and call 1-800-CHEV-USA delivery date of the vehicle (1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone . (TTY): 1-888-889-2438). Description of the problem For Canadian purchased vehicles, Coverage call 1-800-268-6800. Services are provided up to 5 years/ This program, available to qualified Service is available 24 hours a day, 100,000 miles (160 000 km), applicants for cost reimbursement 365 days a year. whichever comes first. of eligible aftermarket adaptive Calling for Assistance In the U.S., anyone driving the equipment required for your vehicle, vehicle is covered. In Canada, a such as hand controls or a When calling Roadside Assistance, person driving the vehicle without wheelchair/scooter lift for the have the following information permission from the owner is not vehicle. ready: covered. For more information on the limited . Your name, home address, and Roadside Assistance is not a part of offer visit gmmobility.com or call the home telephone number the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. GM Mobility Assistance Center at . Telephone number of your Chevrolet and General Motors of 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone location Canada Limited reserve the right to (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. make any changes or discontinue . Location of the vehicle General Motors of Canada also the Roadside Assistance program at has a Mobility Program. Call any time without notification. 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830. Customer Information 13-7

Chevrolet and General Motors of . Emergency Tow From a Public Services Not Included in Canada Limited reserve the right Road or Highway: Tow to the Roadside Assistance to limit services or payment to an nearest Chevrolet dealer for owner or driver if they decide the warranty service, or if the vehicle . Impound towing caused by claims are made too often, or the was in a crash and cannot be violation of any laws. same type of claim is made many driven. Assistance is also given . Legal fines. times. when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow. . Mounting, dismounting or Services Provided changing of snow tires, chains, . Flat Tire Change: Service is or other traction devices. . Emergency Fuel Delivery: provided to change a flat tire Delivery of enough fuel for the with the spare tire. The spare . Towing or services for vehicles vehicle to get to the nearest tire, if equipped, must be in good driven on a non-public road or service station. condition and properly inflated. highway. . Lock-Out Service: Service is It is the owner's responsibility for provided to unlock the vehicle the repair or replacement of the if you are locked out. A remote tire if it is not covered by the unlock may be available if you warranty. ® have OnStar . For security . Battery Jump Start: Service is reasons, the driver must present provided to jump start a dead identification before this service battery. is given. 13-8 Customer Information

Services Specific to Canadian . Trip Interruption Benefits and Scheduling Service Purchased Vehicles Assistance: Must be over 250 kilometres from where Appointments . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement your trip was started to When your vehicle requires is approximately $5 Canadian. qualify. General Motors of warranty service, contact your Diesel fuel delivery may be Canada Limited requires dealer/retailer and request an restricted. Propane and other pre-authorization, original appointment. By scheduling a fuels are not provided through detailed receipts, and a copy service appointment and advising this service. of the repair orders. Once your service consultant of your . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle authorization has been received, transportation needs, your dealer/ registration is required. the Roadside Assistance advisor retailer can help minimize your will help you make arrangements inconvenience. . Trip Routing Service: Detailed and explain how to receive maps of North America are payment. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled provided when requested either into the service department with the most direct route or the . Alternative Service: If immediately, keep driving it until it most scenic route. There is a assistance cannot be provided can be scheduled for service, limit of six requests per year. right away, the Roadside unless, of course, the problem is Additional travel information is Assistance advisor may give safety-related. If it is, please call also available. Allow three you permission to get local your dealership/retailer, let them weeks for delivery. emergency road service. know this, and ask for instructions. You will receive payment, up to $100, after sending the original If the dealer/retailer requests you to receipt to Roadside Assistance. bring the vehicle for service, you are Mechanical failures may be urged to do so as early in the work covered, however any cost for day as possible to allow for the parts and labor for repairs not same day repair. covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility. Customer Information 13-9

Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement Program Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, If your vehicle requires overnight To enhance your ownership if you are unable to wait, GM helps warranty repairs, and public experience, we and our participating to minimize your inconvenience by transportation is used instead of the dealers are proud to offer Courtesy providing several transportation dealer's shuttle service, the expense Transportation, a customer support options. Depending on the must be supported by original program for vehicles with the New circumstances, your dealer can receipts and can only be up to the Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base offer you one of the following: maximum amount allowed by GM Warranty Coverage period in for shuttle service. In addition, for Canada) and extended powertrain, Shuttle Service U.S. customers, should you arrange and hybrid specific warranty in both Shuttle service is the preferred transportation through a friend or the U.S. and Canada. means of offering Courtesy relative, limited reimbursement for Several courtesy transportation Transportation. Dealers may provide reasonable fuel expenses may be options are available to assist in you with shuttle service to get you available. Claim amounts should reducing your inconvenience when to your destination with minimal reflect actual costs and be warranty repairs are required. interruption of your daily schedule. supported by original receipts. See your dealer for information Courtesy Transportation is not a This includes one-way or round trip regarding the allowance amounts part of the New Vehicle Limited shuttle service within reasonable for reimbursement of fuel or other Warranty. A separate booklet time and distance parameters of the dealer's area. transportation costs. entitled “Warranty and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information. 13-10 Customer Information

Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Collision Damage Repair Information Your dealer may arrange to provide If your vehicle is involved in a you with a courtesy rental vehicle or All program options, such as shuttle collision and it is damaged, have reimburse you for a rental vehicle service, may not be available at the damage repaired by a qualified that you obtain if your vehicle is every dealer. Please contact your technician using the proper kept for an overnight warranty dealer for specific information equipment and quality replacement repair. Rental reimbursement will about availability. All Courtesy parts. Poorly performed collision be limited and must be supported Transportation arrangements will be repairs diminish your vehicle's by original receipts. This requires administered by appropriate dealer resale value, and safety that you sign and complete a personnel. performance can be compromised rental agreement and meet in subsequent collisions. state/provincial, local, and rental General Motors reserves the right vehicle provider requirements. to unilaterally modify, change or Collision Parts Requirements vary and may include discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all Genuine GM Collision parts are new minimum age requirements, parts made with the same materials insurance coverage, credit card, questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and and construction methods as the etc. You are responsible for fuel parts with which your vehicle was usage charges and may also be conditions described herein at its sole discretion. originally built. Genuine GM responsible for taxes, levies, usage Collision parts are your best choice fees, excessive mileage, or rental to ensure that your vehicle's usage beyond the completion of the designed appearance, durability, repair. and safety are preserved. The use It may not be possible to provide a of Genuine GM parts can help like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. maintain your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Customer Information 13-11

Recycled original equipment parts parts are not covered by your GM Many insurance policies provide may also be used for repair. These New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and reduced protection to your GM parts are typically removed from any vehicle failure related to such vehicle by limiting compensation vehicles that were total losses in parts are not covered by that for damage repairs by using prior crashes. In most cases, the warranty. aftermarket collision parts. Some parts being recycled are from insurance companies will not undamaged sections of the vehicle. Repair Facility specify aftermarket collision parts. A recycled original equipment GM We recommend that you choose a When purchasing insurance, we part, may be an acceptable choice collision repair facility that meets recommend that you assure your to maintain your vehicle's originally your needs before you ever need vehicle will be repaired with GM designed appearance and safety collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer original equipment collision parts. performance, however, the history of may have a collision repair center If such insurance coverage is not these parts is not known. Such parts with GM-trained technicians and available from your current are not covered by your GM New state of the art equipment, or be insurance carrier, consider switching Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any able to recommend a collision to another insurance carrier. related failures are not covered by repair center that has GM-trained If your vehicle is leased, the leasing that warranty. technicians and comparable company may require you to have Aftermarket collision parts are equipment. insurance that assures repairs with also available. These are made Insuring Your Vehicle Genuine GM Original Equipment by companies other than GM and Manufacturer (OEM) parts or may not have been tested for your Protect your investment in your Genuine Manufacturer replacement vehicle. As a result, these parts GM vehicle with comprehensive parts. Read your lease carefully, as may fit poorly, exhibit premature and collision insurance coverage. you may be charged at the end of durability/corrosion problems, There are significant differences in your lease for poor quality repairs. and may not perform properly in the quality of coverage afforded by subsequent collisions. Aftermarket various insurance policy terms. 13-12 Customer Information

If a Crash Occurs . Vehicle Identification original GM parts. Remember, Number (VIN) recycled parts will not be covered by If there has been an injury, call . your GM vehicle warranty. emergency services for help. Do not Insurance company and policy leave the scene of a crash until all number Insurance pays the bill for the repair, matters have been taken care of. . General description of the but you must live with the repair. Move the vehicle only if its position damage to the other vehicle Depending on your policy limits, puts you in danger, or you are your insurance company may Choose a reputable repair facility instructed to move it by a police initially value the repair using that uses quality replacement parts. officer. aftermarket parts. Discuss this with See “Collision Parts” earlier in this your repair professional, and insist Give only the necessary information section. on Genuine GM parts. Remember to police and other parties involved If the airbag has inflated, see What if your vehicle is leased you may in the crash. Will You See After an Airbag be obligated to have the vehicle For emergency towing see Inflates? on page 3‑38. repaired with Genuine GM parts, Roadside Assistance Program on even if your insurance coverage page 13‑6. Managing the Vehicle Damage does not pay the full cost. Repair Process Gather the following information: If another party's insurance In the event that your vehicle . company is paying for the repairs, Driver's name, address, phone requires damage repairs, GM number you are not obligated to accept a recommends that you take an active repair valuation based on that . Driver's license number role in its repair. If you have a insurance company's collision policy pre-determined repair facility of . Owner's name, address, phone repair limits, as you have no number choice, take your vehicle there, contractual limits with that company. or have it towed there. Specify In such cases, you can have control . Vehicle license plate to the facility that any required of the repair and parts choices as . Vehicle make, model and replacement collision parts be long as cost stays within reasonable model year original equipment parts, either limits. new Genuine GM parts or recycled Customer Information 13-13

Service Publications Owner Information ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday Owner publications are written Ordering Information 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time specifically for owners and intended Service Manuals to provide basic operational For Credit Card Orders Only Service Manuals have the diagnosis information about the vehicle. (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit and repair information on engines, The owner manual includes the Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web transmission, axle suspension, Maintenance Schedule for all at: helminc.com brakes, electrical, steering, models. Or you can write to: body, etc. In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Helm, Incorporated Service Bulletins Owner Manual, and Warranty P.O. Box 07130 Booklet. Detroit, MI 48207 Service Bulletins give additional technical service information RETAIL SELL PRICE: Prices are subject to change needed to knowledgeably service $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee without notice and without incurring General Motors cars and trucks. Without Portfolio: Owner obligation. Allow ample time for Each bulletin contains instructions Manual only. delivery. to assist in the diagnosis and RETAIL SELL PRICE: Note to Canadian Customers: All service of your vehicle. $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to Current and Past Model Order make checks payable in U.S. funds. Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle. 13-14 Customer Information

Reporting Safety group of vehicles, it may order Reporting Safety Defects a recall and remedy campaign. to the Canadian Defects However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual Government Reporting Safety Defects problems between you, your If you live in Canada, and you to the United States dealer, or General Motors. believe that your vehicle has a Government safety defect, notify Transport To contact NHTSA, you may call Canada immediately, in addition If you believe that your vehicle the Vehicle Safety Hotline to notifying General Motors of has a defect which could cause toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Canada Limited. Call them at a crash or could cause injury or (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to 1-800-333-0510 or write to: death, you should immediately http://www.safercar.gov; or Transport Canada inform the National Highway write to: Road Safety Branch Traffic Safety Administration Administrator, NHTSA 2780 Sheffield Road (NHTSA) in addition to notifying 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 General Motors. Washington, D.C. 20590 If NHTSA receives similar You can also obtain other complaints, it may open an information about motor investigation, and if it finds vehicle safety from that a safety defect exists in a http://www.safercar.gov. Customer Information 13-15

Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders to General Motors Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Privacy Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Transport Canada) in a situation like of an EDR is to record, in certain this, please notify General Motors. Your GM vehicle has a number of crash or near crash-like situations, sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: information about the vehicle’s hitting a road obstacle, data that Chevrolet Motor Division performance and how it is driven. will assist in understanding how Chevrolet Customer Assistance For example, your vehicle uses a vehicle's systems performed. Center computer modules to monitor and The EDR is designed to record data P.O. Box 33170 control engine and transmission related to vehicle dynamics and Detroit, MI 48232-5170 performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash and, The EDR in this vehicle is designed (English) or 1-800-263-7854 to record such data as: (French), or write: if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in your General Motors of Canada Limited vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating Customer Communication Centre, data to help your dealer/retailer . CA1-163-005 technician service your vehicle. Whether or not the driver and 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Some modules may also store data passenger safety belts were Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 about how you operate the vehicle, buckled/fastened such as rate of fuel consumption or . How far, if at all, the driver was average speed. These modules may pressing the accelerator and/or also retain the owner’s personal brake pedal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, . How fast the vehicle was seat positions, and temperature traveling settings. 13-16 Customer Information

This data can help provide a better manufacturer, other parties, such Navigation System understanding of the circumstances as law enforcement, that have the in which crashes and injuries occur. special equipment, can read the If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the system may Important: EDR data is recorded information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. result in the storage of destinations, by your vehicle only if a non-trivial addresses, telephone numbers, and crash situation occurs; no data is GM will not access this data or other trip information. Refer to the recorded by the EDR under normal share it with others except: with the navigation system operating manual driving conditions and no personal consent of the vehicle owner or, for information on stored data and data (e.g., name, gender, age, if the vehicle is leased, with the deletion instructions. and crash location) is recorded. consent of the lessee; in response However, other parties, such as to an official request of police or Radio Frequency law enforcement, could combine similar government office; as part of the EDR data with the type of GM's defense of litigation through Identification (RFID) personally identifying data routinely the discovery process; or, as RFID technology is used in some acquired during a crash required by law. Data that GM vehicles for functions such as tire investigation. collects or receives may also be pressure monitoring and ignition To read data recorded by an EDR, used for GM research needs or may system security, as well as in special equipment is required, and be made available to others for connection with conveniences such access to the vehicle or the EDR is research purposes, where a need is as key fobs for remote door locking/ needed. In addition to the vehicle shown and the data is not tied to a unlocking and starting, and specific vehicle or vehicle owner. in-vehicle transmitters for garage door openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information. Customer Information 13-17

Radio Frequency Statement This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. The device may not cause interference. 2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. 13-18 Customer Information

2 NOTES INDEX i-1

A Airbag System (cont.) Antilock Brake When Should an Airbag System (ABS) ...... 9-25 Accessories and Inflate? ...... 3-36 Warning Light ...... 5-19 Modifications ...... 10-3 Where Are the Airbags? ...... 3-34 Appearance Care Accessory Power ...... 9-16 Airbags Exterior ...... 10-86 Add-On Electrical Adding Equipment to the Interior ...... 10-89 Equipment ...... 9-53 Vehicle ...... 3-45 Armrest Stoarge ...... 4-1 Adding Equipment to the Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-15 Assistance Program, Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-45 Readiness Light ...... 5-14 Roadside ...... 13-6 Adjustments Servicing Airbag-Equipped Audio Players ...... 7-13 Lumbar, Front Seats ...... 3-6 Vehicles ...... 3-44 CD ...... 7-13 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12 System Check ...... 3-32 MP3 ...... 7-23, 7-29 Air Vents ...... 8-12 Alarm System Audio System Airbag System Anti-Theft ...... 2-13 Radio Reception ...... 7-12 Check ...... 3-46 All-Wheel Drive ...... 9-25 Rear Seat (RSA) ...... 7-46 How Does an Airbag AM-FM Radio ...... 7-7 Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 7-2 Restrain? ...... 3-37 Antenna Automatic Passenger Sensing Multi-Band ...... 7-13 Door Locks ...... 2-8 System ...... 3-40 Anti-Theft Automatic Transmission ...... 9-22 What Makes an Airbag Alarm System ...... 2-13 Fluid ...... 10-11 Inflate? ...... 3-37 Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-36 Manual Mode ...... 9-24 What Will You See After Shiftlock Control System an Airbag Inflates? ...... 3-38 Check ...... 10-25 Auxiliary Devices ...... 7-36 i-2 INDEX

B C Charging System Light ...... 5-16 Check Battery ...... 10-24 Calibration ...... 5-6 Engine Lamp ...... 5-16 Jump Starting ...... 10-78 California Ignition Load Management ...... 6-6 Fuel Requirements ...... 9-39 Transmission Lock ...... 10-25 Power Protection ...... 6-7 Perchlorate Materials Child Restraints Voltage and Charging Requirements ...... 10-3 Infants and Young Messages ...... 5-31 Warning ...... 10-3 Children ...... 3-49 Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-26 Camera, Rear Vision ...... 9-34 Lower Anchors and Blind Spot Mirrors ...... 2-17 Canadian Vehicle Owners ...... iii Tethers for Children ...... 3-55 Bluetooth ...... 7-48 Capacities and Older Children ...... 3-47 Brakes ...... 10-22 Specifications ...... 12-2 Securing ...... 3-62, 3-64 Antilock ...... 9-25 Carbon Monoxide Systems ...... 3-52 Assist ...... 9-27 Engine Exhaust ...... 9-21 Where to Put the Restraint . . .3-54 Fluid ...... 10-23 Liftgate ...... 2-9 Circuit Breakers ...... 10-30 Parking ...... 9-26 Winter Driving ...... 9-8 Cleaning System Messages ...... 5-32 Cargo Exterior Care ...... 10-86 Braking ...... 9-3 Cover ...... 4-3 Interior Care ...... 10-89 Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 9-15 Management System ...... 4-3 Climate Control Systems ...... 8-1 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-29 Tie Downs ...... 4-3 Dual Automatic ...... 8-4 Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-27 Cautions, Danger, and Rear ...... 8-10, 8-11 Headlamp Aiming ...... 10-27 Warnings ...... iv Clock ...... 5-9 Headlamps ...... 10-27 CD Cluster, IP ...... 5-11 Taillamps, Turn Signal, DVD Player ...... 7-15 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10 Sidemarker, and CD Player ...... 7-13 Compact Spare Tire ...... 10-77 Stoplamps ...... 10-28 Center Console Storage ...... 4-1 Compass ...... 5-6 Buying New Tires ...... 10-50 Chains, Tire ...... 10-55 INDEX i-3

Compressor Kit, Tire Customer Assistance ...... 13-4 Devices, Auxiliary ...... 7-36 Sealant ...... 10-58 Offices ...... 13-3 Dome Lamps ...... 6-5 Control of a Vehicle ...... 9-3 Text Telephone (TTY) Door Convenience Net ...... 4-3 Users ...... 13-4 Ajar Messages ...... 5-32 Convex Mirrors ...... 2-16 Customer Information Delayed Locking ...... 2-7 Coolant Service Publications Locks ...... 2-7 Engine ...... 10-14 Ordering Information ...... 13-13 Power Locks ...... 2-7 Engine Temperature Gage . . . .5-12 Customer Satisfaction Drive Systems Engine Temperature Procedure ...... 13-1 All-Wheel Drive ...... 9-25 Warning Light ...... 5-20 Driver Information Cooling System ...... 10-14 D Center (DIC) ...... 5-22, 5-28 Engine Messages ...... 5-33 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10 Driving Courtesy Lamps ...... 6-4 Danger, Warnings, and Characteristics and Courtesy Transportation Cautions ...... iv Towing Tips ...... 9-44 Program ...... 13-9 Data Recorders, Event ...... 13-15 Defensive ...... 9-2 Covers Daytime Running Lamps/ Drunk ...... 9-2 Cargo ...... 4-3 Automatic Headlamp Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-7 Engine ...... 10-7 System ...... 6-3 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-7 Cruise Control ...... 9-30 Defensive Driving ...... 9-2 If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 9-10 Light ...... 5-22 Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 Loss of Control ...... 9-5 Messages ...... 5-32 Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 6-6 Off-Road Recovery ...... 9-5 Cupholders ...... 4-1 Delayed Headlamps ...... 6-3 Vehicle Load Limits ...... 9-10 Delayed Locking ...... 2-7 Winter ...... 9-8 i-4 INDEX

Driving for Better Fuel Engine (cont.) F Economy ...... 1-22 Coolant Temperature Gage . . .5-12 Filter Dual Automatic Climate Coolant Temperature Engine Air Cleaner ...... 10-12 Control System ...... 8-4 Warning Light ...... 5-20 Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-2 DVD Cooling System ...... 10-14 Flashers, Hazard Warning ...... 6-3 Rear Seat Entertainment Cooling System Messages . . .5-33 Flat Tire ...... 10-56 System ...... 7-37 Cover ...... 10-7 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 10-66 DVD/CD Player ...... 7-15 Drive Belt Routing ...... 12-3 Floor Console Storage ...... 4-2 Exhaust ...... 9-21 Floor Mats ...... 10-92 Overheated Protection E Fluid Operating Mode ...... 10-20 Electrical Equipment, Automatic Transmission . . . . .10-11 Overheating ...... 10-18 Add-On ...... 9-53 Brakes ...... 10-23 Power Messages ...... 5-34 Electrical System Power Steering ...... 10-20 Pressure Light ...... 5-21 Engine Compartment Washer ...... 10-21 Running While Parked ...... 9-21 Fuse Block ...... 10-30 Folding Mirrors ...... 2-17 Starting ...... 9-17 Fuses and Circuit Front Seats Engine Oil Breakers ...... 10-30 Adjustment ...... 3-3 Life System ...... 10-10 Instrument Panel Fuse Heated ...... 3-9 Messages ...... 5-34 Block ...... 10-33 Heated and Ventilated ...... 3-10 Entry Lighting ...... 6-5 Overload ...... 10-29 Fuel ...... 9-38 Equipment, Towing ...... 9-51 Engine Additives ...... 9-40 Event Data Recorders ...... 13-15 Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 10-12 Filling a Portable Fuel Extender, Safety Belt ...... 3-30 Check and Service Engine Container ...... 9-43 Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 6-1 Soon Lamp ...... 5-16 Filling the Tank ...... 9-41 Compartment Overview ...... 10-6 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-40 Coolant ...... 10-14 Gage ...... 5-12 INDEX i-5

Fuel (cont.) Gages (cont.) Headlamps Gasoline Specifications ...... 9-39 Tachometer ...... 5-12 Aiming ...... 10-27 Recommended ...... 9-39 Voltmeter ...... 5-13 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-27 Requirements, California . . . . .9-39 Warning Lights and Daytime Running Lamps/ System Messages ...... 5-34 Indicators ...... 5-10 Automatic Headlamp Fuel Economy Garage Door Opener ...... 5-47 System ...... 6-3 Driving for Better ...... 1-22 Programming ...... 5-47 Delayed ...... 6-3 Fuses Gasoline Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-2 Engine Compartment Specifications ...... 9-39 High-Beam On Light ...... 5-22 Fuse Block ...... 10-30 General Information High/Low Beam Changer ...... 6-2 Fuses and Circuit Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Heated and Ventilated Front Breakers ...... 10-30 Towing ...... 9-43 Seats ...... 3-10 Instrument Panel Fuse Vehicle Care ...... 10-2 Heated Front Seats ...... 3-9 Block ...... 10-33 Glove Box ...... 4-1 Heated Mirrors ...... 2-17 GM Mobility Reimbursement High Voltage Devices and G Program ...... 13-6 Wiring ...... 10-29 Gages High-Beam On Light ...... 5-22 Engine Coolant H Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-7 Temperature ...... 5-12 Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-27 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-7 Fuel ...... 5-12 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 6-3 Hood ...... 10-5 Odometer ...... 5-12 Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Horn ...... 5-5 Speedometer ...... 5-12 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ...... 3-19 i-6 INDEX

I L Lights Airbag Readiness ...... 5-14 Ignition Positions ...... 9-15 Labeling, Tire Sidewall ...... 10-36 Antilock Brake System Ignition Transmission Lock Lamp Messages ...... 5-35 (ABS) Warning ...... 5-19 Check ...... 10-25 Lamps Charging System ...... 5-16 Illumination Control ...... 6-4 Courtesy ...... 6-4 Cruise Control ...... 5-22 Immobilizer ...... 2-14 Dome ...... 6-5 Engine Coolant Infants and Young Children, Exterior Controls ...... 6-1 Temperature Warning ...... 5-20 Restraints ...... 3-49 Malfunction Indicator ...... 5-16 Engine Oil Pressure ...... 5-21 Instrument Cluster ...... 5-11 Reading ...... 6-5 Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-2 Instrument Panel ...... 6-4 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-24 High-Beam On ...... 5-22 Storage Area ...... 4-1 LATCH System High/Low Beam Changer ...... 6-2 Introduction ...... iii, 7-1 Replacing Parts After a Safety Belt Reminders ...... 5-13 Crash ...... 3-61 Security ...... 5-22 Latch, Lower Anchors and J StabiliTrak® Indicator ...... 5-20 Tethers for Children ...... 3-55 Jump Starting ...... 10-78 Tire Pressure ...... 5-21 Liftgate Tow/Haul Mode ...... 5-20 Carbon Monoxide ...... 2-9 Locks K Lighting Automatic Door ...... 2-8 Key and Lock Messages ...... 5-35 Delayed Entry ...... 6-6 Keyless Entry Delayed Exit ...... 6-6 Delayed Locking ...... 2-7 Door ...... 2-7 Remote (RKE) System ...... 2-3 Entry ...... 6-5 Lockout Protection ...... 2-8 Keyless Entry System ...... 2-2 Parade Dimming ...... 6-6 Keys ...... 2-2 Power Door ...... 2-7 Safety ...... 2-8 INDEX i-7

Loss of Control ...... 9-5 Messages (cont.) Monitor System, Tire Lower Anchors and Tethers Fuel System ...... 5-34 Pressure ...... 10-43 for Children (LATCH Key and Lock ...... 5-35 MP3 ...... 7-23, 7-29 SYSTEM) ...... 3-55 Lamp ...... 5-35 Multi-Band Antenna ...... 7-13 Lumbar Adjustment ...... 3-6 Object Detection System . . . . .5-35 Front Seats ...... 3-6 Ride Control System ...... 5-36 N Service Vehicle ...... 5-37 Navigation System ...... 13-16 M Tire ...... 5-37 Net, Convenience ...... 4-3 Maintenance Transmission ...... 5-38 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 9-15 Records ...... 11-10 Vehicle ...... 5-31 Maintenance Schedule Vehicle Reminder ...... 5-39 Vehicle Speed ...... 5-39 O Recommended Fluids and Object Detection System Lubricants ...... 11-7 Washer Fluid ...... 5-39 Mirrors Messages ...... 5-35 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-2 Odometer ...... 5-12 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-16 Automatic Dimming Rearview ...... 2-19 Off-Road Manual Mode ...... 9-24 Recovery ...... 9-5 Messages Blind Spot ...... 2-17 Convex ...... 2-16 Oil Airbag System ...... 5-36 Engine ...... 10-8 Anti-Theft Alarm System ...... 5-36 Folding ...... 2-17 Heated ...... 2-17 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Battery Voltage and Messages ...... 5-34 Charging ...... 5-31 Manual Rearview ...... 2-19 Outlets ...... 5-9 Pressure Light ...... 5-21 Brake System ...... 5-32 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-47 Door Ajar ...... 5-32 Park Tilt ...... 2-19 Power ...... 2-17 Online Owner Center ...... 13-5 Engine Cooling System ...... 5-33 OnStar ...... 1-23 Engine Oil ...... 5-34 Engine Power ...... 5-34 i-8 INDEX

Operation, Infotainment Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-40 R System ...... 7-2 Perchlorate Materials Radio Frequency Outlets Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Identification (RFID) ...... 13-16 Power ...... 5-9 Phone Statement ...... 13-17 Overheated Engine Bluetooth ...... 7-48 Radios Protection Power AM-FM Radio ...... 7-7 Operating Mode ...... 10-20 Door Locks ...... 2-7 CD/DVD Player ...... 7-15 Overheating, Engine ...... 10-18 Mirrors ...... 2-17 Reception ...... 7-12 Protection, Battery ...... 6-7 Satellite ...... 7-8 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-16 P Reading Lamps ...... 6-5 Seat Adjustment ...... 3-4 Parade Dimming ...... 6-6 Rear Climate Control Steering Fluid ...... 10-20 Park System ...... 8-10, 8-11 Windows ...... 2-20 Shifting Into ...... 9-19 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Pregnancy, Using Safety Shifting Out of ...... 9-20 System ...... 7-46 Belts ...... 3-30 Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 2-19 Rear Seat Entertainment Privacy Parking System ...... 7-37 Radio Frequency Assist, Ultrasonic ...... 9-32 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...... 7-46 Identification (RFID) ...... 13-16 Brake ...... 9-26 Rear Seats ...... 3-10 Program Brake and P (Park) Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-34 Courtesy Transportation ...... 13-9 Mechanism Check ...... 10-26 Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6 Proposition 65 Warning, Over Things That Burn ...... 9-20 Rearview Mirrors ...... 2-19 California ...... 10-3 Passenger Airbag Status Automatic Dimming ...... 2-19 Indicator ...... 5-15 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-7 INDEX i-9

Recommended Fluids and Retained Accessory Safety Defects Reporting Lubricants ...... 11-7 Power (RAP) ...... 9-16 Canadian Government ...... 13-14 Recommended Fuel ...... 9-39 Ride Control Systems General Motors ...... 13-15 Records Messages ...... 5-36 U.S. Government ...... 13-14 Maintenance ...... 11-10 Roadside Assistance Safety Locks ...... 2-8 Recreational Vehicle Program ...... 13-6 Safety System Check ...... 3-30 Towing ...... 10-82 Roof Satellite Radio ...... 7-8 Reimbursement Program, Sunroof ...... 2-23 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-2 GM Mobility ...... 13-6 Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 Scheduling Appointments ...... 13-8 Remote Keyless Entry Rotation, Tires ...... 10-48 Sealant Kit, Tire ...... 10-58 (RKE) System ...... 2-2, 2-3 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3 Seats Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-5 Running the Vehicle While Adjustment, Front ...... 3-3 Replacement Bulbs ...... 10-29 Parked ...... 9-21 Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Replacement Parts Heated and Ventilated Airbags ...... 3-46 S Front ...... 3-10 Maintenance ...... 11-9 Safety Belts ...... 3-15 Heated Front ...... 3-9 Replacing Airbag System ...... 3-46 Care ...... 3-31 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6 Replacing LATCH System Extender ...... 3-30 Power Adjustment, Front ...... 3-4 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-61 How to Wear Safety Belts Rear ...... 3-10 Replacing Safety Belt Properly ...... 3-19 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-7 System Parts After a Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-24 Third Row Seat ...... 3-12 Crash ...... 3-31 Reminders ...... 5-13 Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-75 Reporting Safety Defects Replacing After a Crash ...... 3-31 Securing Child Canadian Government ...... 13-14 Use During Pregnancy ...... 3-30 Restraints ...... 3-62, 3-64 General Motors ...... 13-15 U.S. Government ...... 13-14 i-10 INDEX

Security Spare Tire Stuck Vehicle ...... 9-10 Light ...... 5-22 Compact ...... 10-77 Sun Visors ...... 2-22 Vehicle ...... 2-13 Specifications and Sunroof ...... 2-23 Service Capacities ...... 12-2 Symbols ...... iv Accessories and Speedometer ...... 5-12 System Modifications ...... 10-3 StabiliTrak System ...... 9-27 Roof Rack ...... 4-4 Doing Your Own Work ...... 10-4 StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-20 System Check Engine Soon Lamp ...... 5-16 Start Vehicle, Remote ...... 2-5 Automatic Transmission Maintenance Records ...... 11-10 Starter Switch Check ...... 10-25 Shiftlock Control ...... 10-25 Maintenance, General Starting the Engine ...... 9-17 Information ...... 11-1 Steering ...... 9-4 T Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Fluid, Power ...... 10-20 Tachometer ...... 5-12 Publications Ordering Wheel Adjustment ...... 5-2 Taillamps Information ...... 13-13 Wheel Controls ...... 5-3 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8 Storage Areas Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4 Vehicle Messages ...... 5-37 Armrest ...... 4-1 Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-14 Servicing the Cargo Cover ...... 4-3 Immobilizer ...... 2-14 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-44 Cargo Management System . . . 4-3 Third-Row Seats ...... 3-12 Shifting Center Console ...... 4-1 Time ...... 5-9 Into Park ...... 9-19 Convenience Net ...... 4-3 Tires Out of Park ...... 9-20 Floor Console ...... 4-2 Buying New Tires ...... 10-50 Sidemarker and Stoplamps Glove Box ...... 4-1 Chains ...... 10-55 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Instrument Panel ...... 4-1 Changing ...... 10-66 Signals, Turn and Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 Compact Spare ...... 10-77 Lane-Change ...... 6-4 Storing the Tire Sealant Designations ...... 10-38 and Compressor Kit ...... 10-65 Different Size ...... 10-51 INDEX i-11

Tires (cont.) Tow/Haul Mode ...... 9-24 U If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 10-56 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 5-20 Ultrasonic Parking Assist ...... 9-32 Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-44 Towing Uniform Tire Quality Inspection ...... 10-48 Driving Characteristics ...... 9-44 Grading ...... 10-52 Messages ...... 5-37 Equipment ...... 9-51 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-47 Pressure Light ...... 5-21 General Information ...... 9-43 Operation ...... 5-51 Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-43 Recreational Vehicle ...... 10-82 Programming ...... 5-47 Rotation ...... 10-48 Trailer ...... 9-48 Using this Manual ...... iv Sealant and Vehicle ...... 10-82 Compressor Kit ...... 10-58 Trailer Towing ...... 9-48 Sealant and Compressor Transmission V Kit, Storing ...... 10-65 Automatic ...... 9-22 Vehicle Secondary Latch System . . . 10-75 Fluid, Automatic ...... 10-11 Canadian Owners ...... iii Sidewall Labeling ...... 10-36 Messages ...... 5-38 Control ...... 9-3 Terminology and Transportation Program, Load Limits ...... 9-10 Definitions ...... 10-39 Courtesy ...... 13-9 Messages ...... 5-31 Uniform Tire Quality Turn and Lane-Change Personalization ...... 5-40 Grading ...... 10-52 Signals ...... 6-4 Remote Start ...... 2-5 Wheel Alignment and Tire Turn Signal, Security ...... 2-13 Balance ...... 10-53 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Speed Messages ...... 5-39 Wheel Replacement ...... 10-54 Towing ...... 10-82 When It Is Time for New Vehicle Care Tires ...... 10-49 Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 10-65 Tire Pressure ...... 10-42 i-12 INDEX

Vehicle Identification Wheels Number (VIN) ...... 12-1 Alignment and Tire Service Parts Identification Balance ...... 10-53 Label ...... 12-1 Different Size ...... 10-51 Vehicle Reminder Replacement ...... 10-54 Messages ...... 5-39 When It Is Time for New Ventilation, Air ...... 8-12 Tires ...... 10-49 Visors ...... 2-22 Where to Put the Child Voltage Devices, and Restraint ...... 3-54 Wiring ...... 10-29 Windows ...... 2-20 Voltmeter Gage ...... 5-13 Power ...... 2-20 Windshield W Wiper/Washer ...... 5-5 Warning Lights, Gages, and Winter Driving ...... 9-8 Indicators ...... 5-10 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-26 Warnings ...... iv Wipers Cautions and Danger ...... iv Rear Washer ...... 5-6 Hazard Flashers ...... 6-3 Wiring, High Voltage Washer Fluid ...... 10-21 Devices ...... 10-29 Washer Fluid Messages ...... 5-39